Aesthetics after Autonomy with Grant Kester

Money on the Left is joined by Grant Kester, professor of Art History at University of California, San Diego. We speak with Kester about his multi-decade career, researching and teaching the history of socially engaged art. 

Kester’s scholarship underscores the limits and contradictions of the dominant modern Western tradition of aesthetics. Such aesthetics value “autonomy,” insisting that the artist, the artistic medium, or art as an institution ought to stand alone and outside of society and its corrupting influences. Paradoxically, autonomy in this tradition is supposed to secure art’s political dimension by blunting and often deferring any claims to immediate social efficacy. Kester, by contrast, affirms what is variously called dialogical aesthetics or socially engaged art, a collaborative sensuous practice in public space, which aims to transform thought and action by forging complex relationships among artists and publics.

Here, we focus on Kester’s two recent books published by Duke University Press. In The Sovereign Self: Aesthetic Autonomy from the Enlightenment to the Avant-Garde (August 2023), Kester examines the evolving discourse of aesthetic autonomy from its origins in the Enlightenment through avant-garde projects and movements in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. In Beyond the Sovereign Self Aesthetic Autonomy from the Avant-Garde to Socially Engaged Art (December 2023), Kester then shows how socially engaged art provides an alternative aesthetic with greater possibilities for critical practice. Instead of grounding art in its distance from the social, Kester demonstrates how socially engaged art, developed in conjunction with forms of social or political resistance, encourages the creative capacity required for collective political transformation. 

Throughout our conversation, we tease out affinities between Kester’s scholarship and heterodox theories of public money and provisioning. Problematizing unquestioned desires to cordon off aesthetics from political economy, we call on artists and activists to contest, reconstruct, and build anew the forms of mediation that heterogeneously shape a shared sensuous life. 

Visit our Patreon page here: https://www.patreon.com/MoLsuperstructure

Music by Nahneen Kula: www.nahneenkula.com

Transcript

The following was transcribed by Mike Lewis and has been lightly edited for clarity.

Scott Ferguson:  Grant Kester, welcome to Money on the Left.

Grant Kester:  Why thank you, Scott and Billy, happy to be here.

Scott Ferguson:  So we’ve brought you on the show today to give you an opportunity to talk to us about your two new books from Duke University Press, which as you were telling us before we started recording, were actually part of one larger book project that got split into two. The first one is called The Sovereign Self: Aesthetic Autonomy from the Enlightenment to the Avant-Garde, and the second book is called Beyond the Sovereign Self: Aesthetic Autonomy from the Avant-Garde to Socially Engaged Art. But before we jump into this discussion about the two texts, we want to give you an opportunity to tell our listenership a little bit about your professional and perhaps personal background.

Grant Kester:  Very good. Happy to give you a little brief rundown. I’ll make this brief, because it’s probably not very interesting. But I grew up in Kansas City, and then moved to Washington DC for high school, and went to community college outside of DC, dropped out of community college, moved to Atlanta to work in commercial photography. When I was there, I got interested in photography in general, and I’d go to the galleries and so on. So that kind of drew me into art a little bit, really, for the first time, because I didn’t have much exposure to it before then. My mom used to like to decoupage old master paintings onto wastebaskets and stuff, which is kind of awesome. But nobody I knew that I grew up with was like, I’m gonna go to art school or anything like that. So that got me interested. And then I started to be interested in writing about it at that time. I published my first review probably in 1982 or so for Atlanta Art Papers. All that led to a shift, and I ended up going to art school in Baltimore, at the Maryland Institute College of Art in Baltimore, which is very old fashioned, but also not old fashioned in terms of conservative but just they’ve been around a long time. So art classes back then you had to sit there and draw from casts from Greek and Roman sculpture, that sort of a thing. But this is the 1980s, I think I was there for ‘84 through ‘86. So it was the height of postmodernism, and a lot of photo appropriation going on. So I did that kind of work. But also at the same time, because of my writing, I got interested in broader issues outside the arts. A lot of my early research is on reform culture, and reform movements in the United States, going back to the progressive era. History as a social documentary and the visual culture of political reform movements, and so on. When I was at the Maryland Institute, I curated an exhibition along with a faculty member named Diane Fessler, on activist forms of photography, basically. It was called “Expanding Commitment: Diverse Approaches to Socially Engaged Photography”. And that was in 1986. I was doing my art practice at the same time, but then I was shifting and finding it more interesting to deal with the kind of historical and theoretical issues. That led me to eventually get a job for an art magazine called The New Art Examiner. That was published in DC, so I ran their DC office. At that time, this was the middle of the “Culture Wars” of the 1980s. So we were in DC, I would talk to people at the endowment (National Endowment for the Arts) and I worked at the Washington Project for the Arts and the Corcoran at the same time, when the Robert Mapplethorpe show was canceled, and there were protests and so on. So I kind of got to see firsthand the turbulence of Culture Wars with Jesse Helms and all the rest of it at that time. That made an impression on me, I think in terms of the politics of culture. After that, I got another job as an editor at a journal called Afterimage in upstate New York, in Rochester. That would have been about 1990 or so. That’s a journal associated with media criticism, photography, video and so on, but it always had a pretty strong political orientation in terms of the editors before me, Catherine Lord or David Trend, who had an interest in the cultural politics of media. I had, at the same time, started a graduate program part time at the University of Rochester because at that point, I was like, Okay, I think I’m going to keep doing this writing research thing. Maybe I better actually get a degree. I was going to school part time and working as an editor full time, at Afterimage. I had a couple of essays at that point where I was, I think, segue-ing from the visual politics of photography and documentary into art more generally. One of them was “Rhetorical Questions,” which is an analysis of the ways in which certain kinds of art practices in the 1980s: appearing in galleries and museums would often be staged as these kinds of provocations and attacks on the viewer. I called the essay “Rhetorical Questions” because my experience was consistently that the people that were going to see the exhibits did not think they were the targets of the attacks. I realized there was a kind of recursive loop going on there where somebody’s being lectured or attacked, but the people that the work is being presented to see that as a hypothetical person. I realized that there’s a rhetorical discourse underneath this work, which has to do with evoking a certain kind of audience, the actual audience that shows up and consumes it. And I was interested in those disconnections in that essay. Then I did another essay, around 1995 called “Aesthetic Evangelists,” which was, on the other side of the coin, a critique of community based art practices at the time.

Scott Ferguson:  You were critiquing community based art practices at the time?

Grant Kester:  I was, yeah. There was a project called “Soul Shadows: Urban Warrior Myths” done by an artist from New Orleans. She’d had the experience of getting mugged in the French Quarter. This is an artist who was white, and she realized she was carrying along a lot of this kind of residual fear of Black men, which is a very positive reflective thing to be self aware of. To deal with that she decided to develop this open ended collaborative project with some young Black men in New Orleans who were…one of them might have been incarcerated, but they were associated with gang activity. And it turned into these large photos, where they dressed up a certain persona and so on and so forth, and became an installation. So the installation then traveled to places like Baltimore, and elsewhere, and it was used in conjunction with what at the time would have been kind of neo-conservative cultural and social policy initiatives to “scared straight”, and “Oh, see what happens with the gang members when they express contrition.” The whole thing felt kind of unseemly to me because it failed to problematize the nature of poverty and racism very clearly. It was being used in conjunction with these public agencies that were pushing a particular argument about Black poverty as being in some ways, there’s a whole series of these conservative arguments that go way back about “culture of poverty”, and it’s “Black poverty is the result of the lack of father in the home”, and Daniel Moynihan, and all of these really pernicious arguments that are what William Ryan called back in the day “blaming the victim”. So I saw this work being employed in that context. That led to a broader reflection on the problematics of middle class reform movements, and community based art practice. I think it was me just exploring the politics of two different domains, so to speak. Yeah. After Afterimage, I finished my dissertation, which was primarily on aesthetic philosophy and the 18th century, because I just got interested through my coursework in issues of the aesthetic and the politics of the aesthetic. I worked in the philosophy area and so the dissertation looks at the concept of possessive individualism, the idea of a certain kind of a self who sees their identity as caught up with their ability to impose their will on the world and appropriate it to their needs. The kind of thing you see in John Locke and early modern philosophers of that nature. I was looking at that in connection to early evangelical Christianity and the concept of harvesting souls, figures like William Wilberforce and a lot of the Methodists and so on. They’re really the pre-history of what we think of as evangelical Christianity in the 18th century and landscape gardens. Landscape gardens are a great example because they’re large gardens in England that were created by wealthy landowners and intended as a kind of Thorstein Veblen expression of their wealth and power, that they could have this much land that they’re not cultivating. There was this obsession with trying to make your landscape garden look larger than it really is. I got fascinated by the aesthetics of that and how the garden designers would try to design the gardens to look both natural and in some ways, completely natural, but were also completely manufactured. All of these were ways, I suppose for myself, that I was working through notions of the aesthetic in my dissertation. After that, I had a series of teaching jobs, Cranbrook Academy of Art, Washington State, Arizona State the usual schlep that one does. Then, I finally ended up at UCSD. So that’s the prehistory, anyway.

Scott Ferguson:  So am I right to see you making a linkage back then between a kind of not just a Lockean sense of self possession and world mastery, but there’s a Lockean version of the labor theory of value. The idea that the pre-social individual mixes their labor with nature and then whatever results is a kind of extension of that sovereign, that autonomous selfhood. Are you saying that the garden, the English Garden, becomes a way for a wealthy bourgeoisie or maybe nobility to project that kind of sense of labor and expression into a cultivated natural scape?

Grant Kester:  Yeah, that’s exactly right. I think it was Stowe, one of the landscape gardens, Stowe or Rousham. Before that was the Dutch style or the French style, which is very geometrical and rigid. It’s as though they get it from Versailles, that the sovereign ruler has to impose his will on nature and bend it to his needs. In England, they wanted it to look like nature naturally conformed to the desire to be possessed, which is very central to Kantian aesthetics, as well. So yes, it’s this idea, I suppose, of the bourgeoisie wanting to see its own worldview, that it’s uniquely equipped to master and tame and organize the natural world, and to extract resources from it, and creating almost like a virtual reality bubble that they can wander. They would have little perambulations around the gardens and so on. I actually link it to the development of early suburbs outside of London like Clapham Common because that landscaped garden as a kind of spatial container migrates into early suburban design in England and the Georgian era in the late 18th century. So yeah, for sure, and that’s so central to figures like Locke because they all want to make the argument that defining the self through the possession of nature is a kind of intrinsic condition of the human self as opposed to prior aristocratic models. This is the true nature of the self and it evolves naturally it is an artificially imposed, so that’s why it’s so important for them to the gardens still look like they’re just natural, even though there were massive amounts of human labor involved to create the gardens, to move Earth and create hills and lakes and stuff. It had to look like…

Scott Ferguson:  Not by the bourgeois themselves.

Grant Kester:  Exactly, yeah. They’d hire unemployed workers to pose as shepherds in hermitages. The whole thing was like a Disneyland of bourgeois perception. And so I think that interested me, and for me, that’s an aesthetic question, because it’s how do you organize the sensory world to confirm your own self image. For me, it ran all the way up to gated communities and so on. In the suburbs of Detroit when I was teaching at Cranbrook were these huge lawns and this isolation of the bourgeoisie from the broader world so that they can kind of indulge in a fantasy that they’re all self made, as opposed to dependent in a sense, yeah.

Billy Saas:  Reminded of an episode we had way back where we talked about the Franciscan monks who were so utterly opposed and disgusted by money that they would pay people to carry the money and sacks behind them, so they wouldn’t have to touch it. Just yeah, that the lengths people will go to, to preserve an image.

Grant Kester:  Yeah, that’s really interesting. Yeah, absolutely.

Scott Ferguson:  Much of your writing, as a professional academic, has been dedicated to and often controversially dedicated to exploring what is variously called socially engaged art, social practice art, a kind of dialogic aesthetic, I think you’ve called it. So I’m wondering if you could tell our listeners a little bit about — for those who are following along and have little sense of what this is, where it comes from, what it means what, what it’s related to what it’s not related to — what’s up with this socially engaged art scene that you’ve been caught up in and theorizing for a long time?

Grant Kester:  Okay, so this is an interesting question. That term “socially engaged art” emerges, I would say, in the 1980s. In conjunction with a body of work that was pretty marginal to the mainstream art world. Remember that during the 1980s the two big trends were Neo-Expressionist painting, which is kind of big, oil painted canvases by people like Julian Schnabel and Sandro Chia, and Francesco Clemente, and lots of oil paints being spread around. They looked a lot like expressionistic canvases from the 1920s, but 20 times as big. They were very much a throwback to earlier art practices. Then, there was this whole body of postmodern, appropriation based off and photo based work: Cindy Sherman, Sherry Levine and Richard Prince, figures like that. There was also, however, this adjacent body of work pretty localized in the US and Europe. But there were some people working that were building on activist art traditions that came out of the 60s and the 70s. Frankly, building on earlier precedents, that came together. There were multiple terms for it, people would say it’s activist art, socially engaged is just one of them. It’s an imperfect term. It’s problematic in many ways, because all artists, social. All are engaged with something or the other. But what differentiated this kind of work for me is that the engagement implied a reciprocal, in a way, responsibility to site or the audience that involved a kind of a feedback loop, if you will, in which the work wasn’t simply imposed onto a site. Think of Richard Serra’s famous Tilted Arc sculpture, which was a big controversy around that time. In a government plaza in New York City, a big corten steel sculpture put in the middle of the GSA (Government Services Administration) Plaza in Manhattan. And that is how conventional art would operate in a public space. You’d say, Okay, I’m going to come up with an idea in my studio, and I’m going to plop it down in the middle of a public space. Serra actually talks about that work as having a behavioral quality. I always found that interesting, because behavioralism is something we associate with well, in a way, like training animals and things like that. So there was the sense that the artist has that their job is to intervene in the public space, and to variously awaken or enlighten the public to alter their consciousness, which is, you know, all well and good. It’s what art does, but there was not a sense that Serra needed to actually consult with the people who would come into contact with the work ahead of time. He kind of knows. In a sense, the assumption is that the artist has already experienced an epiphany or an enlightenment of some kind, and that their job is to communicate that heightened sense of awareness to the viewer who was a priori assumed to have not achieved that level of insight. So if Tilted Arc represented one model for how the artist relates to the broader public outside of a museum or a gallery space, the works that I got interested in at the time tended to not carry forward the same presumption that artists didn’t have something to learn from the site. I guess that’s how I’d phrase it. Serra, and I don’t want to ventriloquize Serra, who just recently passed away, but I don’t think he would have seen his job as learning in detail about the site, at the complex micro political level. He would see the site and be aware of it as a kind of symbolic container in a Federal Plaza, with government workers and so on. But that would be about it. I was interested in practices that involve actually opening yourself up to the unexpected insights, that the artist might in some way learn from, be transformed by, the specific conditions of site, and public and space and community in ways that maybe would problematize all of those terms. That’s, for me, the engagement is an engagement that implies this reciprocal or dialogical, back and forth where the artist learns from, and is transformed by as well as exercising and effect on a particular site, or public. So that socially engaged concept gets carried forward into the 80s and the 90s. Again, along with lots of other terms, it gets confusing. I think the lack of a single terminology is probably fine. It’s a good thing, it suggests just how varied this practice is. The other thing that started to happen was these practices, which is what I’ve suggested, often tended to be collaborative, or collective, or participatory in some way. They often tended to be long in terms of duration, they might extend for quite a long period of time. They often involve the artist, and again, these are artists that are working outside the institutional art world, various forms of interaction with social movements, activist groups, and so on. So that term socially engaged, for me, has that particular resonance. What happened is that by the 80s, and the 90s, this kind of work was going on in lots of places, not just in the US or Europe. More and more networks of communication opened up in the 90s, and the early 2000s. A lot of these groups start to become aware of each other. It becomes more networked. Not coherent, necessarily, but a broader community of practitioners who are learning about each other’s work and so on. That is all proceeding, at the same time, the institutional art world occasionally will draw some of this work in for exhibitions, and biennials and so on. But generally, most of the work that I was looking at was not being produced with any direct connection to the institutional art world, or very little direct connection.

Scott Ferguson:  As a follow up, can you give us a preliminary counter example to the Serra’s work you mentioned? What is, for you, a quintessential exemplar of socially engaged practice?

Grant Kester:  Yeah, that’s a great question. And here’s an example. I mean, there’s lots of examples in that time period. But here’s one that I got to talk about in Conversation Pieces, which is my first book. That’s a project developed by a group called Wochenklausur, which is an Austrian collective whose name means “weeks of closure”. Their approach was to identify a site and over a period of several weeks to develop a project there, and they were invited to do a project in Zurich. They just they ended up wanting to do a project on the condition of sex workers in Zurich. Zurich had a very kind of whatever Calvinist, Puritanical attitude towards sex workers. They existed, there was a whole economy, but there was very little recognition or support. In many cases, they would struggle with housing issues and so on. Their goal was to try to get support from the city government to build basically a boarding house or “pensione” for sex workers in Zurich, which would have seemed impossible because of the political polarization among conservatives and so on in Zurich at that time, to even publicly admit that sex work is going on. And then to have the support or imprimatur of the government, and providing these people with a place to live, would seemed inconceivable. So they developed these “boat talks,” and they would take individual members of the different parties and government agencies and different stakeholders, activists, and so on, and they go out and Lake Zurich on this pleasure boat, and they didn’t record anything. They didn’t allow the media. And so a lot of people whose opinions about this question would have immediately in a more mediated space than politicized, like, I’m not allowed to say this because people will attack me, and so could communicate and reach a consensus to support this boarding house. Of course, this took weeks and it was accompanied by all sorts of complex machinations. But at the end of the day, they had that support, and they were able to actually get the boarding house built. Now, look, there’s all kinds of issues with a project of that nature that you can criticize. But what interested me more than just the other thing actually got done, which seems kind of miraculous. What interested me is the process of doing it, and that speaks to a very different relationship to site. They didn’t go into the site a priori, assuming here’s what needs to happen. They went into the site saying, Oh, this is a problem, that would be great if it could be resolved in some way. And instead of imposing a solution, they literally invited the people that were in the position to create a solution to talk. It’s such a simple and elegant thing. And of course, it won’t always work. We can’t always settle our differences by conversation. But it intrigued me and it was presented as an art practice. That raised questions for me about well, what is it about this that makes it an art practice? It was the antipode to Serra’s sovereign, if you will, consciousness, creating an image in the studio and putting it into the site, that’s all fine. That’s how most art is made. But I wasn’t really attracted to this other approach. And so I’d say Wochenklausur’s Boat Talks project is probably a good example.

Scott Ferguson:  To a lot of our listeners, they’re probably interested in what they’re hearing. They’re thinking, Oh, well, you know, there’s different kinds of ways of making art and, maybe, each their own. As we’ve said, you’ve been rather controversial, because the Serra practice is not just Serra. It is the dominant practice. There is a dominant going back centuries, as you show in your work, and as others have shown, a whole epistemology of art, a whole understanding of what art is, and what our isn’t, what the limits of art are, that are dedicated to this idea of autonomy, or this idea of sovereignty. That’s what you really take up in the first of your two volumes, and I’m wondering if you can tell us a little bit about how that came to be? Why is modern art so invested in sovereignty? And what are the limits and problems with that?

Grant Kester:  Yeah, so you know, I think the books came out of a gradual process because I’ve written Conversation Pieces and then I wrote The One and the Many which picks up on some of those questions. Throughout this, really going back to the 80s and before you know, I’ve lost track of how many times I would have these conversations where I might present the work and somebody saying: Why is this art? That’s not art, because X, Y, and Z. The work would be often criticized by critics associated with conventional approaches, as being un-aesthetic. That was very common “It’s not aesthetic” in some way. It often wasn’t just that this is an art, this isn’t “We don’t like it as art” it’s that it literally can’t be art. I felt that the practice was, I guess, in some ways, threatening some pretty deep ontological questions about what art is. It intrigued me because the projects I’ve looked at are all being produced by artists or not just artists, but artists working on people and being presented by them as art. I felt that it was important to learn and listen to what artists are saying they’re doing, and see if there’s something there that is being missed. Part of that led me to this question of rethinking the nature of the aesthetic, and this is where the two books come from. I couldn’t really come up with an aesthetic analysis of engaged art without settling accounts with the conventional aesthetic paradigm. That’s the one that supports the notion of the Artist as a kind of a sovereign intelligence. Yes, the first part of the book goes back and tries to trace the history of the aesthetic and sovereignty to figure out where that comes from. For me, it was important, a sovereignty, autonomy, because I felt that the aesthetic was often being collapsed into notions of autonomy, or sovereignty, unproblematically. That there was something in the history of the aesthetic that was being lost in that. Oh, it’s just a matter of the artist has to be absolutely free. Their consciousness is a model for the rest of us to follow. I felt there was something important about the aesthetic that was being lost, that had to do with the aesthetic from its original meaning, right. It’s “aisthesis” in Greek, which means sense-based knowledge. Something about the way the knowledge we get through our senses is legitimate, that our sensory experience of the world generates important insight. Of course, in certain versions of the aesthetic, the knowledge of the body is subordinated to the mind, or the intelligence, or sentiment, and emotion, subordinated to reason. That kind of gets baked into certain accounts of the aesthetic, almost unselfconsciously. So I felt like there was something lost in collapsing the aesthetic into notions of autonomy, about the status of somatic or bodily experience. The other thing that interested me about the aesthetic was that the aesthetic and its earliest versions has to do with how consciousness is transformed. The critique of judgment is all about how people learn to experience their selfhood differently. It’s about the relationship between transformations and individual consciousness or self awareness, and broader trends, social, maybe even political transformation. How does having my consciousness transformed relate to broader social and political change, is what I drew out in that. That whole complex set of issues was getting lost. Instead, you so often find this kind of routine invocation of autonomy and sovereignty. You can’t make art that goes outside the art world because it will be collapsed into or appropriated by these impure forces. There’s a whole kind of problematic binary opposition that I wanted to try to work through a little bit and break down some of these things like mind over body, or pure and impure or artworld and impure social and political world and so on.

Billy Saas:  Would ‘individual’ and ‘collective’ be another one of those kinds of divisions that could play into that?

Grant Kester:  Absolutely. That’s why I write about the “washing the flag” or Lava la Bandera performances in Peru in 2000, which were a series of, of actions that were developed by a collective, the CSC or Civil Society Collective, composed of artists and activists and it developed a performance based practice at the moment that Alberto Fujimori was attempting to stay in power by limiting the freedom of the press and stage a kind of…He was already in power, but kind of keep himself in power and elections were kind of soft coup or something along those lines, right? By repressing the election process. This group came together and they started these actions, as a collective, of washing the Peruvian flag in the main plaza outside of the government buildings in Lima. And it fascinated me because it was such an innocuous gesture like they’re just washing…It was just a few of them at first, just a few individuals washing the flag. Okay, who cares? But the government realized that it was dangerous. They weren’t throwing rocks or anything. They were just washing the flag and hanging it up to dry. Like performance art, it looked like something from the 70s. Right, like performance art. But the government reacted really strongly and saw that symbolic gesture as a threat. What happened was, it started to spread. It became collective. It went from a handful of people washing some flags. Well that wouldn’t really pose much of a threat. But all of a sudden, you had 500 or 1000 people in this plaza every weekend. Then you started to see people doing the same gesture in towns and villages across Peru. The effect of that wasn’t simply Oh, well, then that led to the ouster of Fujimori. But it gave people a sense of the strength of solidarity in Peru at the time against Fujimori, because there was a sense of hopelessness. Like he’s going to do it again, he’s going to stay in power, and there’s no hope, there aren’t enough of us. All of a sudden, the viral contagion of that gesture made people feel a sense of agency that they have not felt before or encouraged them to do so. So yes, that’s the key connection to me because conventional art is all about transforming consciousness. Richard Serra’s Tilted Arc was supposed to make the government workers see this huge barrier, and say, Ah, the barriers a symbol or metaphor for the constraint of government bureaucracies. And I see I’m an apparatchik that’s employed by this entire oppressive system, I get it. Right. So conventional art is all about transformation of consciousness, but it always has to be limited to the individual. There’s never an understanding of how that might expand or become scalable. Things like Lava la Bandera and the Escrache in Argentina that I talked about, and Saba Zavarei’s work in Iran, of singing in public, all of these gain their power by their proliferation, as opposed to their constraint and limitation to the individual. That goes back to this idea of the aesthetic which is in Kant the sensus communis, common sense, in the aesthetic is what happens when we as individuals intuit our connection to a larger social whole. But it can only unfold in the individual consciousness. That idea, that linkage, actualized was really interesting to me in these practices. So yeah, Billy, absolutely. From individual to collective. That’s the key movement, I think.

Scott Ferguson:  To develop that a little bit more, you know, one of the things I really appreciate about the genealogy or the genealogies that you lay out of both autonomous art and socially engaged art and thinking about them, is that you’re often de-familiarizing really well known histories and well known figures and bringing out the limits of them, and in doing so, you’re not just critiquing them, you’re also drawing out tension. Forgive me for using such hamfisted terms, but a villain in your first book can turn out to actually have seeds of heroism in your second book. Friedrich Schiller is the beginning of a problem in book one, but in book two, the play drive has this possibility that can outstrip Schiller, and I’m wondering, maybe you can talk a little bit about Schiller, you have also a very complicated relationship to Marx’s significance in this history. Also Leninism and the historical avant-garde. Just get into some of these details that I find absolutely fascinating.

Grant Kester:  Of course. Yeah, I like your point about the complexity of it. I think there’s a tendency, I don’t know how widespread but I have encountered it, to a certain notion of, you’ve encountered this a lot in art criticism, of purity. That is a particular theory and particular practice is either completely, irredeemably corrupt and co-opted, or it can’t be questioned. And I think there’s almost like a theological underpinning to a lot of that in art criticism where we get identified with these positions. You see it in the debates over ethics versus aesthetics and so on and in art criticism going back 10 or 15 years. You see a version of this in, I suppose, certain forms of left political theory, which is that, and I talk about this in the second book, that the only legitimate form of political change is something that effectively reproduces the convulsive overturnings of the Russian Revolution in 1917. If it doesn’t seem like a revolution that completely clears away everything that came before and rebuilt from scratch, anything that is partial or incremental, fails. Which has always struck me as problematic. For one thing, it’s not as though the Bolshevik Revolution was reinvented. Autocracy continued on in Russia quite nicely with a different set of names attached to it than Czarist names. So there is never an absolute overturning like that. It doesn’t exist in human history. I always felt that, in the same way with particular theorists, that there’s almost always with human complexity, and there are resources that are for me, for what I’m interested in doing that are productive and generative, and others that aren’t. Schiller is a good example of that. Schiller’s analysis of the kind of early modernity and the soul destroying effect of modern life. And this is a guy that’s writing in pre-unification Germany. It’s a bunch of duchies and principalities, one of the more backwards parts of Europe, in a way, in terms of what modernity looks like. Yeah, England was different, but Germany, not so much. Yet, he could see how damaging to the human self, certain forms of modernization were. The instrumentalization of other people in the natural world, and so on. So there’s a lot of important stuff. I’ve got on my wall cover of AIZ, workers illustrated newspaper. And that’s this Life magazine for German workers, basically, from the 20s and early 30s. John Heartfield, the photo montage artist, did their covers. And I’ve got a cover that he did that’s basically an Nazi propaganda minister on the occasion of Schiller’s 175th birthday and he’s saying, “who is this guy, I don’t believe anything he says. I’d arrest him if he was alive today.” The Nazis really didn’t like Schiller, because he critiqued modernization, and he critiqued it from a kind of spiritual perspective that it was soul destroying. He said, You need to rise up against authoritarianism. There’s always these mixed…it’s like the Enlightenment in relation to colonial expansion that I talk about in the second book. There’s robust anti imperialist discourse in the enlightenment of all places. So anyway, that’s just a way to say, I think the way I think tends to avoid too many of these binary oppositions of pure and impure and so on. It doesn’t mean you don’t circle back around and say, yeah, there’s problems with Schiller, and so on. But it’s important to think, well, in a more dialogical manner, right? There’s a back and forth that goes on, and you extract those elements that are productive, and then don’t worry about the others. So these ideas also come up in the way that I understand the Marxist tradition. Here I want to focus briefly on the Leninist tradition. In many ways, there’s a tension in modern political history and the Marxist tradition. There’s a tension between revolutionary change, and what I talked about in the book as prefigurative forms of experience of various kinds. Revolutions have always, in the Marxist tradition, in pursuit of a society that would be defined by Liberty, Fraternity and Equality. 1789 in the French Revolution, those are the watchwords. Of course, the Marxist critique of 1789 is that it’s a bourgeois revolution. The promise of liberty, freedom, and equality was never realized fully for everyone, including colonial subjects, including women, including the working class never got there. Every revolution failed in some sense, until we got to 1917. We ended that cycle in the French tradition with the Paris Commune. The Paris Commune is an extremely complicated moment in French history and is a failure yet again. Lenin famously celebrates when the Bolshevik Revolution survives longer than the Paris Commune did before it was destroyed. He does a little dance and so on, like, Yes, we did it where he finally had the right kind of revolution. What he learned, what he takes away from the commune is you cannot prematurely de-sublimate utopian values. What does that mean? It means you look at the commune, you look at Courbet’s work in the commune. There’s all sorts of reinvention of what life could be in a commune: the police force is done away with and schools are open and free and galleries, the Louvre is open to the public. We eliminate a lot of the bureaucratic positions and so on. There’s this euphoric kind of moment. It’s kind of like Russia after the Bolshevik Revolution, the Civil War. You find this euphoria of potential. Wow, we had a revolution. Now we get to actually have liberty, equality and fraternity and freedom, real freedom for everyone. That’s a really poignant moment. And so Lenin looks at the commune and says the reason the commune failed is because they celebrated too soon. What they needed to do was be hard-nosed revolutionaries. It shows that we can’t rely on the working class, to have the hard-nosed, disciplined mentality of a bourgeois intellectual, which is what the party is right? He talks about Karl Kautsky, the German Marxist’s famous remark about Communism having to be brought to the masses from outside from bourgeois intellectuals, or alienated bourgeois intellectuals. Lenin’s lesson is that revolution has to be an utterly hard nosed unyieldingly hierarchical process. And yes, the dictatorship of the proletariat, there is no appeal to justice. If the party says you are an enemy, you go to jail or you’re executed. It’s like the elements of the terror all over again. So I was interested in that image of what revolution can be that gets carried forward. Of course, a version of it that migrates into the avant-garde is the idea that art’s role is to attack and assault the viewer. That becomes a symbolic and displaced expression of the role of violent political revolution at the cognitive level, in a sense. But there were other voices in the Bolshevik party, including Alexander Bogdanov, who was an early founder of the Bolsheviks, right, and Bogdanov says, No, the idea that the party should have absolute and unyielding control, and we have to impose this hierarchical discipline on society and set up the Cheka and police state and all the rest, which begins to happen under Lenin, the Cheka is created under Lenin’s watch, says no, if your revolution looks like that, then it’s likely going to reproduce that same level of authoritarianism after it’s over, whenever that comes. So my feeling from just my own reading of history is that revolutions that are predicated on such a complete disavowal of the prefigurative emancipatory and utopian elements of human sociality, are unlikely to end up producing anything more than more inequality and injustice. That puts me athwart of a strong Marxist tradition, which I still find figures like Zizek wanting there to be another Leninist revolution or Badiou who’s like a big fan of the Chinese Cultural Revolution because it got all the nasty bourgeois Chinese people out of the way or, I mean Badiou was celebrating the Khmer Rouge for crying out loud until like a decade ago, still. That is not my experience and understanding of the history of communist revolution. That led to my interest and practices of political social change that incorporate within themselves these prefigurative elements. New social architectures, new forms of being together, new forms of decision making. Now, of course, there has to be a tactical dimension to any change. But that tactical dimension, the instrumental element of change, like we have to do this and produce that effect and attack this agency of government or whatever has to, for me exists in it in a relationship with these other elements, or you end up reproducing the very thing you thought you were fighting against. I know that for many that’s liberal humanist claptrap, and not sufficiently and all the rest. But, it’s just based on my reading of history, in my experience on this planet, that that’s more likely to produce a decent kind of life after the revolution occurs. Frankly, what does revolution even look like? I think of the United States today, where we’ve got these really insane Christian Nationalist ideas being promulgated, at all levels of society. Dramatic restrictions on abortion, and attacks on immigration and so on, that represent the belief systems of a fairly small part of the public. Really, I mean it’s scary how many people believe these things, but still, it’s maybe 30%. The only reason the Supreme Court has six ideologues bought and purchased ideologues on it, is because the Federalist Society has been working for 30 years to do that, like right wing, Neo fascist groups, white supremacists have been working for decades to infiltrate school boards, and they have a very mobilized base. So you have these belief systems, which the vast majority of the American public disagree with, that are being imposed on us. And that’s what a revolution would look like, wow. If Trump gets reelected, that will look like a revolution. But how did it happen? It took three decades, you know, you can go back and look at the history of neoconservatism and Aryan Nations and KKK and trace that genealogy, it was a slow patient work. And on the left, there’s often not a recognition of how important that kind of work is. Can you imagine a parallel version of that, that was actually devoted to progressive, enlightened ideas about how society should operate that had been going on for 30 years, that was supported by, you know, 75% of the American people. But we don’t have that so much. So anyway, that’s all a long winded way of saying that, for me, that prefigurative and the tactical element of the political need to be conjoined. To take it back to engaged art, that’s what I see happening on an experiential level and along with the practices that I write about, it’s just one space. It’s not like the only place this work has been done. I’ve talked about that Black Lives Matter and the Cleveland Convening in the book, because it’s such a great example of this. That wasn’t an engaged art project project. But what occurred is the Cleveland Convening, when they they blocked the arrest of a young Black man, was fascinating, because it was a moment at which there were all of these schisms within the group, the Black Lives Matter group, in the convention center, that were threatening to drive them apart into camps and so on. And they instantly reconnected into a collective that could peacefully prevent the arrest of this young man. So it’s, it’s a passage from one of the books that I described. Anyway, this kind of work is happening in lots of places. It’s obviously not just in the arts or engaged art. I think it’s part of a broader shift in how we are conceptualizing social and political change.

Billy Saas:  I suppose I have the cynical and the optimistic path to pursue. But let’s end with the optimistic and tarry in the cynical for a moment. It seems to me a lot of–even left progressive circles–a lot of this investment in autonomy, and the aesthetic and modern art is about generating and preserving value. It’s about ownership. It’s about persona, it’s about cults of personality, and ultimately a need to have a job and to make a buck. Right. I think that that would be kind of a self defense, I could anticipate coming from somebody who is espousing the views that you’re critical of, and why they might be defensive. Well, at the end, I have a house of kids, I got it, I gotta do this, right. This is the paradigm we’re in. How do we get over that or through that, or do you have some examples or models that you think we can look to or point to share with our comrades and colleagues and say, No. Another way lies this misdirection?

Grant Kester:  Well, let me say a couple of things. One, there’s this tension between a kind of spontaneous all encompassing revolution and gradual. I don’t want to overstate that. But I would say that even in the case of Russia, Lenin didn’t expect the Russian Revolution. He famously said I’d be happy for a bourgeois revolution. We’re like the most backwards in terms of this Hegelian version of capitalism that he would have believed in, was in an unlikely place to have it. So we’re often being surprised even by people that we imagined to have a privileged access to the truth. So things can happen. Entirely possible that it happens all the time, frankly. Rosa Parks sits down in a bus, and certain events, performances happen that trigger not maybe revolutionary change, but pretty big and important change. But I also would say that the precondition for those events like the Russian Revolution, or the civil rights movement was decades of work that is more subterranean. So the subterranean work, the thankless daily work that people do to foment social changes. That’s the ground on which any of those, as Badiou would say, evental changes occurs? They don’t come from the consciousness of the individual theorist or Vanguard leader, they come from human Praxis in a myriad of ways. Yes, people have to survive. I mean, I teach art history for a living. We’re all flawed and imperfect revolutionaries, for sure. But there is, I suppose, at the end of the day, and look, Billy, I’m completely with you. I can be completely cynical about all of this, because you just look at it…Yeah, and so what? Things are actually getting worse. Doesn’t matter how many art collectors do how many things that’s not really moving the needle in any significant way. That’s all true. It’s not hard at all to kind of be a little despondent about that. But I also look around at a world that’s changed dramatically in the last five or 10 years, that’s changed because a whole crap ton of really mean evil people have been working to make it change for a long time. They didn’t give up. Right? They didn’t get despondent. This goes back to Goldwater and before right. It goes back to Father Coughlin in the 1930s. They didn’t give up. So there is a need, I suppose for what Gramsci says, “Pessimism of the intellect, optimism of the will.” That is, you’re right, and I can completely see…I myself feel like things are hopeless, and why am I writing about these little projects that didn’t really do as much as they might have done, but there also has to be, for me at least, a capacity for hope. I think you mentioned the art world. Part of what drew me to this question of autonomy is this odd disconnect in left circles around what art can be and in some ways, it really unreconstructed notion of avant-garde autonomy. There’s a history of this kind of lack of a kind of awareness of how artistic practice has begun to change. Goes back to like Clement Greenberg writing for partisan review, setting the mold for a kind of a formalist notion of art in the midst of revolution. He famously says in “Avant-Garde and Kitsch”, this essay he wrote in 1939 I want to say, that the only hope to preserve revolutionary consciousness lies in these isolated avant-garde experiments that artists are doing in the privacy of their studios.

Scott Ferguson:  Paid for by the bourgeoisie. He says it explicitly, yeah. And Kitsch is when the bourgeoisie stops paying for the autonomist artists.

Grant Kester:  Exactly, he calls it the umbilical cord of gold.

Scott Ferguson:  He does, yes, he did.

Grant Kester:  I wrote for The Nation back in the 90s. I used to write reviews for them, and I can remember that their art critic was Arthur Danto. God bless Arthur Danto. He’s a great philosopher, but the last thing you’d find him writing about would have been activist art practices. There’s an insecurity on the left, that they’ll appear as Zhadnovites or something. They’ll appear like they’re supporters of the most vulgar forms of Stalinist social realism if they don’t go out of their way to embrace so called advanced avant-garde art. It all went to Verso Press as it is sometimes because they have this relationship to October, the journal October. There’s been a failure, from my perspective on left associated cultural platforms, to really come to terms with how art has changed in the last 20 years. Now, if you look at theorists, you’ll look at Rodrigo Nunes “Neither Vertical Nor Horizontal” or Asad Haider or Hamed Hosseini figures like that. You find political theorists going yay, yeah, we need to combine the vertical and the horizontal as Nunes calls it. But the art side, the people that see themselves as invested in art criticism and so on, still remains quite hidebound in my perspective in terms of the kinds of art that are recognized and accepted and constructs quite astoundingly odd arguments to me. There’s a guy Nicholas Brown who wrote a book Autonomy: The Social Ontology of Art under Capitalism. A lot of this is neo-Adornoian, that is Adorno, Theodor Adorno, Frankfurt School critic, famously, very critical, like Greenberg of mass culture, or popular culture, and very supportive of art as having to be opaque, hard to understand, isolated, can’t find an audience because everybody is too benumbed by consumer culture to even be aware enough to understand it, but that’s okay. It’s like a message in a bottle to a future generation that might wake up enough to actually have a revolution. All of these arguments get carried forward and in his book, Brown develops this whole argument about how any art that relates itself in any way to political change immediately becomes what he calls a consumable sign of opposition. Rancière, Jacques Rancière, says something like this. He says once art collapses into political mobilization, it disappears. So the very figures you think you would turn to on the left to write intelligently about art often feel invested in this very conservative model of what art can be. Now, Brown, to his credit, writes about popular culture, but the argument he makes comes out of Frederic Jameson and Adorno, which is that art preserves its radicality, not by getting on the art world and engaging with actual political and social change, but remaining in. It only has meaning in the institutional art world, and its meaning that it only occurs as it pushes off against or critiques certain generic rules and norms and compositional norms, and so on, specific to art media, which is kind of a Greenberg argument. It can’t overtly address the political. As soon as it does that, it’s lost. It disappeared as art. In Brown’s book, he actually makes this argument that based on that argument, that art becomes political by critiquing certain ideas and compositional structures that are unique to particular art media, like painting, or film, or television. He makes this whole argument that progressive political cultural production is associated with the original version of The Office, as opposed to the US version. He has this whole argument about how the original version, the UK version of The Office, was real, critical, because it engaged and subverted the generic conventions of comedy, in a way that the US version did not. Or The Terminator was authentically in a way avant-garde work that carried forward really kind of a prototypical revolutionary awareness, whereas Avatar was not because it did not destabilize the generic conventions of film in the way that The Terminator did. People end up tying themselves in knots to make the argument that this work is political in a meaningful way, and that’s okay, I don’t object to that. Look, I would say maybe you need to work a little harder to come up with the argument because it doesn’t, for me, seem very convincing. But I appreciate that that’s what most art criticism wants to do. The part that bothers me is the parallel argument therefore any artists that don’t work that way, that operate outside the institutional art world, or reduce political resistance to “I’m going to challenge the norms of filmmaking in some formalist manner” have stopped making art. That is not true for me. I think that they are making a different kind of art. It saddens me that it’s so hard to find critics and theorists associated with this arguably on the left side of the spectrum, if you will, that don’t want to accept that. So I do. I guess I’ll say that’s where I come down and say, Yes, it is art, but it’s a kind of an art that requires you to rethink your definition of art and to rethink your definition of autonomy, because autonomy is the basis for a lot of these arguments in Rancière and Nicholas Brown and Walter Benn Michaels and a number of these critics.

Billy Saas:  It seems like one way to put it would be like overtly political art obviates the need for the critic. And so the critics are somehow invested in and preserving their aura and prestige of interpretation from the inimitable genius.

Grant Kester:  One, Adorno literally will say this in aesthetic theory, that is he’s not really convinced there is anybody that looks at Beckett plays or Schoenberg compositions and really grasps them. The only person that does is the critic, and that’s okay. He talks about the artist as a deputy, working on behalf of the kind of revolutionary consciousness the working class should exhibit but does not yet. It’s like Lukacs talks about the “imputed consciousness” of the word proletariat in history, class consciousness, it’s what the working class…the whole argument of Marxism is that they will spontaneously evolve class consciousness through the oppression of the capitalist system and industrialization. But they failed to do so. So somebody else must have to experience it for them. And that somebody else is the Vanguard theorist, it’s going to be the artists for Adorno, and so on. They become a kind of a repository, or a talisman, or something, a vessel, that carries revolutionary consciousness forward in a non-revolutionary period. All of those vessels are basically ending up as commodified elements within bourgeois cultural productions in galleries and museums, and Beckett retrospectives and everything else. For me, it’s like, I get the argument, I just don’t find it very compelling. I do think that the work that is going on, that engages with the political and social, doesn’t, and this is typical, like, “well, this is what Rancière says.” “Well, it’s nothing new. It’s just protest banners and things like that. It’s just making political demands in a very social realist manner.” Part of why I spend so much time in my book talking in detail about things like the “escrache” tradition in Argentina, or Lava la Bandera, or Saba Zavarei and various public performances in Iran, is precisely to challenge this idea that all political art or activist art is crude and simplistic, and relies on crude versions of representation. Like its worker posters from the 1930s. It’s just not true. This work for me is incredibly complex in terms of how it relates to representation, in terms of how it understands the subject position of the artist, and in terms of how it relates, challenges, stands in some relationship of tension with political transformation. It’s a very complicated body of work, if you look at it, and you’re willing to see it. I guess, that’s kind of been my commitment to try to see what’s actually going on in the practice. Then, to bring what I see back through the traditions of the aesthetic and just say, Okay, you want to say this other work is aesthetic, that’s fine. I get that, I can see why. This work also draws on that tradition, but it draws a different set of lessons. That’s all. It’s just a different set of lessons.

Scott Ferguson:  Can you tell us a little bit more about the Escrache experiments? Maybe in a little bit more detail, and maybe work through some of their complexities. And also, I want to say, you know, let’s not knock work or posters in the 30s. You know, they’re probably pretty cool and interesting, too.

Grant Kester:  I would not disagree with that. Yeah, I was reaching. I didn’t want to talk about Zhdanov and Soviet policy. So I was trying to think of something that would be…but yes, absolutely. Socialist Realism can actually be quite interesting, some of it’s quite interesting and complex.

Scott Ferguson:  Yeah, some people argue that Socialist Realism is one breed of modernism.

Grant Kester:  Indeed, there is indeed that argument and I wouldn’t disagree. I have a particular interest in the history of woodcuts, and I’ve been researching woodcuts in the May 4th Movement in China. We usually think of woodcuts is, again, one of these crude folk forms, but they can be in the same manner…One of my interests going forward is to write on realism, because there is such a truncated version of what realism means that comes out of the work that you see going on in the 20s and 30s. It’s far more complex than a lot of traditional histories allow. So yeah, I completely agree with that. The Escraches emerge in around 2000 or so, maybe a little bit earlier, in Argentina, and escrache means to scratch or reveal something. It has the implication of revealing something hidden. So they built out of HIJOS (the sons and daughters of the disappeared), which is a collective of, a lot of it was the mothers of young people who were murdered or imprisoned by the military junta that ruled Argentina that took power in the 1970s. You’re probably familiar with and listeners will be familiar with that kind of awful history of 1000s of people. They’d been taken to these isolated camps and tortured and drugged and then dropped into the Rio de la Plata River, from helicopters and all the rest. After the military leadership of the country lost power, after the Falklands War, this whole history kind of disappeared in Argentinian public life. Early on, there were some laws. Oh, you can’t get a job in the government, again, if you are part of the military regime, and so on, but eventually those kinds of things get suspended. There was never a public accounting for the fact that there were hundreds, if not 1000s, of people walking freely around Argentina who’d been responsible for killing your son, or your cousin, or your brother, or your parents. So there’s a generation of young Argentinians that came of age in the late 90s, early 2000s, that came out of this historical amnesia. HIJOS, this collective of survivors, had begun to do legal research, and so on, to try to identify who some of these people were, that were walking around with complete impunity, because they were, of course, not going to announce their role. But yet they would have lives and get jobs in the government and so on and so forth. They worked with some art collectives; Grupo Etcetera, which is one of them, kind of a performance based collective of artists; Grupo de Arte Callejero, which is the group of street artists, to develop these performances now. Performances would be staged outside their homes once they identified, oh, this is the guy that ran the secret camp at the naval facility outside Buenos Aires. He ran the secret detention center, where they raped women and then gave the babies to members of the Junta and then killed the mothers. He was that guy that ran that center. HIJOS would originally protest outside the houses, but that wasn’t as effective as they wanted it to be. Police would come and so on. They started much more elaborate performances, where this collective would go to the neighborhood where they were going to do an intervention months ahead of time, and they would talk to the people. They’d set up a center and they’d research the history of the neighborhood and let people know oh, by the way, the person that lives in this apartment building right over here is– this is who it is because you didn’t know. They call it the pre-escrache. It’s a research phase. It is an organizational phase. Then the escrache itself was a public performance. They would have what they call Murga bands, which are bands with trombones and drums and accordions or violins that have a particular tradition in Argentina. They’d marched through the street to the home. They would do these performances where they act out the crimes of the person that they’re targeting. But in a very kind of Commedia dell’arte manner. They were very over the top hyperbolic, almost silly. Google them on YouTube, and you’ll find them there. They’re almost meant to be humorous in the way and absurd and over the top. They do the performances, and the police would come and try to prevent them from getting near the house. Because the penultimate gesture was to then throw balloons with red paint that signified the blood of the people they’ve murdered onto the walls to mark the home. So the performances evolved in part to distract the police so that the people with the balloons could have a clear line of fire. There was a tactical dimension to the performances, but it also had the effect of teaching the people in the neighborhood, restaging the crimes because people didn’t always know what the person had done. These would be recorded. So they’d throw the bones at the end of the performance, and then the home would be marked for a significant amount of time, at least, from this blood red paint. These still go on today, the whole escrache tradition, again, has expanded and gone into other realms, You find it taken up in other parts of Latin America, as well. What interested me, there’s a lot of things to be said about the complexity of that work. Oh, I should mention the Grupo de Arte Callejero (GAC) would also put signs up as part of the pre-escrache that look like actual road signs in the vicinity of the home, but they would say things like 200 meters to the home of a genocidal torturer or something like that. So you’d be driving down the street, and it looks like an actual sign. So the whole streetscape would be restaged in a sense to facilitate this performance. But what interested me is that nine times out of 10, from what I can understand from talking to people involved with them, the person was not home when they were staging their performance. It really wasn’t this cathartic assault, they would know because they’d be aware that people were meeting and there was talk going on. They wouldn’t even be home, but they didn’t need to be home because that person was…Yeah, it would have been gratifying to yell and spit in their face or whatever you killed my relative. But what mattered more, I think, was the sense of solidarity and agency that was provided by the people that were involved in the action itself, and the viral proliferation of the recordings. It’s not simply a matter of political art reduced to screaming at somebody to believe something different. And this goes back to the prefigurative, that there was a solidarity enhancement, a pedagogical dimension to this work that had to do with expanding the awareness of the Argentinian public of the nature of these crimes. In fact, eventually, the result was a shift of laws in Argentina that cracked down on the impurity of the elements of people that were associated with the junta. So I thought that reception of the work was really interesting, because for me, and again, it kind of collapses some of these ideas that activists and political art is always this kind of crude, simplistic gesture. That representational repertoire of their performances called on all kinds of theatrical traditions in the kinds of ways that the modes of address were quite complicated. Same thing in the Lava la Bandera. So those are both examples of work that is political and engaged in political and social change, but cannot be reduced to a kind of crude caricature, at least for me. Yeah.

Scott Ferguson:  Yeah, that’s wonderful to hear about, and especially once you start talking about the rich details of the construction, the preparation, the playing out of these events, to speak back to the cynical concerns, the Ah well, but what does it amount to? I guess when I hear about these kinds of movements, I think to myself, Wow, this is incredibly meaningful, and it’s even more meaningful that there were legal results, but I would say that it’s the actions, the activities, the aesthetic experiences themselves are already meaningful. It’s wonderful that those meanings are paying dividends, so to speak, and creating more change. But even if it hadn’t, it still seems like it already created change. If anything, I would say in response to criticisms that this is not enough. It’s not because they’re not autonomous enough, it’s because there aren’t enough of these experiments going on constantly all the time. It’s not, Oh, we should have less because they’re not overturning right wing forces around the world completely. Let’s have more, and the more we have, the better luck we’re gonna have to overturn right wing forces around the world completely.

Grant Kester:  I agree, it kind of seems common sense to me. Guess what, the Fourth International does not exist right now. There is no global, networked, oppositional movement that is poised to take control. How do you get to the point of having more power to change things? It only begins this way locally, and situationally, and to dismiss it all as Oh, it’s just reformist. And all that’s doing is validating the existing system of domination because they can point to these singular gestures and say, See how tolerant we are. I mean, yeah, that’s true, and that can be disabling. Also, I don’t know how else you get to broader forms of systemic change, except through the hard work, the piecemeal work of operating at this level. That’s why in the book I talk about broader projects like Lava la Bandera that contributed to Fujimori’s overthrow or Laurie Jo Reynolds Tamms Year Ten project that led to the closing of a supermax prison in Illinois, but also very localized work like Saba Zavarei’s work. She’s an Iranian artist that left Iran after the Green Revolution, and had come back for a visit and was in quite a well known mosque in Isfahan. She recorded herself singing a love song to Iran, which again, is like, okay, but actually you’re not allowed to do that. It’s not against the law, but it’s against the guidelines of what women can do in public. She posted it on our website, it just says I was moved by this beautiful space, and I sang. She got, like, 1000s of women responding to her, and then doing it themselves, and posting their own public scene performances. There’s this whole body of public dancing, which if your Hijab is not adjusted properly, you can end up dead as we saw not so long ago in Iran. Because of the Basij and the policing of the streets by the morality police and so on. That work was just her in this mosque, her consciousness transformed. But again, it became scalar. And now it was 100 women and 1000 women. I’m not saying Oh, and because of that the protest movements in Iran developed later. But that is one piece of the precondition for broader changes. I talk about the offering of mind in a project in Myanmar, that was done in 2005 in The One and the Many, Chu Yuan. The military regime in Myanmar had driven any Western groups out of the country, the Red Cross, and so on. There are very few artists working there. Chu Yuan and her partner Jay Koh from Singapore. So they were kind of tolerated. She did a project based on this Theravadic Buddhist tradition. And in Theravada Buddhism, you make prayers and give contributions at a temple for the temples that have more gold leaf put on it or what have you. By doing that you buy yourself good will for your next incarnation. You make sacrifices now so that when you’re reborn, you’ll be at a higher level. It’s an argument that’s made in Myanmar society that the political leadership and so on is there because they were so good in their previous lives, they deserve that authority. Chu Yuan came up with this idea where she had young people, just people she knew in Myanmar, come up with their own wishes for what they wanted to change about Myanmar society. Created with them, these little chicken wire stupa head pieces, and they put their wishes on scrolls, because they’d write them on scrolls and the headpiece acting out, again, at a very limited individual level. She did this with a fairly small number of people. She took pictures of them, and she documented them. One was on the cover of that book. They had to be extremely careful just walking down the streets of Rangoon like this, because that could attract attention. That’s why they’re all photographed from behind, so you can’t see their faces, because they could have gotten arrested. Because the assumption is their wishes might have been things like Gosh, I wish our country wasn’t run by a military dictatorship or something along those lines, we don’t know. So again, very small changes in consciousness. I want to argue, I make this argument in the book, that there is a capillarity relationship between those incremental and small. This goes back to the aesthetic. Individual consciousness transformed, how does that become scalable? How does that proliferate and extend and build? And yes, it can feel hopeless. But again, like you’ve all said, I don’t know how else we get to the broader forms of resistance except through this hard work.

Billy Saas:  I guess there’s a pretty clear analogy between, I think, what we’re up to, and why we’re interested in talking to you at Money on the Left. It’s as much for us I think about a project of recovery and discovery of these incremental, sometimes spontaneous practices and experiments over time and across the world, in public provisioning for the public good. There’s also a critique of sovereignty at the center of, I think, what we’re up to. So I guess one last question for me, for you, is if you have any sense about how best to go about the curation or collection, or dare I say, organization, the process of bringing all these things together without finding oneself again, and kind of like that critical priesthood position. It’s like, this is how I see the lay of the land, and here’s the project. This is what it is. And now we’re moving forward with this. And without my particular genius, and assembling these recovered pieces, you wouldn’t be able to see it, so you gotta buy my book. Right? Yeah. How do we do it carefully, respectfully, and in a way, or is it even important to do it?

Grant Kester:  I had looked a little bit and I’m not obviously knowledgeable about economics, but I looked a little bit into modern monetary theory. It looks like, and I’d want to learn from both of you, maybe somewhat connected to David Graeber’s work on debt and so on. So I was like, Oh, what are the commonalities here? I thought, oh, yeah, because Graeber is trying to challenge the notion that the a priori condition of the human self is this possessing an individualistic drive, that then gets normalized in economics in so many different ways, including austerity discourse. Like we’re bad people, and we have to sacrifice, economically, which is kind of antithetical to the reality of the way capitalism has worked in the 20th century and the 21st century. I mean, the thing that led the United States out of the depression was military industrial spending by the government, and debt. So the weird moralizing around debt. It’s become so transparent recently, within the Republican Party, I think how completely and utterly indifferent they are to actual debt. It was always just an excuse. It’s never intended as anything other than a bludgeon to justify dismantling 100 years of social policy and provision that had been hard won going back to the 1880s, 1890s. Honestly, I don’t know how it was not ever obvious to anybody all along, that that was the game, but for sure it is now. So I think, to the extent to which that leaks in with the tendency broadly to normalize, I don’t know what to call them. Bourgeois notions of the self, I see where it comes into my work, I guess one way would be: one, in looking at projects that appeal to this different version of the self. It’s what I call the dialogical model of the self in the second book. It’s more open, permeable, less committed to I’m a self that must master and dominate and instrumentalize. Not the Odyssean self that Adorno and Horkheimer critique in Dialectic of Enlightenment, but a self that actually is open to the shape and influence of the other. That that is important work at the level of the subjectivity of the individual person, and that that’s what’s being worked out, rehearsed, performed in various ways in a lot of these practices. And that there is a tendency for me and I’d be interested to hear what both of you have to say about this, but there has been a tendency to normalize that version of the self on the left as well. This is my criticism of Leninism, which is Gorky’s famous quote about Lenin, he’s like a cold blooded aristocrat. He’s a product of his class background. The proletariat are the “iron ore” that he’s going to hammer into the ideal form. I mean, that is to me so self-evidently an extension of this possessive…Yes, of course it’s on behalf of world revolution, I get all that. But there’s an utter lack of self reflection on how problematic it is to carry that forward sometimes. My sense is that that’s one of the places where there’s a productive alliance or overlap with what you guys are up to as well with this modern monetary theory. I was gonna ask you, How do you understand the relationship between Oh, it’s economic theory, what does that have to do with other things and art and culture? I’d be interested to hear you talk about that. I’d like to learn from you.

Scott Ferguson:  Yeah, we’ll need maybe 10 more podcasts to do that. But I can weigh in a little bit here and talk a little bit about more convergences that I see between our project and yours. So yes, we are aligned with David Graeber’s work in Debt, although we would say that we complicate Graber and that modern monetary theory does too, in the sense that we tend to be more interested in just recasting re-understanding money in the first place is not bound to that private, possessive labor theory of value in the first place. That it is not about private exploitation, private property and private exchange, that money is essentially a kind of public utility that belongs to all of us. And that as much as it works through debt, the other side of debt, which Graber doesn’t really talk about in his giant volume, is credit and credit is a kind of granting, a kind of creativity, a kind of you could say artistic practice. We want to recover that positive dimension, and not just at the individual level, but at the mezzo and macro level and modern monetary theory and certain adjacent heterodox left legal scholarship, that we’re in dialogue with, too, will argue again, and again, that money is a political and legal design. It is a construction that can be constructed in all kinds of ways. So it just so happens that this modern Euro-American bourgeois, now globalized, monetary system is organized around this private, possessive, mastering individual, predicated on the exploitation of others. But in a sense, that’s a lie. And that money doesn’t have to be organized in that way. In fact, it often doesn’t actually work the way that the dominant ideology says it does. So another way in which I think our work really converges, in my own particular publications, I’ve been very critical of what I call the dialectic between money and aesthetics, or art and the market, that has structured this whole dialectic of autonomy and heteronomy that you’ve published on so extensively and so informatively. So I want to claim that this is all predicated on a very big L Liberal, very problematic reduction of money to private labor, private exploitation, private property, that then the bourgeoisie themselves in their philosophy, express an intense ambivalence about, and then they want an escape valve, right? They’ve constructed a world of monetary economy that they assume must be inherently alienating. They need to theorize and practice this sensuous sphere of expansive communion with nature and others. The Marxist tradition to its credit will come along and say, Ah, you hypocritical bourgeoisie, we should be having this aesthetic project realized in our everyday lives. We at Money on the Left would agree, but where we break with the Marxist tradition is because we say, we can do that, and we need to do that through money as a public project that is a democratic, sensuous project. Not throw out the baby with the bathwater, and just take the bourgeoisie’s word for it. That oh, indeed, money is sin, and everything’s gonna be okay, once we stop counting things, once we stop provisioning using numbers.

Grant Kester:  That’s really helpful, Scott. Thank you for that. That makes so much sense. Yeah, what you’re describing in terms of the aesthetic for the bourgeoisie, I mean, this is very much connected, and maybe, almost identical to the idea of the false transcendence that the aesthetic is meant to provide for the bourgeois subject. Schiller talks about this experience that you have, when you have an aesthetic encounter in which you step back from your unselfconscious immersion in the external world and pay attention to– he gets it from Kant in Critique of Judgment. Pay attention to the operations of parts of your mind or consciousness, the kind of the form giving drive and the sensuous drive and so on. That in that moment, you have an intuition of something different than what it is. That something different is a world in which you can conjoin sensuous pleasure and joy, and the form giving drive is the controlling drive and the masking drive that those things can be synthesized and not held apart. But of course, for Schiller, that can only happen in the realm of what he called ‘semblance’ that can only be a representation in art. You can’t try to make it happen in the real world of monetary policy, for example.

Scott Ferguson:  Right, it has to be disinterested, no interest, because interest can only be bourgeois interests, right? It can’t be about collective or democratic interests.

Grant Kester:  Absolutely. You know, and think about the way this interest is structured in the enlightenment. It’s always going to involve this emptying out of the self. To get to the disinterested self, you have to go back to this free, Schiller will talk about this, the self before any external determination. So you empty out the entire contents of what it is to be a subject to become disinterested, because all the rest of it are accumulated experiences. Being human is completely invalid and irrelevant.

Billy Saas:  You pay someone to carry your interests in a sack.

Scott Ferguson:  I mean, I’m pretty preoccupied with the Franciscan roots of modernity, and that kind of kenotic self emptying. They didn’t invent it, but they were very much a part of that. This very zero sum sense that, in order to have a transcendent connection with God, I have to empty myself of all, of interest in any kind of possession, any kind of mediation in institutions, etc, etc.

Grant Kester:  It’s a lot like German Pietism, which is an important influence on quite a number of German aesthetic philosophers who were informed by that same tradition. In the Pietist tradition, it’s the same argument about the emptying of the self and so on to achieve transcendence and everything else. Yeah, because the self here and now is always impure, always contaminated, and incapable of utopian thought, incapable of indulging in joy or sensuality without being corrupted in some manner. Yeah, it’s very interesting.

Scott Ferguson:  Right. So we just would say that, I mean, there are very corrupt monetary designs. There are very, very evil fiscal policies. There are very, very terrible, terrible ways in which money is privatized and used for exploitative purposes. But at the same time, we are obliged to imagine alternatives and alternatives that don’t escape from the problem but embrace it and transform it. I’m interested in all of your wonderful examples and money touches everything, but I’m especially interested in the examples that seem to be more conventional, overtly taking up this role of democratic public provisioning. In my own work I’ve written about Mierle Laderman Ukeles who you touch on too, right? She’s working with the New York Sanitation Department to this very day. She’s not just staging events, calling attention to care work and maintenance work, but she’s using the public purse to provision aesthetic collective practices, and I find that extremely inspiring.

Grant Kester:  Well, you’re probably familiar with this work already, but Helen and Newton Harrison’s work, Newton passed away just recently, but they worked for decades on environmental policy issues that were in some cases, they were in dialogue in their projects in Europe and elsewhere with public agencies to implement solutions, responses to particular environmental situations, that were intensely problematic, or to envision a replanning a form of planning at the regional or broader scale that governments would need to be part of that would be much, much more healthy, productive, less destructive. Their entire life is dedicated to that matrix between their individual practice and public policy. You see the same thing and Suzanne Lacy’s work as well, in her relationship to work in the criminal justice system and working in Oakland in the 90s. Those are really interesting examples. Yeah, I can see now, the connection.

Scott Ferguson:  Well, we’re gonna stop here, but this seems like the beginning of a much longer conversation, Grant. Thanks so much for coming on Money on the Left and speaking with us.Grant Kester:  It was my pleasure. I learned so much from both of you, and I really enjoyed it. I really did. So thank you for the invitation.

* Thanks to the Money on the Left production teamWilliam Saas (audio editor), Mike Lewis (transcription), & Robert Rusch (graphic art)

Economic Democracy with Pavlina Tcherneva

Money on the Left speaks with Pavlina Tcherneva, Professor of Economics at Bard College and leading scholar of–-and advocate for—Modern Monetary Theory (MMT). Many of our listeners will be familiar with Dr. Tcherneva’s contributions to MMT, especially her book, The Case for a Job Guarantee (Polity Press, 2020). She is also Director of Open Society University Network’s Economic Democracy Initiative, instrumental to the publication of a United Nations report on the job guarantee, titled “The Employment Guarantee as a Tool in the Fight Against Poverty.” We speak with Pavlina about her work, and also get her perspective on the causes and conditions of MMT’s movement from the margins of economic discourse toward the mainstream of political economic thought. 

Visit our Patreon page here: https://www.patreon.com/MoLsuperstructure

Music by Nahneen Kula: www.nahneenkula.com

Transcript

The following was transcribed by Mike Lewis and has been lightly edited for clarity.

Billy Saas:  Pavlina Tcherneva, welcome to Money on the Left.

Pavlina Tcherneva:  Thank you for having me.

Billy Saas:  We’re very excited to have you, of course, a very accomplished author and researcher, and respected MMT principle theorist. How did you get here, where you are today? And how did you come to MMT?

Pavlina Tcherneva:  Oh, how long do you have? It is true that perhaps your audience knows me most with my work on the job guarantee and the recent book that came out in 2020 The Case for a Job Guarantee, but I didn’t actually quite start there. I would say that probably like most MMTers, certainly the initial group. I, too, was caught up by what Keynes called “Babylonian madness”. We all were provoked to look at the history of money because we realized early on that there was one research project that was not fully developed even in heterodox theory. That was the project of understanding money as fundamentally a public institution and as you well know, heterodox theory has long talked about money as a core analytical category in understanding a monetary production economy, a capitalist economy, a market economy. Orthodox approaches had no finance, had no money beyond some very simple kind of assumptions about it being a numeraire. But Post-Keynesian Institutionalists, too, didn’t really have a rigorous program, looking at money as a public institution. We had a lot on endogenous money, on financial instability, on how unemployment is a monetary phenomenon, on all of the important things of capitalism, except I would say the state. This work did exist out there, but I would say that with our work and our introduction to Warren Mosler, getting together with Randy Wray, Matt Forstater, Stephanie Kelton, the familiar names, this is when we all started thinking: well, what’s missing here in the analysis? And there’s one very basic, fundamental, stylized fact that every student knows. Every student knows that the currency is a public monopoly. It’s probably the purest form of monopoly, and yet the profession didn’t have much to say about this. So when I did my internship with Warren Mosler in ’96, that was really the first question: what are the implications of a currency being a public monopoly? In economics, you might find something in mainstream theory, mainstream literature about competing currencies, the efficiency of the chosen numeraire, these kinds of frameworks. Then you will find something about the state usurping power over the monetary unit because it comes from gold and market exchange, all of this really unfounded in history and anthropology and sociology. Nobody tells the stories except economists. But that’s the extent of what we would find in Orthodox theory, that the currency monopoly is somehow the state taking over some innovation that the private market came to. The other thing you would find in mainstream theory is to say, Well, if the government decided to then print its own currency, then of course, it naturally will inflate it, it will abuse it, and can’t do anything good with it. That is just a very thin analysis. But there are deeper, I think, questions to be answered. Some of the very first things that I did, and almost in a playful way, when I was working for Warren was to say: okay, well, can we model this? What could be some of these implications that if the state is the monopoly currency issuer, what are some implications from that basic stylized fact? The very first one is the one that everybody associates with MMT: the government can’t run out and that’s obvious. I think we got to go deeper than just the very obvious that we can’t run out of money. That’s clear. Well, if you’re a monopolist, then you have some unique powers. Pricing power is an important one. I think that is still under-researched, in terms of the MMT project. We have statements, we have made certain claims, but I feel like the literature needs to develop on that front. One of the pricing powers is that you can set the price of money itself. That is, of course, the interest rate. We know very well that the government can do that. The central bank is the one that can set the price of money. The other one is that you can also set the price of how the currency exchanges for other things. You can set a conversion rate. So, if the state is the one that imposes some kind of tax liability, and people need to earn the currency, then what do they need to deliver in exchange and what price would be paid for whatever they deliver? So, those were kind of macro, they were modeling questions, they were as theoretical questions to me, they were very interesting questions because one of the things that I showed with the math model is that if the more you pay as a currency monopolist, the fewer resources you’re going to attract, given a certain tax liability. That was kind of counterintuitive. The more the public sector injects it to the private sector, the fewer resources it might be able to attract given the tax obligation. So that was the first question, but then the second was: Well, how could the state inject currency into the economy? Could the state do it in a way to just always employ unemployed labor? Again, the job guarantee initially was, for me, this very much of a macro question, is there a way for the government to spend in a better way, in a way that it can secure full employment? Very quickly it was clear that full employment and price stability were not competing goals. That, in fact, they were very much part of these inherent powers of the state. So the job guarantee emerged as this alternative to the NAIRU. Heterodoxy, for a very long time, had criticized the NAIRU. It had very thorough, rigorous critique, but I would say, probably not an alternative policy proposal. I think, for me, that very quickly was quite obvious that certainly you can use your pricing powers to anchor prices of a very fundamental, most essential input of production. You can do it to create full employment, and then, of course, you have other tools to deal with inflation and price stability. So as I said, for me, the MMT project was about identifying some kind of essential principles behind the currency rather than some accidental, if you will, aspects to the monetary system, and how we can utilize the monetary system to create more economic stability and full employment. Over time, this project became quite personal. It became personal when I did my dissertation because I was able to observe how a job guarantee or program inspired by the job guarantee proposal was implemented in Argentina. When I was able to visit and see how the program was run, the impact on women, on poor mothers, on communities, I mean, that’s when everything changed. It became just as important that we have a framework for thinking of how macro policy can be implemented, but also to understand the on the ground effects of macro policy. If there is one theme that I think runs through my work, is the question of how can we do things better? That ranges from how to do fiscal policy better, how we can improve on what we’re doing currently, how we can do monetary policy better, and the like. So I would say that that is really the overarching theme. Not so much “Can we pay for it?” Yes, of course we can. But now that we can, what shall we do with these fundamental powers?

Scott Ferguson:  Very often, I hear from folks, sometimes well-meaning, sometimes not well-meaning, that MMT is just a warmed over or a reboot of so called Keynesianism and there’s no attention into, let’s say differentiations in the history of what’s been called Keynesianism, no recognition that what came to count as Keynesianism in mid-century was highly influenced by neoclassical modeling. I want to give you an opportunity to tell our listeners about your research in your readings of Keynes, and in your view, how MMT is related to Keynes’s work?

Pavlina Tcherneva:  Keynes’ own writings are really a treasure trove of information. You can dig in and dig in, and it’s fair to say that what we find in the textbook has very little to do with his overall approach. And I would argue that they stand apart, both on theoretical and methodological grounds. So what we typically get in the textbook is this kind of hydraulic version of Keynesianism, which says, the private sector has some kind of flaws, imperfections, sometimes they could be shocks, and the public sector can step in, to smooth out those cycles. There is a notion that when there’s a shock to demand, to spending and investment, then the public sector just needs to boost its own expenditures, and bring us back to our growth path. Then there’s something about multipliers and what is the effectiveness of that spending? Is it really the right way to go about this, could monetary policy do the job? There’s a whole bunch of discussion there of which policy tool is the more effective one. Well, Keynes was very clear on this matter, monetary policy is not a way to stabilize an unstable economy, it’s really the fiscal authority that can do the job. But the way we go about it is also very important. Keynes almost never spoke about aggregate demand. He never talked about aggregate demand management, he will talk about aggregate measures trying to figure out aggregate activity, because he was trying to separate the macro economy from the micro economy. But he mostly talked about public investment. He mostly talked about public works. This was not because he just preferred public works, but because he was very interested in the connection between spending and employment. For him, this was the cardinal measure for figuring out the effectiveness. It’s not whether you smooth out this business cycle. It’s not whether you bring the economy back to some growth path, it is whether you can create full employment, and by full employment, we mean people who need work. And he has very clear statements that when we think about people, we’re thinking about people who are newly entering the labor force, we’re thinking of people who might be underemployed, disguised unemployment, the whole life. Even his methodology in the way we measure economic activity was based on two units, and those were wage units and labor units. So you see, the entire framework was grounded in, I would say, this kind of humanistic approach that the economy is there to serve people to serve the concrete needs of society. The way we measure our economic activity is by what we do. So from there, fiscal policy would need to provide public employment and public investment to create a well-run economy. Keynes used to say the two outstanding faults of economic society were the failure to secure full employment and the arbitrary and inequitable distribution of income. From the point of view of policy, these are connected. If you fail to secure full employment, you are going to have an arbitrary and inequitable distribution of income. There may be many other reasons why inequality might be increasing, but labor income is critical for the more equitable distribution of income. So I have an article called Permanent On-The-Spot Job Creation—The Missing Keynes Plan for Full Employment and Economic Transformation. In that article, I make a case that, actually, the original Keynes proposal for full employment very much resembles a kind of job guarantee or employer of last resort proposal, because for him, it was quite easy to get the economy to work at let’s say, 90% capacity, but the remaining 10% were much harder to achieve and that meant full employment. For him, it was better distributed demand, hiring people in distressed areas, having a policy of Public Works that will be on standby, that will be permanently implemented, so that it absorbs new entrants, job seekers as needed; that those projects will be implemented in areas that have the greatest economic need, the greatest level of unemployment; and that this policy will not be a stop gap measure the way we normally do fiscal policy. We have crisis and fiscal policy steps. It is something that is permanent infrastructure, so that folks have an unemployment safety net, some kind of security and we minimize the huge impact from mass layoffs. We always have a public employment option. The Keynes plan was very clear: it’s very difficult to fluctuate big infrastructure projects in short order. What you have to be thinking about is direct public employment. But we normally associate Keynesian policy with building bridges and mass infrastructure investment. All of this is well and good, all of it as necessary, but it’s not a way to achieve full employment. For Keynes, of course, the greatest socialization of investment was very important so that there will be major projects that will be under public auspices. I would call them economic rights. You can think of healthcare, you can think of education, you can think of housing, you can think of various public services, but of course, infrastructure too, and still that will not be sufficient. We still will need to have a direct employment program, and that will be a kind of policy to address community needs. He has these marvelous quotes, he says: There are things to be done. There are people to do them. Why not put the two of them together? Why not put people to work? The country is not a finished proposition, far from it. It’s crazy to sit puffing one’s pipe telling the unemployed that it would be most unsafe to find them any work. I just love it, and everything that you read, you see how he had a very strong social concern. Something that I don’t know if people normally associate. He had a concept of the good life. And I think that that motivates a lot of his writings. He says that goodness is never really the problem, it’s cleverness. We just need to devise the means, we have to find new mechanisms to secure full employment. For me, the job guarantee very much falls in the spirit of this Keynesian approach. The contemporary fiscal policy is this very much top down hydraulic approach, where we just provide mega contracts to the mega firms with mega profits. Firms that, as we know, thrive on predatory labor practices, predatory pricing practices, and that is an upside down kind of approach. We count on this to stabilize our economy and bring full employment, which of course it doesn’t. So then we redefine the problem. We say, well, there’s only so much we can do, we have to live with some level of natural unemployment. That was an anathema to Keynes. I can go on and on, but I would say that Keynes does preempt the NAIRU debates in his own work, because he is very clear that the closer you get to full employment, the more you attempt to secure it by generalized means, by aggregate expenditure, the more income will go to the capital share, rather than the labor share. And you’re already going to be creating income inequality through these aggregate measures, by directing them to sectors that are already saturated, that are operating at maximum capacity, and you’re just going to feed the profit share. This work is then, I’d say, augmented by Minsky’s own analysis, which also informs my own work, where he talks about how the there is an inequality within the labor share, because we tend to stabilize the employment chances and opportunities of those who are employed already, and those who are high wage folks. The current paradigm is very inequitable, so we go back to MMT and say, Okay, we clearly have extraordinary spending powers. What should fiscal policy do? Should it mimic private sector investment behavior? Should it try to stimulate investment-led growth? Or should we find a kind of bottom up policy that acts as a robust, automatic stabilizer that stabilizes wages at the bottom and secures full employment over the long run?

Scott Ferguson:  My next question, I think you’ve already begun to answer it. But I want to be more explicit about this question. And it has to do with politics and power. Certain interpretations, especially on the left of Modern Monetary Theory, usually verbally linked to accusations that MMT is just warmed-over Keynesianism is that: well, MMT is merely technocratic. It’s offering a bunch of technocratic fixes, but it has no analysis of power and has no relationship to power. Of course, we at Money on the Left do not believe this at all. But we want to give you a chance to respond to that kind of criticism.

Pavlina Tcherneva:  In some way, I understand where the criticism comes through. My proclivity is to get some of the macro right. But that is not to say these policies, as we articulate, are a shoe in for our political landscape. It’s almost like a doctor, you need to know the medicine that’s right. Whether that is going to work really depends on the patient. It depends on the social circumstances. It depends on the context within which we’re practicing. It depends on so much of the social reality. I think that the second thing to say is that MMT really makes very clear that money in and of itself is a political project. That it emerges within the context of some exclusive powers and those powers, whether it is the power to tax, whether the power to compel somebody to work, whether it is the power to command resources, all of that, you need to have a political analysis and historically contingent analysis of how a monetary system would work. I would say MMT, long before the critique, was the one that developed a kind of a spectrum, I would say, for sovereignty. We began with, in fact, studying a non-sovereign regime. A lot of our work began by looking at the Eurozone, and that was a political project. That was a project that chose to integrate Europe via structural adjustment. I would say from the very beginning, we zeroed in on these political forces that created a very dysfunctional framework, which then deliberately constrains the capacity of the state to act. So I would say that in all of our work. I think at core, our focus has been on how to emancipate the state from not just myths about government spending, but from this kind of neoliberal logic that the state can’t act. We need private actors. We have to solicit large private capital to do social investment. I mean, this is really the reason behind our insistence that the state has capacities–capacity to spend, capacity to act–because we, at bottom, would like to have a more just, if you will, democratic order. Very often it’s true that we say that the MMT precepts are there for the taking. Autocrats can take them, right? Authoritarians can take them and they do often. So we want to be able to articulate a vision of what a democratic social order might look like, and this is where we might disagree with what are the objectives of a public policy. We will indeed insist that full employment will be front and center. Not full employment as an abstraction, but as a real thing. What does it mean to have full employment? What does it mean to have decent jobs? What does it mean that every person should have access to dignified employment opportunities? In some ways, I’d like to skip over the question of how we will pay for it so that we can start talking about the difficult questions. Should we have an economic system where some people are denied employment? On what grounds and bases do we deny them? I think the politics are very much wrapped into these myths. We can’t really put a stake through current political, I would say institutional obstacles to doing public policy, until we shed some of these myths about jobs, about the state, about its funding capacity, etc.

Billy Saas:  Talking about power, I think it’s interesting to reflect on the recent history of MMT. As an aside, warmed over Keynesianism is pretty good on reflection when Keynes is such a great writer. And you can go back and find so many beautiful quotes and so much evidence of his literary and philosophical sophistication and the inseparability of its theoretical, economic insights with the normativity of those insights and his kind of normative preferences. A long aside there, but just a shout out to warmed-over Keynesianism on its own. We had a great episode with Matt Seybold, host of The American Vandal podcast a couple months ago, where Matt talked with Scott and Rob about the literary character and interest and emphasis of Keynes writing. The recent history of MMT is of great interest to me and something that I have written and researched quite a bit about. I want to simultaneously do two things: one, run my understanding of that recent history by you and see if I can get a verification, and maybe correction, but then also ask you to kind of reflect on as, especially over recent years, there have been more numerous and I think, very interesting, sometimes difficult encounters of MMT with power. Y’all have gotten very close to it. Right? In terms of the body of theorists and the discourse of MMT has been in the mainstream press a lot. They’ve been in the conversations and important policy discussions. So two-parter. MMT we got here rough and ready. It starts in a listserv, as a conversation between a number of people across the world, the post Keynesian listserv. It starts to take off in the early 2000s, and late 1990s, through your own research through Randy Wray’s writing, through the publication of Stephanie and others. Then the blogs happen. And that takes off in its own little way. But it’s not until the financial crisis that the MMT narrative really kind of takes shape, and gained some popularity in the blogosphere and on social media. Of course, Bernie Sanders’ ascension as a kind of figure of interest on the left, and Stephanie’s proximity to him, brings that narrative more to the mainstream. I think, what I’m interested in as a communication scholar, is the rhetorical strategies and how they’ve sort of evolved over time and talk about power, in the context of economics. It is notoriously concentrated in a few departments, with PhD programs, and then they train students who go out and spread the gospel of neoclassical or orthodoxy and whatnot. So part of the story of MMT is, and this has shown up a lot, I think, in the work of your own and others, reflection on what has worked in persuading people to see the world and the economy in the way that y’all see it. You talked about the myths that are constantly presenting themselves, they seem to never die. They’re just always there. They’re incredibly resilient about balanced budgets and so on. There’s a long list. The way I sort of see it now, and again, more interested in your response to this than my hypothesis, is that those hang ups, those myths and the rhetorical strategy of MMT scholars and the MMT community generally, to focus on debunking those seems like there might be some limitations to it that I think you’re acknowledging, right. You talk about, we need to sort of outline and have the difficult conversations that come after answering the simple one, which is you pay for it, because you have the money in every case. So when we’re having the conversation that we’re having right now, in 2024, MMT has had some really big moments. It’s come under controversy in the context of inflation. I guess, to wrap up my very, very long question, do you agree that what am I missing, and then narrative of the kind of history of MMT and the importance of thoughtful rhetorical strategy, which y’all wrote about and talked about a lot through the blogs. Here’s what we’re doing, to now where we seem to be at a kind of, and maybe have been for a moment at a pivotal point where the strategies are they working, as well as they once did? And what needs to happen next?

Pavlina Tcherneva:  That’s a really great question. I hope I can give you some satisfactory answers. But strategy, I think, clearly has to evolve for the moment that you’re faced with. In some ways, we stumbled upon a strategy early on, because so much of what we were saying was different from the mainstream, that we had to be very clear. Sometimes when you pare down a concept to its bare essentials, it was provocative, right? Taxes don’t pay for federal spending, it gets very provocative. And it’s a double edged sword. Because, you know, when you look at the institutional analysis, when you look at how we’ve constructed our laws, how our entire polity is surrounded around the question of a taxpayer myth. It is a really big challenge to communicate to folks that operationally, taxes don’t technically fund the government. But the clarity of the statement has been also effective because it’s attracted attention. Oh, what are those folks saying over there? Why are they even saying such a preposterous thing? And then what we’ve done is we have done the hard work to show the operations and to show the technical aspects of government finance. This without a doubt is MMTs strong suit. But as you say, just because you can demonstrate the technical aspects, doesn’t mean that folks might be convinced that that’s good enough. I think the other strategy has been, and here, you know, the economy offers no shortage of teachable moments, is that we have been able to articulate what is happening in the face of major crises, to offer a fresh perspective. It is unfortunate that crises lend themselves to concentrating the mind, and getting folks to acknowledge what is happening. I think that, in my work, I have tried to articulate how this new paradigm of whatever it takes financing is really the perfect illustration of some of the things that MMT has been saying. MMT has never been advocating whatever-it-takes financing, MMT has been articulating how the mega support that big monetary policy provided to the banking sector will not do the job. It won’t pull the economy out of a crisis, and it won’t stabilize the financial sector. Now we’re looking at mega fiscal policy, right? We have the return of Big Fiscal policy. In some sense, it’s a little silly that MMT is blamed for the return of fiscal policy. Because I think we just learned our lesson that monetary policy didn’t do the job. We slogged through the greatest jobless recovery, and now that we embrace the fiscal tools, voila, we have the fastest postwar recovery. So MMT has been there front and center, articulating what is happening and that there are ways to do things better. Even when the mega fiscal packages were being passed, very early on in March 2020, it was saying, Look, you need to have a concrete mobilization and employment and investment strategy, not just spend the money. As a communication strategy, I would say that we are using these moments to offer, I think, new ways of thinking about public policy. What is next, I think, is, well, we are now seeing the return of big industrial policy. In a way, I feel that fiscal policy has morphed into that. Fiscal policy provided reasonable economic security for folks during a very uncertain, devastating time. We had child allowance, we had income support, expanded healthcare. We had a moment in which we saw what could be done, and then that quickly disappeared as the policies expired. That is being morphed into like another big government policy, big industrial policy, but it’s again, wrapped in this neoliberal logic that we need to get private equity and investment funds to mobilize finance for the purposes of the green transition. One strategy is to always connect to what is happening, because, even though we’ve seen the return of the big three, we don’t exactly have a fundamental structural transformation of the economy. Folks are still experiencing the same problems that they were experiencing, prior to 2008. So this connects me more to what’s the next step? I do think that articulating the vision is essential. It’s not just the technical aspects. We’ve been there. We’ve explained that. If folks want to take an honest reading of what we have done, then all we can do is remind them that these last 20 years clearly demonstrated that the pay for question is bogus. It is clear, and I think that we shouldn’t entertain for a moment, reasonable economist talk of the old talk, but austerity is back with a vengeance, right? Budget cuts back. We are already reneging on climate commitments. Yeah, I’m talking about globally, right in Europe. We certainly don’t have a bold green agenda. Now, where did that energy go? I think that the return of Big Fiscal and Big Industrial is what took the air out a little bit of that energy. That we have seen things we hadn’t seen in a very long time. Now we are seeing bold Keynesian policy that we hadn’t seen in a long time. We’re a little bit, and I don’t mean we, I think the progressive movement is regrouping. Where is the next kind of major battle for our future. MMT, here, maybe I’m wrong to assume that we have won the pay for question, but to the extent that these old frames are being weaponized, it means something else is missing, right? It’s not just the technical analysis that needs to be clearly articulated. I can show you endless balance sheets and show you how with coordination without coordination, the bills are paid. But it clearly is not sufficient. I think one of the things that MMT can do is articulate maybe a little more clearly that we need to have a lid on government spending, not a lid as like budget debt to GDP ratios and deficit to GDP, but a kind of a conception of what is too much. Because I think that this is one thing that MMT unfairly suffers from, that somehow we’re being blamed for runaway spending and endless money printing. As we were talking earlier in our conversation, we’ve always had different measures for what is enough and what is appropriate and what is spending that serves the public purpose. What we’re seeing is very much this whatever it takes spending paradigm that validates a highly inflationary industrial state. An industrial state where power is resolutely in the hands of big tech, big corporations, big finance, as I said, with pricing power with, you know, abusive labor practices. This is a very inflationary paradigm. The big finance that is now being extended through industrial fiscal monetary policy validates these power structures, validates, underwrites these pricing powers, these abusive practices. I think MMT’s next question will be how to articulate that this way of using the public purse actually undermines the neoliberal structure. So I don’t know if that really answers the question of what is a good strategy to communicate these questions, but at least in terms of where the ideas are. People, in their gut, feel some kind of unfairness. Why are they so angry with the government budget? Reagan managed to sell us on the lie that we don’t have money, but actually, he repackaged folks’ anger with the big contracts, the big support for the military industrial complex into a narrative that we don’t have money. That was a huge coup. Now that we have exposed this as a lie, we still need to go back to the question of, why are we funding forever wars? Why are we funding industries that deliver very little by way of public goods, and certainly good jobs, and we can’t solely be relying on direct action and unions to do the job. We need to have public policy to upend that neoliberal logic. Again, in terms of communicating, I think going to folks’ anxieties about how this economic system doesn’t work, and deploying powers of the state is one way, but also kind of emancipating. We need to have a positive vision of the state,

Billy Saas:  That was wonderful. Yeah, brought to mind. When I think about the recent history, which is pretty much all of the history of MMT, as a body of theory and research, I wonder in thinking about communication and rhetorical strategy for getting the message out, I wonder if you have any models in mind for previous economic thinkers or bodies of literature that have overcome or somehow succeeded in becoming? I’m thinking specifically of neoclassical and Milton Friedman and neoliberalism’s ascension. Maybe another way to say this or ask this question in a more direct way is: is Milton Friedman maybe a good role model for rhetorical adaptation and strategy, given the apparent success of that school of thought in the 70s and 80s, when there was, part of their story, a breakdown of Keynesian thinking, which we know is not full Keynesian, not even warmed-over Keynesian thinking, in the 1970s. But yeah, are there other models to look at for strategies for being ready when the crisis happens, to strike? Right? And maybe not so violently in terms of, you know, an aggressive strike, but maybe MMT wasn’t ready in 2020? And how might it be ready next time?

Pavlina Tcherneva:  Well, I’m not sure that that is necessarily true. In what way can we think of MMT as being ready? In my understanding of the events that unfolded, MMT, in some ways, gave permission to policymakers to embark on bold policies without having to invoke the deficit myth. We’ll take credit because we mainstreamed this idea. We made it unacceptable to talk about how the government “doesn’t have the money”. The reality is that, throughout history whenever there have been major crises we have responded. The public sector has responded to whatever they’ve considered policy priority. What was different is that we didn’t return so quickly to have some kind of fiscal commission to some kind of mind the budget, rhetorical policy, even though it’s being weaponized at the political level. It’s just not really taken too seriously at this point until maybe, you know, Republicans come and they start slashing budgets. But as we know, the kind of support for industry, I suspect the support for industry is not going to go away. Europe has not really rushed to reinstate its fiscal rules. They’re mulling that over. There is some kind of budget crunch happening, but at least I feel that it is not looming on the horizon. If anything, MMT and if you remember the famous Mario Draghi statement, “is this the best way to allocate liquidity when it’s a matter of the green transition or inequality. No, it probably is not the best way to allocate liquidity and some new ideas like MMT, we should look at them.” I think that this was exactly the reason why Europe reverse engineered its monetary sovereignty. They understood where the straitjacket was. They had to break their own rules. Of course, this was not for the purposes of funding governments, it was really for the purposes of stabilizing yields and bank balance sheets. There is kind of an ideological battle there. Right. But how can we be ready? I mean, I think here, it is probably a question of what policies do you have on offer. The one most closely associated with MMT would be the job guarantee, although we have for a very long time talked about the downsizing of the financial sector. Certainly Randy Wray had written a lot about it, we here at the Levy Institute, for decades have been talking about financial reform. We have ideas, we’ve made statements about Medicare for All, housing guarantees, etc. So in a way, the framework is there for economic security. I don’t know if it’s rhetorical strategy that will get us there, or another fluke and another accident. Some other kind of crisis, where, you know, this will be the next idea, one of these is going to be the next idea on offer. I think you are correct. Rhetorical strategy matters, because folks have to believe in what is happening. They shouldn’t feel like the wool is being pulled over their eyes, and that they need to understand these are good measures. But what I have found in my research over the years is that the job guarantee, for example, even though it wasn’t part of mainstream conversation for such a long time, has polled very well. Even in places where then the idea is just newly introduced, it just consistently garners very high support. I will admit, even to my own surprise initially, but then you look at how bipartisan the support is, and it just makes sense. Our own history teaches us how popular the New Deal was, and how many folks called themselves Roosevelt Democrats because jobs were brought to their communities, and those were important reforms. So, I’m not sure if I’m answering your questions satisfactorily. But is Milton Friedman the model for communicating? Well, to the extent that he has made provocative statements, maybe MMT, should continue to do that, just to rattle the mainstream and bring attention to some of our ideas

Billy Saas:  I am just to clarify, I’m not suggesting that Milton Friedman was some sort of rhetorical mastermind, a lot of it was right place, right time, and serving the interests of power, and that’s entrenched at that moment. Yeah, I think that there are different considerations when you have an agenda that is not explicitly about enriching a certain amount of the population at the expense of the rest, but is about serving the public purpose.

Pavlina Tcherneva:  Let me make a comment on what has dominated the conversation over the last 20 years and I have contributed to this as you know, the question of inequality. As you know, economists didn’t talk about inequality for many, many years and that mainstream economists euphemistically referred to inequality as poverty. So the distribution of income was not really seriously taken until recently. At least in some of my work, I’ve tried to show how just the way the economies work and the way they’re stabilized, does not bring better income distribution, if anything, it makes things worse and worse. But I am worried that in that conversation about inequality, we have lost the conversation about economic security. We do understand that there is a fundamental unfairness if an economy is really shoveling all incomes and rewards to a very small group of people. But that alone is not enough. Why is the bottom 90% not able to make the good life? The so-called good life? That’s really, I think, the fundamental question of inequality. It’s not a question of income. It’s not a question of redistribution. It’s the question of pre-distribution. There was a little bit of a conversation about redistribution, but I feel that that did not take hold, as much as it should have. To the degree that we can return to that, like, what does pre-distribution mean? What does it mean for folks to have decent market income? Is that enough? What can you get with your marketing? I mean, are there preconditions to good life that are provided. The fundamental anxieties are problems that families face and are the same. This is not just the matter of income level. Yes, most people have challenges providing for health care, education, housing, but none of us are insulated from the vagaries of a financial market. Rich or poor, we all fall prey to a system that is highly unstable, very speculative and precarious. So one of the things that we have been doing at the economic democracy initiative is trying to shine a spotlight back on the question of precarity and the uncertainty of livelihoods to expand the scope. Of course, jobs to me remain critically important. But to expand the scope of what that precarity entails.

Scott Ferguson:  So you’ve made the transition for me because I was going to ask you next to tell us about your recent project, the Economic Democracy Initiative.

Pavlina Tcherneva:  Well, yes, the Economic Democracy Initiative is a project at Bard College, which as the name suggests, tries to address the fundamental questions of what we once called economic rights. Our research, our policy outreach, our curricular programs, really tried to get to this question of the structural transformation that might be required for a more democratic social order, we have a few major projects. One is this symposium on what happens after neoliberalism. And there we engage with a series of topics. But the two dominant themes, and what sets this project apart from other projects on neoliberalism are two specific areas. The first one is the area of precarity. That’s a fundamental force that reproduces the neoliberal economy. I already talked about this. We don’t see illiberalism, or the rise of authoritarianism, as some kind of evidence of the Crisis of Neoliberalism. To the contrary, we see that as a consolidation of neoliberalism. It’s because liberal democracy has failed to address the question of economic insecurity. So that’s like the first overarching theme. The second overarching theme is an MMT informed theme, that we want to look at this interdependence between public and private finance, and really zero in on how we can emancipate the public purse from private interests. That can happen both at the policy level but also legally and institutionally. As I just discussed, the states respond to crises with whatever it takes financing strategies, but they don’t do the same for the purposes of the green transition, for the purposes of securing the social safety net, so I have a piece that’s coming out on that symposium on this precise question. Then, we explore various other sub topics like the future of work, what is a diagnosis, what is ailing the 99%, what varieties of capitalism, if you will, or trajectories for social transformation. We try to interrogate emergent futures, etc. So this is a long form symposium with long form pieces. I urge you to see it, and the website is postneoliberalism.org. The second project that we’ve been working on is a project around the job guarantee, we have curated a resource, online resource, which not only presents interested researchers and policymakers with the vast body of literature, academic policy, and other, but we also have a global map of programs, which have been tried large or small, that have some of the features of the job guarantee, or at least aspire to kind of a job guarantee model, we don’t obviously have a fully fledged job guarantee anywhere in the world, although there is a major program in India, which I think is still not well known by many in the West. It has provided a lot of interesting lessons about implementation, and impacts of a job guarantee in a developing context. So we have anything from polling information to various legislative documents. It’s a resource for the taking, we also have highlighted the Living New Deal map with legacy projects of the New Deal in the United States. So that’s the second research project. We are now seeding research, as I said, on New Directions In Finance, together with the Levy Economics Institute, and we had a fantastic workshop in November, all the videos are posted on our YouTube channel. So I invite your listeners to look those up. So I’m wondering if you can say a little bit more about pedagogy in the EDI curriculum? Yeah. Some of the programs that we have put together are accessible to students all over the world. Bard College is part of a broader university network, with institutions with whom we’ve partnered for many, many years. Some of the things that we’re doing include summer workshops that are attended by students from virtually every continent, as well as crafting courses that are then also offered at partner institutions. We have a certificate in public policy. The basic philosophy behind the certificate is that one cannot consider themselves an informed policymaker unless they understand the intellectual history of some of the policy ideas. So one of our core courses is actually a course called Economic Perspectives, which I teach at Bard, that is a history of economic thought course with a policy twist, where students try to grapple with the grand debate around ideas such as the minimum wage. Why do they disagree so much on a minimum wage policy and on living wage policy? This tension between markets and state, we try to explore this in this critical way, both when they learn their intellectual giants, but also how these ideas are being applied today to public policy. So that’s the first component to that certificate. The second one is that, well, an informed policy maker needs to know something about economic history as well. We have a number of courses that do that, but one of the ones that I have created is the course called The Right to Employment. That basically studies the struggle to secure the right to employment through time, but in a very interdisciplinary way. Students do get introduced to, again, some of the battles of economic ideas, a little bit of modeling, a little bit of theory, but also legislative documents around the world, various international debt declarations, and concrete policies that have attempted to secure that right to employment and we have a number of other curricular programs. One of them, as I said, is a summer workshop, which is open to undergraduate students. It does provide a new approach to public finance. Again, it is an introduction to some MMT ideas, but it does provide a framework of core policy goals around which discussions of money take place. So the framework is one that is centered on questions of stability, sustainability, and security. This provides us with the context in which we can explore questions of the green transition, macro questions of how do you stabilize an unstable economy? What is security, the multi dimensional ways in which we can think about economic security? These have been really great fun. MMT has typically engaged with the graduate community, and now we’re engaging with undergraduates. Sometimes education happens in mysterious ways, not in ways in which you plan it. So one of the most recent things that I learned about is that currently there are high schools across the country that are debating the job guarantee because it has made it into the national debates. The proposition that is being discussed this year, and the background literature is actually put together by the Librarian of Congress, and that proposition is that the government should substantially improve income distribution by implementing a federal job guarantee, basic income, or Social Security. I have been hearing from students and debate judges and program managers from around the country telling me that the job guarantee really is emerging as a favorite, as a topic of great interest. Students have been studying it for the last few months in preparation. This has been really, really heartwarming and really just phenomenal to hear.

Billy Saas:  It’s so cool, not something that you could plan for or sounds like you would have planned for at all.

Pavlina Tcherneva:  No, I didn’t, I had nothing to do with it. I received an email from a program manager who said, “Did you have any idea that this was happening?” Since then, I have been asked to connect with students. I’ve received emails from students with questions. So it’s just really fantastic. Young people are engaging. There’s something in the air because I was asked to give a talk to another high school just like a month ago and there were like 500 students in the audience and their eyes were like this. And yeah, I don’t know. But the Chicago project managers said that the students were putting together their own proposals for a job guarantee. I will vote for them.

Scott Ferguson:  That is fantastic. That is so wonderful. So one of the final things I’d like to ask you about, if it’s kosher to respond to this question, but I know you’ve done some research and publication with the UN. Could you talk about that work and maybe think about how you seem to have a global framework whenever you’re discussing any of these issues, but it seems like the work with the UN is very much explicitly addressing questions of poverty and jobs policies in an international context.

Pavlina Tcherneva:  Yeah, absolutely. Last year, I worked with the Special Rapporteur, the UN Rapporteur Olivia De Schutter –he’s the Special Rapporteur on extreme poverty and human rights– in developing the new UN report on the job guarantee. I think this was a really, really important document because it is, of course, an international statement of the importance of the policy. The angle that he took was primarily poverty eradication, because in the vast majority of the world, you know, this is an acute problem, and the employment strategy, I would say, is probably under emphasized. Of course, the ILO has been doing this for many, many years, but it is important that the UN had a statement, because in some way, there’s a kind of formal presentation of these policies to nation states. If they so choose to reflect, then they have to make a formal position and some kind of statement on the document. There’s some interest in the international level, they have been interested in Brazil and Colombia, folks who are thinking hard about this kind of employment intensive strategy for development, and the job guarantee specifically. Some of the work has filtered into other legislative work  organically and naturally. We had worked last year to build a job guarantee coalition in Europe, I had worked with a European MP Aurore Lalucq, who was also instrumental in drafting a resolution for the European Union on just transition and good jobs. The document is also very, very powerful, and it also includes the job guarantee proposal as part of that framework. I think what we’re looking for here is shifts in thinking and policy and strategy. I think it is fair to say that the job guarantee is a policy innovation. There have been direct employment projects, active labor market policies that will be implemented in various contexts, whether it is to address gender issues, poverty issues, crisis, youth unemployment, but the job guarantee as a framework for employment security, employment safety net, does represent, I think, a shift in the policy and the mainstream thinking about about these issues. So it’s good to see that there is some kind of international recognition, and hopefully, that can also translate into concrete policy action. Certainly in Europe, there are various experiments that are ongoing, and they are really good to study. They give us some really good insights into the health effects of these programs on people, the community effects, and the way to run the projects to administer them. It’s really, really important work.

Billy Saas:  In this context of an international statement through the UN on a job guarantee, I wonder, is there space you think for, or has there been much discussion of exploring a policy of an international job guarantee? What that might even look like? If it’s possible in any sort of way, shape or form?

Pavlina Tcherneva:  I like your ambition, Billy. I mean, at the end of the day, isn’t that the logical conclusion of the job guarantee? It is important for developed countries to do it, to lead, to set the tone, to demonstrate to mainstream this kind of policy focus. But what I have found is that perhaps the greatest interest currently is from the developing world, because unemployment is such a huge, acute problem, and the largest scale experimentations in recent history happened there. Argentina, South Africa, India. But I think at the end of the day, you’re right, we want to have a full employment framework everywhere. I should say that once the international community did recognize this very clearly, certainly in the UN charter, the ILO Charter, the WTO charter, the initial charter. The idea was that every country has to pursue full employment so that we can benefit from whether it has benefits from trade, whether it is from other cooperation, economic integration.

Billy Saas:  Well, this has been wonderful. Pavlina Tcherneva, thank you so much for joining us on Money on the Left.

Pavlina Tcherneva:  Thank you for having me. It was great to talk to you

* Thanks to the Money on the Left production teamWilliam Saas (audio editor), Mike Lewis (transcription), & Robert Rusch (graphic art)

The Alternative w/Nick Romeo

Scott Ferguson and Billy Saas speak with New Yorker writer Nick Romeo about his exciting new book, The Alternative: How to Build a Just Economy, released in January 2024 with Public Affairs. Romeo’s The Alternative rebukes Margaret Thatcher’s infamous axiom that “there is no alternative” to neoliberal capitalism. In doing so, the book inventories the most promising experiments in radical economic democracy underway across the world today. Such experiments include, but are not limited to: a publicly-owned and -run gig work platform in Long Beach, California; a True Price system in Amsterdam; a public budgeting project in Cascais, Portugal; and a public Job Guarantee in Gramatneusiedl, Austria. (See our previous episode on the Austrian Job Guarantee for a deeper dive into that topic.) Taken together, these and other initiatives profiled in the book “share a vision of the economy as a place of moral action and accountability,” as Romeo puts it, while modeling the kind of radical political economic imagination that is so utterly and urgently needed to meet our dire ecological moment. For Romeo, then, it remains insufficient to simply deny Thatcher’s quip that there is no alternative. The crucial task is to actively imagine and create the alternative.

Visit our Patreon page here: https://www.patreon.com/MoLsuperstructure

Music by Nahneen Kula: www.nahneenkula.com

Transcript

The following was transcribed by Mike Lewis and has been lightly edited for clarity.

Scott Ferguson:  Nick Romeo, welcome to Money on the Left.

Nick Romeo:  Thanks for having me.

Scott Ferguson:  So we’ve asked you to join us today because you have a new book that’s just out with Public Affairs Books called The Alternative: How to Build a Just Economy. We want to get into the book, but maybe to kick off our conversation, you can tell our listeners a little bit about your professional background, and how you came to become the reporter of political economy at The New Yorker Magazine

Nick Romeo:  Sure, yeah, I like that description. I’m not sure the magazine would endorse it, but I will. Two levels at which I could answer that. The first is just the last few years I have been covering a kind of political economy beat for The New Yorker. I was in Europe for a lot of that time, which was helpful in finding interesting economic paradigms and models that are a little outside of the status quo. A second level is zooming back a bit more in time. Some of my graduate work in academia was in ancient philosophy, which might seem very different, but my way into economics, the thing that actually let me get excited about it was recognizing it as a branch of political philosophy. Not only is the word from ancient Greek, but really for a lot of the tradition of economics, the subject itself was thought of as political economy. As that title suggests, there are these inescapable normative and ethical dimensions to it. I think if you push on economic premises, pretty quickly you get to really rich philosophical questions about what is a good life? What is a fair society? And these are just eternally interesting.

Billy Saas:  So who are you guys in terms of ancient philosophy?

Nick Romeo:  Well, Aristotle, I think, is actually incredibly insightful as an economist, and I’m interestingly not alone in that view. The economist Sam Bowles ends a book on game theory with the observation that a lot of these insights that have come out of the field in the last 10 years are sort of rediscoveries of Aristotle and that Aristotle in a lot of ways is still more subtle than contemporary economists. So I think a lot of the brighter economics people today are cognizant of that intellectual heritage.

Scott Ferguson:  I think most of the book, most of the chapters are exploring various kinds of alternative programs, ways of not just conceiving of political economy, but practicing it and structures and organizations and designs. We want to get into those details, but maybe we can begin the way you begin the book, which is kind of reframing for a more popular audience, reframing what the proper questions and problems of economics are. I was wondering if you could give our listeners a little taste of how you set up the book and how you frame it.

Nick Romeo:  Absolutely, yeah. So the first chapter of the book is about the struggle for the Econ 101 curriculum that is currently raging in academia. That led me to get into some of the history of the field and how it’s been conceived and organized in the last few centuries. One sort of simple way is to think about a famous quote from John Maynard Keynes, who once remarked that the master Economist has four elements: he or she must be mathematician, philosopher, statesman and historian to some degree. So a critique of how economics has kind of emerged in academic contexts in the last 50 years would be that it really shears off three of those four elements and has a highly mathematized form, especially as you get more into graduate level work. It’s very, very interested in formal modeling and quantification. I think Keynes is right, though, that these other elements are essential to the discipline. There are people who share this view still today. Ha Joon Chang, who I quote in the book was an economist at Cambridge for many decades. He, within the last decade, remarked that economics is just one long political argument. The feminist economist Julie Nelson, is also pretty sympathetic to this framing of the field. So you might wonder what’s at stake here, right? It’s a fair question when academics are debating about the contents of a curricula you might think, does this actually matter? In the first chapter, I also get into some of the political stakes for how economics is taught. Paul Samuelson wrote one of the best selling Econ textbooks of the 20th century. He also famously said, “I don’t care who writes a nation’s laws, if I get to write it’s economics textbooks.” So, he got his wish. His book helped introduce Keynes to America. There’s something profoundly creepy about that remark. I think it’s very kind of anti-democratic, he’s cognizant of his role as a shaper of cultural common sense. He can sort of constrain or expand political imagination at will. Delegating that to an economist, or to anyone, even if you’re sort of sympathetic to their politics, there’s a kind of principled objection to doing that, right? I mean, we should be a little more explicit in our premises and assumptions. So another way to think about the stakes of economics education, and why does it matter what’s in econ 101, is that we don’t want just one person or even a set of people presenting what are moral and political assumptions under the rubric of natural science. A final strand that I think is relevant, and that I tried to trace, at least at some level, in the first chapter of the book, is this maneuver that analogizes the economy to a physical sphere with discoverable, immutable laws, akin to laws of physics or chemistry. This dates all the way back to the dawn of the field in the modern period. So there’s a quote I have in the book from David Ricardo, he’s critiquing poverty relief in the early 1800s, in England, and he invokes the law of gravitation. He says, “these poverty relief efforts are going to produce more misery and suffering, and this is as certain as the law of gravitation.” Fast forward a century, early 20th century, or it might be late 19th, turn of 19th to 20th century, William Graham Sumner, very influential American intellectual, uses the same metaphor in somewhat different contexts. He’s talking about increasing corporate concentration of power. He says this is just as inevitable as gravitation, it’s sort of a law of the universe, right? So the progressive agenda around antitrust, and dismantling monopolies, this is as naive and misguided as literally opposing the law of gravitation. Fast forward another 100 years. Today, this tradition is alive and well. One example is, there was a graph in Science, I think, in 2014, showing wealth inequality. People who describe themselves as econo-physicists commented that the slope of this graph, which was an exponential curve, was an inevitable feature, sort of akin to other slopes that you can find throughout nature, whether it’s the distribution of sizes of ant colonies, population clusters of microbes, et cetera. All of these sorts of patterns in nature were mapped on to wealth inequality to, once again, justify the status quo and frame any opposition to it as similarly misguided to opposing a law of nature. So you can see how fighting about Econ 101, while it might seem academic, the stakes are quite high. This does shape and constrain political imagination. The goal of Chapter One was to raise these issues and also highlight the work of people who are trying to expand the way the discipline is taught.

Billy Saas:  The quote that you mentioned from Samuelson got my hackles raised a little bit because Samuelson features frequently in our spaces, and in my mind and the MMT world, specifically, because in a documentary about John Maynard Keynes in the 80s, basically, the effect of his statement was: we may not need to balance the budget talking about the federal government, like that’s not actually something that needs to happen. However, he’s saying this on tape in a documentary about Keynes: it might be important for people to believe that, right? Because if they didn’t think that there were restrictions and that we had to balance the budget then anarchistic chaos and inefficiency would prevail. That’s particularly insidious next to the quote that you have in your book, which is exactly “I don’t care who writes a nation’s laws or crafts its advanced treaties, if I can write its economics textbooks. So acknowledging in 1990 the effect of his work that has been published and revised since 1948, and then ultimately subject of some criticism, but dominant for a long time. In talking with economists who are currently practicing, whether they’re in Orthodox schools or heterodox, I think that there’s just generally a frustration with Samuelson, but I’m particularly offended by acknowledging the power of the narrative on one hand, and then on the other hand, saying: yeah, it’s necessary to have some of these fictions so that people don’t get too out of hand and start demanding nice things like social welfare benefits on a mass scale.

Nick Romeo:  Absolutely. Just to pile on to Samuelson here for a minute. Another comment that he made on national television, I think this was on 60 Minutes. He was discussing what used to be called Kelso Plans. And these were the predecessors of ESOP’s, Employee Stock Ownership Plans, which have been extraordinarily successful in sharing equity with working people across America. This is kind of our best answer to worker-owned cooperatives, like the Mondragon co-ops in Spain. So he’s on national TV, and the interviewer asks him, what are his thoughts on Kelso’s plans? He evokes Marie Antoinette, he says: “Oh, sure, it has a Marie Antoinette-ish ring to it. Let them have capital,” describing workers. So I just thought this was wildly irresponsible. He’s sort of suggesting that extending some level of worker ownership will result in the French Revolution. He also then made some comment about how it’s similar to lollipops growing on trees. So once again, this would contravene a fundamental natural law of the universe. And oh, if that argument doesn’t persuade you, it will also lead to enormous bloodshed. It’s a very irresponsible comment. Luckily, it’s been contravened by 50 years of success for ESOP’s. But you do wonder how much more widespread those could be if they were the default model for business ownership. Of course, workers have an equity stake in the businesses that they make successful. What if that was just the default as opposed to a sort of niche organizational structure? I think one can reasonably point a finger at people like Samuelson and say there’s really some blame there. They’re kind of abusing this position of expertise to advance very plutocratic agendas.

Billy Saas:  After having been accused, as you note in your book too, that in the 1940s when MIT was looking at it, they thought that it might be too communistic, too socially minded and not really.

Nick Romeo:  Isn’t that wild.

Scott Ferguson:  Meanwhile, he’s primarily responsible for shoving Keynes’s legacy back into a neoclassical IS-LM framework, right? There was another Keynesian textbook by an economist named Tarshis, that was much more faithful to what Keynes was up to, and pushing hard on neoclassical assumptions. Whereas Samuelson basically tamed the Keynesian revolution as he was perpetuating it. One of the things I really appreciated about your introductory framing was taking non-strictly economic knowledge seriously, whether that’s literature and short stories, or it’s comedy sketches from the UK. I don’t know if you want to talk to us a little bit about how some of those other ways of understanding political economy are important to you.

Nick Romeo:  Yeah, that’s a great question. I’m glad you raised that. I started the book with a short story by Leo Tolstoy, who I think is a wonderfully subtle thinker about economics, in his non-fiction, as well as his fiction. It’s interesting how even Anna Karenina, Levin is fascinated by political economy. He’s always reading the political economists that were gaining ascendance in 19th century Europe. He goes out and does farm work with his workers. These are sort of semi indentured people. He has this sort of anguish, this ethical torment about his own wealth. So Tolstoy was fascinated by economic themes and fiction and nonfiction. But I started the book with a short story called, How Much Land Does a Man Need? It’s this beautiful, concise moral fable that, I think, should be taken seriously as an investigation of a lot of economic themes. You can find in literary form antecedents for a lot of the stuff that behavioral economics folks think that they have discovered, whether that’s the sunk cost fallacy, the idea of like a hedonic treadmill. All of this is implicit in the narrative and much more beautifully rendered than in any behavioral econ study you can find. It’s a kind of pointed story because after seeking constant acquisition, the hero dies and ends up in six feet of earth in which he’s buried. So this is, in fact, the quantity of land that all of us need eventually, right? Death is this kind of final check on acquisitive frenzy. It’s also fascinating how it links up with other material in the book. I was talking with someone in upstate New York, who was the retiring CEO of an optics manufacturing firm. In his own way, he more or less paraphrased the title of the book. He had some options when he was retiring. He could have sold to a strategic buyer for a lot of money, probably hundreds of millions. Instead, he converted his business to an employee ownership trust, to secure it in perpetuity. So very pro social policies like not offshoring the company, sharing profits with workers. So in describing those choices, and why he did that, he more or less said, I’m just one person, how much money do I need? If I took the higher offer, I would spend my whole retirement just doing money management. More importantly, I would have betrayed these values that I spent decades building the business to enshrine those values. So I think it’s striking to hear a guy in upstate New York echoing Tolstoy. There’s something universal about this human intuition that it’s pretty profoundly misguided to always have that next acquisitive summit you must ascend.

Billy Saas:  It does play out, too, in pop culture and media. I keep thinking of Daniel Plainview in There Will Be Blood, right at the end. It’s just him and a little bowling alley. Oh, he’s finished, right. Yeah.

Nick Romeo:  Totally. 

Scott Ferguson:  Another major critique that runs throughout many of your chapters, that we very much share with you, is a rejection of the very notion of economic externalities. The idea that somehow the only proper sphere of economic analysis, behavior, meaning is the private competitive marketplace, and any effects that seem to exceed that very narrow sphere, is external to it, and then can be understood and variously priced or accounted for or discounted for, as a so called “externality”. And this, I think, is a pretty good transition to talking about your first really substantive chapter about alternative programs, which is about the theory but also the practice of what’s called “true price”. And I’m wondering if you could tell our audience a little bit about that.

Nick Romeo:  Yeah, absolutely. I think at a really simple level, the intuition is well captured by a bumper sticker that I often see walking around in Berkeley, California, which says something to the effect of: “when you throw something away, what do you mean by away?” So “externality”, this term that’s kind of central to economics, presupposes some border beyond which we pay less attention to some impact of how we produce or consume or transport economic goods. So “true pricing” is an initiative sometimes it’s assimilated to a broader set of accounting practices called True Cost Accounting. True price, specifically, is in Amsterdam. It originated in the work of a nonprofit there, although it has affinities to other movements around Europe and the world. If you think about the kind of econ 101, classic example of apples, you go into a grocery store. Currently, we have very limited visibility into all sorts of information about what we consume. To stick with the Apple example: maybe you know that it’s organic. This does convey actual information, there is a legally enforceable definition of that term. But even the organic label tells you nothing about its carbon footprint, where it came from. Maybe you do know that it’s local, and you can infer something about the carbon footprint. This tells you nothing still, your local organic apple, you have no information about the people who were involved in transporting and growing it. So workers conditions: did they have the right to unionize? were they paid adequately? No visibility into that. Okay, so maybe it’s a fair trade, local organic apple. It’s getting better, there are some wage floors. There’s some content to fair trade, it might not be as robust as we could hope. But you’re sort of getting the picture here that I’m painting of a very partial patchwork of labels, none of which really gives you insight into all the things one might care about. In fact, I think a lot of people do care about it. All of these labels are also subject to copycats, right? People who want to use the label, but evacuate all content and meaning. So the free rider problem, as it’s called in game theory. They want all the benefits, but none of the costs of using the label. So there are all kinds of self-certification schemes in industry. Terms like ‘sustainable’ and ‘natural’ are largely meaningless in a grocery store, and that’s challenging. True Price says, somewhat audaciously, look, what if we actually could capture all of the relevant externalities for a good. Quantify them. Reasonable people can disagree about how that works, or even some of the moral hazards that can be involved in doing that for certain kinds of infractions. Their view is that this is a second best option. In a lot of cases, it gives you some information. That’s better than the default option of no information. So if we can quantify all the relevant externalities, whether that’s something environmental or something involved in the treatment of humans throughout a supply chain, and communities, suddenly you have information that is relevant not only to consumers. You could have consumer facing applications where in a grocery store, for instance, you actually had one product with a True Price and another product with a different True Price. And you could compare the prices in this would instantly tell you the size of the externalities of the two products, that would do a few things, right? On the one hand, insofar as people are sensitive to price signals, they would consume less of the worst product, because its price would be higher. Simultaneously, this would motivate a company to change its production and transportation and supply chain issues that resulted in such a high True Price. So if they’re destroying soil quality, depleting aquifers, involved in all kinds of labor abuses, or human rights issues throughout the supply chain, all of that shows up in the true price, which can only be lowered by improving those issues. That’s only the consumer facing application of True Prices. It can and also is being used as a kind of internal auditing tool. So even if consumers are not paying that price, the European chocolate company, Tony’s Chocolonely, uses True Price analysis to try to improve their supply chains year after year. So it’s a kind of benchmarking whereby they’re trying to improve, and they now have ways to measure all of these different dimensions of the impacts of products. I think maybe the most ambitious but hopeful application of true pricing would be in policy and regulation. I mean, you could imagine, if you think about what is subsidized in the American food system, for instance. Imagine replacing that with a more rational and coherent set of taxes and subsidies that reflect the actual impacts, whether that’s showing up in medical costs, right? If people eat very unhealthy and addictive food, in some sense, the cost of that shows up in the medical system, maybe years or decades from now. Of course, there are also huge ecosystemic costs. One report I quote in the book from the Rockefeller Foundation that’s using True Price analysis essentially tripled the annual cost of the US food system. It’s actually costing about three times more to produce and consume food the way we do currently. The thing I think that is crucial to keep in mind with true pricing: there’s a temptation to think, well, this is just sort of making up numbers and then adding it to the cost of things. And how could we do that, especially with inflation running high? I think one key insight that helps me when I think about what a true price means is that the price is already going to be paid. It’s not that we’re inventing a price. That there is some sort of true price. What we’re talking about is who is going to pay them. So when we buy incredibly cheap goods that are produced by supply chains that on some level involve a lot of human suffering and misery and also environmental degradation, that cheapness is completely illusory. It’s not that by not paying it, we’re making the prices go away. We’re just making someone else pay those prices, often someone in a much more vulnerable position, maybe somewhere else in the world, maybe in our own country. There’s been a lot of terrifying reporting in the last year about the resurgence of child labor and American factories. Maybe they are people in future generations, maybe they are non-humans, maybe they are animals and ecosystems, but there is this price, we’re just not paying it. So true pricing kind of imports, I think, very reasonable moral and ethical considerations back into the economic sphere and says, Well, maybe we, broadly conceived, should be paying these prices. Not necessarily consumers, I mean, companies could pay them, governments could pay them, consumers could help. What seems least defensible, is what we’re currently doing. And that’s kind of ignoring them and having vulnerable workers and the natural world bear the brunt of our current consumption and production practices.

Scott Ferguson:  If I understand you correctly, the importance is not coming up with exact pricing, as if now we’re getting the number right. If anything, it seems more about re-injecting or newly disclosing the political rhetorical, qualitative, ethical and moral constructs that hide behind seemingly natural prices. In that way, it seems to me like this really speaks to or fits within a much longer tradition of thinking about what was called, especially in the Middle Ages, Just Price Theory, right. And I’m thinking about the writings of Thomas Aquinas and others who were not just talking about what is a fair contract between two people or two firms or something like that. But how does the whole system get organized in order to create a more just economic system?

Nick Romeo:  Yeah, absolutely. I mean, that’s like a fascinating tradition, the Just Price theorizing from Aquinas onward. But no, I think that’s right. There’s something very interesting, psychologically, that happens when you use quantification as a tool. There is this illusion of utter precision, where there’s a sense that, okay, we’ve got this exact price. Here’s what it’s worth, to, let’s say, degrade the aquifer beneath the land that grows the grain that feeds the cow, etc, etc. It is a useful tool, but I think it’s important to see it as a heuristic, right? It’s a first approximation, it is based on assumptions. And yet, it’s not invented, right? You can look at studies that say, well, here’s how long it would take to restore soil quality. Even with the treatment of workers, here’s what a reasonable living wage would be, so you’re under paying workers by this amount. That figure is not arbitrary. But it is debatable, right. It’s not a finding of natural science. It’s a construct that is still very useful. I mean, I think a lot of the subtler economic thinkers are completely on board with that. But there is often this slippage where just by virtue of quantification, people sometimes have the sense that we’ve given a completely exacting and exhaustive account of value. So I agree with how you put it, basically. Yeah.

Billy Saas:  It seems too that the True Price system, to a certain extent, in the Amsterdam example, and in your book it exists in that country. It exists more generally, and I think this is where the MMT framework can come in handy, in places like the United States where we have sin taxes in states. And we have tax schedules that are organized and arranged federally where, in a very real way, the state is determining the price of doing certain activities. It is harnessing its ability in the case of the federal government to create and regulate the money system. So I’m thinking about disincentivizing it by making it prohibitively expensive, for example, to buy cigarettes. To do things that will, and there are some calculations that are done to that effect. I guess I’d be interested in exploring the differences between what’s exciting about the True Price system and what already exists in terms of a tax system, that is, primarily, it seems about incentivizing certain labor and disincentivizing labor and consumption in other directions.

Nick Romeo:  Yeah, that’s a really interesting point. I think I do see where you’re going with that. I mean, one thought is the True Price, in part, is a kind of consciousness raising tool, right? So one could probably make the same case about taxes, although I don’t think they’re quite as ubiquitous as prices, especially in a consumer society. You forget about them a lot of the time, and then you grumble once a year and deal with them or something. But maybe with the exception of sales taxes, sales taxes might be an exception there. To take cigarettes, your example, it’s interesting how it can apply to so many things. Hamburgers: people have done these really striking calculations about if we paid the real cost of a hamburger with a more expansive scope, boundary, defining those costs in space and time on humans and nonhumans, very few people would eat a lot of $120 Hamburgers, right? This would just change consumer behavior. But for people who were still willing to do that sort of behavior at an exorbitantly high price, you would also then generate some surplus, some revenue that could be used to remediate those harms in theory. So I don’t know if that answers your question. But that’s a provocative one.

Billy Saas:  It does get me thinking about hamburger parties in the Hamptons, and I liked that thought. It’s kind of funny to me.

Scott Ferguson:  Maybe we should move on to the next chapter in which you take on the construction of the very idea of a living wage. This is a phrase that gets thrown out a lot. I think I often use it, especially when I’m trying to argue for and explain what a federal job guarantee or a local job guarantee might be, and what kind of social benefits it will provide. I’ll say, it provides a living wage, right. But you’ve looked into how that notion is variously constructed, and some of the problems and possibilities with it.

Nick Romeo:  Yeah, you know, I found this chapter really interesting to report and research because I think, like you, I had this view that living wages are really pretty good. They let people enjoy a reasonable and decent kind of middle class life. And my sense of what that means would include things like going out to a meal, now and then in a restaurant, saving a bit for retirement, being able to buy your kids a gift, saving a bit for a rainy day fund, cars break down, phones get dropped, stuff comes up in life. All of this intuitively seems like part of living. So if we have the term living wage, shouldn’t it enable this? So in that chapter, I look at one of the more influential living wage calculators, which is run by an economist at MIT, it’s just the MIT living wage calculator. So this is used by all sorts of businesses in wage setting, as well as by nonprofits in shaping policy guidelines. So it’s a very influential tool. Yet, the actual content of life that this tool enables it’s very meager, and it’s much less generous than the idea of a living wage even 100 years ago, as articulated by people like Teddy Roosevelt, the Labour leader Samuel Gompers, the Catholic priest John Ryan, who coined the phrase ‘living wage’ in a book. They all had a much more capacious sense of what living was that includes some of those elements I mentioned, like saving for retirement, for a rainy day, some vacation or leisure time. All of this seems like it should be part of living. So when you have a highly influential tool that receives some level of corporate support for its research, and then that same research is enabling corporations to pay very meager wages, alarm bells pretty naturally go off. The chapter is kind of trying to argue for an expansion of the concept, but we’re in a tricky terminological corner, because the living wage already exists in the public imagination and its true terms are largely defined. So for people who want to expand it, the options can feel cumbersome. You can say, we pay a “real” living wage or a “true” living wage. In the UK, this gets a little more absurd because they call what we call a minimum wage the living wage. So then their critics want the true living wage, but then they themselves have a pretty constrained definition. So now we’re several levels in and you have to have: “no the real true living wage” … At some point, you kind of throw your hands up and say we need a new term. Yet there’s something really important that that term captures, which is that there’s a moral dimension to wage setting. It’s not simply where supply and demand meet and markets clear, where the good in question is labored. No, there’s a kind of moral choice that employers are making when they’re when they’re wage setting.

Billy Saas:  Thinking about these terms back to the true price, but incorporating it here, the definition of life and living, the definition of true. These are the province of philosophers, and rhetoricians, and humanities scholars broadly, right? So it seems like your book makes a compelling argument that we need to bring philosophy back into the center of economic discussions. As we’ve been talking about these things, I completely agree. It occurs to me that when it comes to these moral questions the economists as presently trained are some of the least equipped to have them. To a certain extent an economist is someone who can get away with making broad claims without considering the moral and ethical components of those claims and impacts of those claims. They just sort of don’t have to. It’s assumed that they will not. So of these projects, you document several of them, it seems economists are maybe not the best to have these conversations, although there are exceptions, of course. Maybe Silicon Valley bros are not the best at determining how labor should be distributed and how people should be paid. This was, I think, one of the more exciting, in that it’s new, and I wasn’t aware of it, and I could see its implementation. Scott and I were talking about it before jumping on with you, it seems incredibly promising. Could you talk to us about the public management of the gig economy as it’s being piloted in a town in California?

Nick Romeo:  Yeah, absolutely. I also find this a really fascinating case study. I think it’s maybe a little bit more outside the Overton window. But that’s kind of precisely why it’s interesting. Living wages are on people’s radar, even if the term has been corrupted and co-opted. It’s sort of in the imagination already. But the idea that gig work should exist is a public manifestation, that there should basically be a public option for people who do irregular work. Now, that could be irregular work, as the gig companies are currently structured. So delivering food, driving, those kinds of part time jobs, but it could also be all kinds of other irregular work, whether that’s engineering or architectural, or legal. There’s not something limiting it to one set of occupations. The deep insight, I think, in this chapter is that the current benefits of gig work are separable from its private sector manifestation. So you can retain some of those benefits. In fact, you can increase them. Things like flexibility, an attractive range of types of work, you can retain those benefits while eliminating some of the very well documented downsides. So for instance, if you deliver or drive for some of the dominant gig work companies today, you may lose 30 to 50% of every transaction in fees that are supporting venture capitalists and distant shareholders. That’s a huge part of the economic transaction that’s flowing away from the workers. A public option could dramatically reduce that extractive component. It might be 2%-5% per transaction, enough to maintain overhead and infrastructure for the platform, but there’s no commitment to enrich shareholders. That’s not part of the structure. It operates in the public interest, by design. If you had a public option for good work, you would have much more money left on the table for those workers. This could also show up in more affordable prices for consumers, right? Again, there would be a kind of ethical calculus that would have to balance those competing demands. But increasing the size of the pie is one very attractive feature. Another thing that I think is striking here is that there are good reasons to aggregate a lot of supply and demand for work in one place. Network effects are real. Convenience goes up for both job seekers, and for the consumers of that work when a lot of people are in one place. So by siloing all of this work across dozens of competing private sector platforms, where we’re losing efficiency, interestingly. The private sector is being lauded every day in the media as this sort of generator of efficiency and ruthless productivity. In fact, it’s highly inefficient, a public option could be much more efficient in harnessing those network effects. A final thing I’ll say about that chapter is just that we’re already familiar with this model, right? Public infrastructure is cherished even today, in a kind of bipartisan sense. People liked the Post Office, right? People liked functioning roads, people like safe water. So road systems, water networks, expanding that same principle to labor markets, such that workers had safe, attractive options for jobs with benefits that could be portable, like you could enforce labor law much more readily. You could have benefits that travel with workers, their legal classification as employees, all of this would be much easier in a public sector option. A final interesting wrinkle, and then I’ll pause. But a final interesting wrinkle with this is, there’s a certain amount of latitude in implementation. There are trials happening at municipal levels in multiple cities around America. There’s also interest from larger, regional governments in multiple countries. One other wrinkle that is kind of interesting is that even if you are highly committed to the somewhat tendentious view that private markets are inherently more efficient, and you think, okay, a public option would just be mired in bureaucracy and red tape and it would function like the DMV, it would be no fun, right? No one would want to go use it. Even if you have that view, that’s actually not fatal to this model. And the reason for that is that you could have a sort of concession, whereby, in the same way that a national lottery or a National Park will have private operators functioning within a broadly public program. The operation of the platform per se, you could have a competitive bid and let a company operate it. And then so whatever sorts of benefits that are, in fact, unique to private markets, you can retain those right? If the platform is just going to be much more intuitive and well designed, the software will never glitch if a private company runs it. Okay, let’s assume that that is the case: we can still have a public option, you just have a concession whereby, you know, for a term of five years through a competitive bid, a private operator manages the platform. But the statutory function is still in the public interest, right? Profits are kept for that private operator. And the goal is the provision of work in a public utility model.

Scott Ferguson:  I’m curious if any of the people you talk to or any of your research took you to the history of workforce boards in the United States? I have an older friend in the Tampa Bay area who, for Hillsborough County, worked in public job training and placement for decades and decades, from the Great Society to the end of welfare as we know it. He saw all those changes, and they were able to do all kinds of interesting, creative activist training and placement work and they would have libraries built and then they would have the people they were working with staff those libraries once they were built. Building boardwalks along waterways and creating jobs and training people and placing people in public employment. According to his telling, I’m not some, studied historian of this history, but I know something about it. According to him, it’s the Clinton administration in the 90s that changed the legal structure of workforce boards, which basically turned the requirements for representation from public majority to private majority. So the more active, public governmental mediation of job training, and job placement that used to go on has been more and more and more privatized, and serving private interests. It seems like this model of a public option for a digital gig economy would be a way to push back against the legacy of Clintonism.

Nick Romeo:  Yeah, absolutely. I think workforce boards are probably one of the more plausible candidates for implementing this model. I know, in fact, that they are already in conversation around the country with Wingham Rowan, who is a sort of British policy entrepreneur who helped introduce this idea to the American political and economic space, he is very closely integrated to workforce boards. It makes sense intuitively, you’re already as a Workforce Board convening a lot of private sector employers getting a sense of your local labor market. So if there is a stadium in town that hires a lot of people seasonally, or maybe there is a dock where a lot of cargo is getting unloaded but they’re hiring workers sporadically. They’re already looking for reliable workers, and instead of letting all of that work go through private sector staffing agencies, which again, take very large, extractive cuts per transaction. Aggregating that through a public sector option, I think it can push back on privatization, which I don’t know the Clinton history, but I think that sounds right, broadly. Another thought is just that public entities, whether this is City Hall, public schools, parks, and open space departments, are already large employers in many states and cities around the country. There’s a lot of work that they are hiring, much of it is part time and flexible. So there’s basically a lot of low hanging fruit. I think workforce boards are natural conveners to sort of match supply and demand within a more prosocial public option framework.

Scott Ferguson:  Great, this obviously leads us to what led us to you, which is the job guarantee or jobs guarantee. The phrase is interchangeable. So you became interested in this pilot program that’s in this small town in Austria. Our listeners are pretty familiar with the job guarantee, because that plays a huge role in Modern Monetary Theory, Pavlina Tcherneva, who is an MMT Economist you cite at length in your book, in your chapter about the job guarantee.

Nick Romeo:  Yes.

Scott Ferguson:  If we just presume that our audience probably knows something about the job guarantee, what was it like experientially as a reporter to go check out what they’re doing in Austria?

Nick Romeo:  It was fascinating. This town, it’s maybe 45 minutes outside of Vienna. It’s got a really interesting history where, in the 1930s, it was decided this classic sociological study on the effects of unemployment. It was a one factory town, factory shuts down in the 1930s. Some sociologists show up from the University of Vienna, and in a very kind of journalistic, anthropological way, they just ask people questions, they spend time with them, they talk to them about how their lives are going. The results are really quite sad, but very interesting. people’s mental health kind of falls apart without work. A lot of the social fabric of the town frays. People have this sort of sense of structureless-ness to the day, they don’t really know what to do. There are quotes from original people in the study where they say things to the effect of: I just feel kind of stuck between the four walls of my room. I don’t know what to do all day. So fast forward to the present where the job guarantee is a kind of reversal of the original condition. The first sociologists are studying the effects of unemployment. Today, what happens with guaranteed employment? How does this affect people? Not just economically, but psychologically, socially as well. Chatting with folks, it was almost uncanny how some of the comments from the original study showed up in different forms. I talked to one guy who said, I have breakfast, and then it’s just like, I don’t know what to do all day. He was describing being unemployed before he joined the job guarantee. So this sense of like, looming expanses of time that are very hard to fill. There are both economists and sociologists involved in studying the current job guarantee. The plural of anecdote is not data, but they do have data. I was there getting anecdotes, and you put those two things together, it’s a pretty compelling picture of how meaningful work is and that’s an important caveat, people in the job guarantee are co-designing the work they do, they’re not just forced into any job. But meaningful work has these tremendous benefits for time structure, self esteem, and social relationships. It was a huge range of folks that were participating in the job guarantee, also. Just being there and talking with dozens of them and pretty quickly dispelled any stereotype of the typical unemployed person. It was everything from people with advanced degrees to people who hadn’t finished high school. A huge range of ethnic backgrounds, range of ages. One thing that was kind of interesting, this is a cumbersome phrase, I’m not sure I love it. But there was this sort of internalized neoliberalism in a lot of their comments where they felt like unemployed people are still sort of just like, “bad and lazy”, and “even though I’m in this job guarantee, and I’m eligible for it, because I was unemployed, I’m not like those people. I’m the exception.” You wonder sometimes just talking to folks, that feels like a pretty devastatingly harsh view that is pretty deeply internalized in a lot of people’s comments. That’s another thing that was a bit of a through line in remarks was the sense that you are a bit of a failure if you haven’t found a job, even though they sort of recognize that the private market is failing utterly. Not only is it not producing enough jobs, but it’s not satisfying a lot of basic needs. A lot of work that needs to be done, whether that’s care work, green transition work. I do lean heavily on Pavlina. She has a wonderful book on The Case for a Job Guarantee, and what it would look like at a federal level, which was really influential to how I approached that town in Austria. I think she makes very effective arguments for how it could scale and why it’s a compelling proposal. But the journalistic work was just fascinating. It’s really powerful to hear folks talk about the non-financial benefits of work.

Billy Saas:  In the introduction, you preview the book by talking about a bunch of really promising developments, policies that are being piloted and tried out and all these cities across the world. But you also say that some are not considered or discussed in your book. In certain cases, the omission of discussion of those policies or initiatives reflects a critical assessment. I couldn’t help but notice that universal basic income is not featured, although there are pilot programs for UBI across the world. I’ll just qualify and say that we’re not big UBI folks. We’re jobs guarantee folks. So I wonder if UBI might be one of those that you have a critical assessment in your back pocket and ready to talk about or not, or if there are others that you considered, but didn’t make it into the book?

Nick Romeo:  Yeah, you know, I think the big one is crypto. I don’t see that as a plausible or even legitimate intervention that can improve economic outcomes from people. It seems just like a Ponzi scheme, and the evidence for that accumulates almost weekly with new legal indictments of various companies around the world. So the other things that don’t make it into the book, I’m very sympathetic to various policies. Tax policy, for instance, I would love to have done a chapter and did get some way into reporting for a chapter on international tax evasion, tax fraud. There is not any sort of plausible role for tax evasion in a just economy. So the exclusion of that from the book was much more a matter of just practicality than principle. I would have loved to have had the bandwidth and the time to really report that out thoroughly. You won’t be surprised to hear that these are really kind of intricate, complicated cases. If you’re going to do justice to tax evasion that spans many jurisdictions and continents, and has very sophisticated accounting to conceal any wrongdoing, that would almost be a book itself. So I wasn’t able to do that. I would definitely like to explore that more. The universal basic income, I also am more sympathetic to Job Guarantees than I am to UBI, and there are a few reasons for that. That being said, I’m certainly not opposed to all of the interesting experiments. It does seem to have lots of traction, there’s a lot of good research on it. People don’t spend the money on video games or alcohol. It’s very helpful as a kind of buffer. One thing I find a little more compelling about job guarantees is just what we were describing, some of the psychological benefits that people can derive from meaningful work. The objection, often, to that comment I just made is that all of those benefits reflect a previous socialization in which we’re taught to think that work should be central to our identities, and this is the kind of capitalist socialization that we should resist. I don’t know, I mean, I don’t have a strong view on that. I can understand that critique. But I also feel like it could very easily be overstated, and that there probably is something pretty deep in human nature that responds to doing meaningful work with other humans. I guess, again, the UBI folks would try to take a generous view of what their response would be, would probably say: Well, sure, people will still do that. They’ll mount musical productions, and they’ll stage plays. Maybe they’ll even do all kinds of things that people in jobs currently do, but it won’t be within an employment framework and that’ll be better. Sure, that could be the case. The other thing I find a little more compelling about a job guarantee, though, is just that we do have so much work that has to be done, right? I mean, I’m thinking of two things in particular: care work and infrastructure slash green transition. We don’t care well for young people, or old people, or sick people in America. That’s like a huge need. When you combine that, there are a lot of people who are a latent workforce who are not working, because private sector options are atrocious, and don’t work for them. Combined care work with all of the green transition and infrastructure work that we desperately need, I see job guarantees as a tool for meeting that in a way that UBI might not be able to.

Scott Ferguson:  Yeah, and for the record, I think we are all for robust welfare benefits. We’re all for not letting people starve, and we’re all for public spending that allows for self actualization. But I think we concur with your critical comments about UBI and would just follow up and say that it’s a largely laissez faire kind of libertarian approach to problems that need, as your book points out over and over again, that needs some serious provisioning. Like some serious design and structures and possibilities, rather than just leaving people with some minimal amount of funds to experiment a little bit on their own. If there aren’t social structures to experiment within, then where are you going to do that experiment?

Nick Romeo:  Absolutely. Yeah. I think we’re on the same page there.

Scott Ferguson:  Just had to add an idea. So a job guarantee, right. So I’m thinking about an ideal world where everybody’s happy, including the UBI advocates: Jobs Guarantee and then also a publicly administered gig platform where one of the gigs is thinking about all the things you would do with your UBI. So just getting together and brainstorming…I don’t know.

Nick Romeo:  I actually think that a publicly administered option for irregular work would be a very natural mechanism for implementing a job guarantee?  I mean, that could be one among many other options on that platform. Another thing that we haven’t touched on, but I’m sure you’re aware of with job guarantees is that they exert this really positive pressure on private sector employers. So depending on your moral framework, this is good or bad, right? I mean, a lot of people would say, this is horrible, private sector folks will have to pay more, they’ll have to improve the quality of jobs, precisely because people have a compelling outside option. They know they can go find a nice, well paid and enjoyable and meaningful job through the public sector. So why would I work at a horrific private sector employee that changes my hours week to week, where I have no voice and no agency and a very low wage? Well, if those people have an outside option? Yes, they will take until private sector employers improve conditions and wages. So that upward pressure, I think, is another very compelling feature of a federal job guarantee. In some sense, this might be a faster route to a genuine living wage than living wage laws. I’m not sure I would actually defend that statement too hard. But it’s this sort of other way to get to that same goal. I think a genuine living wage legislation would be wonderful. But if we can’t get that we could also have a job guarantee that sort of functionally does the same thing.

Billy Saas:  Yeah.

Scott Ferguson:  I mean, that is an argument that we stand behind, and it’s very much part of MMT thinking. I think Pavlina would stand by it as well, which is that the way it’s often framed is that even with minimum wage laws, as long as there is structural unemployment, that the true minimum wage in a country, an economy, and the world, is $0.

Nick Romeo:  Yes.

Scott Ferguson:  It’s only through a public option and a wage and benefits floor for the entire economy that you can get to anything resembling a minimum wage, let alone a living wage.

Nick Romeo:  Absolutely, yeah.

Billy Saas:  Wonder if the gig platform and the publicly administered platform for irregular labor would also be a kind of backdoor to implementing a jobs guarantee. So right, anybody who needs a job can get one through the irregular labor, locally administered job board that just expands and it can be framed as a municipal innovation, right? You could get some seed money from some, maybe not just any venture capitalist, but a socially minded one. Have in its charter that it’s supposed to be. I’m always trying to think about ways to get it through the back door, because I don’t think the jobs guarantee, and maybe this is my last question for you about this is surely you’ve thought about the political prospects of these various initiatives, and you’re sensitive to their contexts and to what kind of conditions might need to be in place for these different things to flourish or even be considered at the local level. There needs to be certain progressive values or other politics present in order for some of these things to happen. Where do you stand in terms of your relative level of optimism and pessimism on a scale for the wider spread implementation? Do you see promising developments? Maybe this is the better way to go? Which trajectories do you find most promising of the policies and plans that you outlined in the book?

Nick Romeo:  With the caveat that it’s hard to read the crystal ball accurately, I do have some thoughts on that. And I am pretty optimistic in an American context that the municipal level could function as the proof of concept for the irregular public sector option. I love the thought of this functioning as a backdoor for a job guarantee as well. And I think actually in some of the cities that are currently thinking about it, that may be perhaps not explicitly articulated as a goal but it may be a kind of implicit strategy that exists to give people work. By aggregating a lot of demand for labor, both public sector jobs, but also private sector ones, we want to have a sufficient supply of demand for labor, such that anyone interested in finding a job within the city can do so. I think in an American context, that is going to be the route by which it scales. I’d be a little surprised if it started federally, and then flourished locally. I think if you have proof of concept at city, or maybe state levels, this could be compelling. Now, it would be wonderful to have an entire government take this on and that seems more possible around the world. You could think maybe about a New Zealand, maybe an Ireland, depending on what happens with elections. You can imagine certain governments being relatively open to some version of this. I’m sure you’re probably more familiar than me with the program in India as well, which is enormous in its scale, but somewhat limited in maybe its scope and the access to work that it provides for everyone. But I guess I am sort of optimistic. If you think back, even six or seven years, a lot of the major industrial policy, I’ll call it, that Biden has done would have seemed pretty inconceivable during the first Trump administration. You wouldn’t have thought that the CHIPS Act or the IRA would happen. That would have seemed kind of wild. So in five or six years, a lot of stuff that seems a little far fetched today could be quite plausible. You just said the first Trump administration. What did you mean by? Oh, God you’re right. I’m not feeling optimistic. Maybe we should strike that from the record. Of course, that’s a terrifying thought. But it’s not looking good.

Billy Saas:  It’s not looking good. In part because a lot of this has to do with domestic variously defined national or intra-state intra-governmental policy. I wonder if the international versions of these programs, or applications of this kind of thinking, have you come across more internationalist versions of the job guarantee or or any of these other programs that don’t seem to be so limited? Because I think one of the, or a shortcoming potentially of the job guarantee, as currently conceived, is that it does seem to be bounded. Not necessarily, not essentially. But in terms of the imagination, and the way that we talk about it, it tends to be, you said in the American context. I’m not expecting you to have the answer or even an answer, but more to highlight and open up discussion of international contexts and its foreign policy, in addition to domestic policy when it comes to these questions of like economic justice, and employment for all.

Nick Romeo:  Yeah, that’s a very interesting question that I don’t have a great answer for. I’m not aware of any international job guarantee, or even really how that would function. I mean, the one thing that I will say just from the book is that one of the models I focus on is the Mondragon cooperatives in the Basque Country in northern Spain, and they have a lot of incredible features. Yet one of the things that are consistently criticized for is that they rely on cheap labor. So not within Spain, but in places like China and Mexico. A lot of the precursor components for the industrial manufacturing that happens in Spain, a lot of this is coming from very low wage contexts where people are not unionized, they’re not paid particularly well. There are not great labor conditions. There has been some effort by Mondragon to try to extend a worker-owned cooperative model into these international contexts so that their entire supply chain would reflect the same values that they’re so, I think, rightly proud of at Mondragon in Spain. They haven’t had a lot of success, and people are kind of split on why that’s the case. If you listen to Mondragon, they’ll say, look at the local laws, labor laws, tax laws, even the ability to have a legal structure as a cooperative, this just doesn’t exist in these contexts. We can’t make everything in Spain, we have to have the competitive advantage that derives from these supply chains that originate in places like Mexico and China, or else we’ll literally go bankrupt. That’s the Mondragon story, for what it’s worth. On the other hand, there are critics, including people within Mondragon, who say we’ve got to be able to figure this out. It’s possible here, it may be harder elsewhere. There are some interesting stories about even cultural resistance among workers in Mexico, for instance, who have not heard of a worker owned co-op and are very suspicious of it, and are not particularly interested when people come and try to get them excited about transforming their company into that model. There’s a lot of pushback. That being said, Noam Chomsky is famous for criticizing Mondragon on these grounds. But even people within Mondriaan are pretty sensitive to this sort of double standard and the way workers are treated. I guess it just seems like a tricky issue that has not really been solved effectively. I’d be curious if you guys have thoughts on how to extend either job guarantee or just better wages and benefits in an international context. That seems like a tough one. The only other thought I have on that is true pricing. Right? Because that is a mechanism for saying exactly how much we are under paying people throughout a supply chain. If the European Union does pass some of this supply chain due diligence legislation, then if companies are shown to have human rights abuses in their supply chain, they’ll be sued for a lot of money. It doesn’t feel like a great solution, but it is a sort of tool, right? I mean, this could motivate improvement in working conditions along, really, the whole length of supply chains that span continents. But what do you guys think?

Billy Saas:  Just to clarify what got me on this trajectory was considering the prospects of a second Trump administration in light of the fact that currently there’s a lot of discourse around how good the economy is, and how people are ignoring that Biden has gotten us through and that his policies work. Throwing their hands up at his historically low popularity levels, while also not really having discussion about the foreign policy of the United States, and the kind of apparent and striking, stark incompatibility of a robust domestic program of public provisioning, at the same time, as one is provisioning, foreign militaries and the support of them as they conduct occupations. It seems like there’s moral inconsistency there that needs to be parsed and grappled with. I feel like it’s too easy to say, well, these are separate issues, and that we can have this conversation without having that conversation. But that is increasingly implausible, also.

Scott Ferguson:  Even some of the earlier, big Biden legislation was often packaged as good and as interesting and as neoliberal-jamming as they were. And I support them for those reasons. They were nevertheless packaged as anti-China. This zero-sum game with China and we got to put down China or we got to get ahead of China. So, yeah, there’s all kinds of dimensions to this.

Billy Saas:  I don’t think we have any answers.

Scott Ferguson:  We have no answers, just problems.

Nick Romeo:  I think it’s an important question. I don’t know how far we should go down this road, but it reminds me a bit of the green growth versus degrowth debates where the folks who lean really hard on green growth often buttress their arguments for a decoupling between economic growth and environmental impact. Those arguments are really effective to the extent that they have a very narrow scope. They don’t count emissions along the entire length of supply chains. So what looks like decoupling, if you kind of zoom out and expand the scope, which of course for ecosystems and climate is really the only reasonable approach, those arguments become much less persuasive very quickly. In a global context, we’re not doing well, environmentally. I agree that sort of partitioning that off from the economic success story is misguided. Yeah.

Scott Ferguson:  Well I don’t want to let you go without asking you to talk about one of your later chapters in which you take on these legal forms that I admit I knew nothing about. But I find them totally fascinating. It’s kind of expanding your exploration of alternative models of ownership that you discuss in the Mondragon chapter. That’s what this legal instrument called Perpetual Purpose Trusts. Do I have that right?

Nick Romeo:  Yes. That’s right.

Scott Ferguson:  So what are they? And what do they do? And why are they important?

Nick Romeo:  Yeah, so they’re sometimes also called employee ownership trust, but whatever they’re called, they are legal documents, and they are a new way of organizing ownership of companies. To back up a little bit, if you think about someone who is on the point of selling their company, maybe a retiring baby boomer, of which there is no shortage in America. There’s a lot of wealth that will be transitioning in the next decade, and it’s happening already. One thing those folks can do is simply sell to a strategic buyer or to private equity. So a competitor within their economic sector, or a bigger private equity firm, typically. Now, if you do that, it’s very likely that your business will cease to exist. The strategy of rolling up companies within a sector, this happened famously with veterinary practices in private equity. But it’s actually a pretty pervasive strategy. So jobs go away, stuff gets consolidated. Return on Investment over a pretty short term time horizon is prioritized. What’s an alternative model? Well, this is where the legal instrument of a trust becomes important because you can kind of guarantee through the trust that the business will not be sold to private equity. You can say this business will remain owned by its workers, or it will remain owned by an advisory board. But you can stipulate within the trust not only a permanent ownership structure, but also a permanent set of goals that typically do not include profit maximization. So some of the folks I’ve profiled in the book are using this to enshrine very prosocial goals: things like profit sharing with employees, things like donating a percentage of profits to an environmental non-profit, even structural things like never letting the highest to the lowest paid worker ratio exceed 10:1. Another example is prioritizing hiring people who are formerly homeless or incarcerated. There’s a bakery in Oakland, right next door to where I live that wanted to enshrine that goal, but they also needed financing. They needed money from investors. The concern was, if we take money without any kind of protection, the goal of the business is kind of expensive. It’s hard to work with folks who are formerly homeless. This costs money. If our investors want their return, and they see an opportunity to cut costs, we could lose the entire mission of the business. The trust is a way around these kinds of dilemmas. It’s a way of permanently enshrining more prosocial motivations into the DNA of the ownership of a company.

Billy Saas:  We spoke, I guess a couple years ago, with Kim Stanley Robinson about his book, the Ministry For The Future, which as I was reading your book, found a lot of parallel in terms of object. It seems like if we are to right the ship, in whatever way you choose, but especially with respect to environmental catastrophe, we need to fundamentally rethink our relationship to the economy and ask questions about what it is. So there’s optimism, I think I asked earlier about pessimism and optimism. I share I think both with you, I detect both in your answers. It depends contextually. But in terms of Kim Stanley Robinson’s work in that book, are you familiar with it?

Nick Romeo:  I am. Yeah, I’ve read that novel.

Billy Saas:  So that novel. You know, it’s about a job guarantee. He talks about Mondragon. He talks about all of these different initiatives, and it’s not one thing, it’s a basket to use a favorite metaphor for economists. It’s a basket of things.  They are all necessary in the end. One of the things that has stuck with me about and I think is relevant in our current context where we have Elon Musk owning X, formally Twitter, and the ownership of our social media platforms are so much of the information. Where we will share about this episode of this podcast and effectively help to perpetuate his ownership and wealth. That at the center of KSR’s work is an intervention into public ownership of media. And the labor that is done collectively by people who participate in it. I guess, I wonder if you have any thoughts in that direction, about the place of not just social media, but media generally, media work as a media — I don’t know if you consider yourself a media worker, as a writer who publishes in primarily online spaces now. Yes, maybe ask you by way of conclusion to sort of reflect on your position in this broader media landscape and help us to, to understand our own.

Nick Romeo:  Yeah.

Scott Ferguson:  Easy question. A little lob.

Billy Saas:  Softball.

Nick Romeo:  That’s such a great question. I’m sure we could have a whole other conversation just on that topic, much of which would need to be off the record. In part, because I’m very critical of the way the mainstream media covers economics. A lot of it is just so disappointing. It’s so limited in scope and imagination. There’s a kind of hagiography of entrepreneurs as visionaries, which is often just profoundly misguided and un-empirical. There’s this cheerleading for the Fed and markets, and the casual acceptance of very outmoded models, whether that’s through labor markets, or how inflation works, how unemployment works. I’m very critical of both right and left wing media coverage of economics. So I like your suggestion, which I’m sure Kim Stan would agree that ownership of media itself is a pretty decisive intervention. It’s not a coincidence that the current UK government is trying to kill the BBC. NPR loses public funding, it seems by the year. The one thing that gives me a little hope for the media is the nonprofit model. Places like ProPublica, but really quite a few other very, very impressive newsrooms are grant funded. You’re still in some sense relying on the goodwill of foundations, and very wealthy people, some of whom have very questionable political commitments. It’s not a perfect system, but I think any kind of protection where you have a dedicated endowment, and then you can do your own research and reporting that’s helpful. Even The New York Times takes a lot of money from the fossil fuel industry. They have this outfit called T Brand Studios, where they write ads for fossil fuel companies using The New York Times employees. So they’ll have their kind of climate coverage, and then right next door, they’re making money from T Brand Studios. The Guardian, in 2019, stopped taking money from fossil fuel companies, which is encouraging and a generation ago that same debate played out with taking out money from the tobacco industry. the majors in cigarettes. So there’s some hope. More and more people in the media are realizing that how it’s funded really has huge implications for what is covered and how it’s covered. I think the disappointment I have with mainstream coverage and economics is not unique to me. I think a lot of thoughtful people feel this kind of sense of claustrophobia when they read the coverage. So maybe they just don’t read the coverage. But that’s a problem, too. To zoom out a little bit, Paul Samuelson is not the only person sculpting cultural common sense, however influential his econ textbook is, it’s also the journalists who study that textbook and then go to write for Bloomberg or the Times, or NPR. A lot of ostensibly liberal publications are absolutely committed to very un-empirical and dogmatic economic positions that are not taken seriously by a lot of economists who would like to change how the field is taught. Maybe that brings us full circle to teaching economics, letting that shape journalism, changing the ownership and funding structure of journalism: all of these interventions are really crucial to improving what the philosopher Michael Polanyi talks about The Tacit Dimension, which is this kind of reservoir of assumptions and common sense. Brother of the famous Viennese economic historian Karl Polanyi. Very interesting family.

Billy Saas:  That was wonderful.

Nick Romeo:  Great. Great. 

Billy Saas:  Nick Romeo. Thank you so much for joining us on Money on the Left. We really enjoyed it.Nick Romeo:  Thanks to you both. It was a pleasure.

* Thanks to the Money on the Left production teamWilliam Saas (audio editor), Mike Lewis (transcription), & Robert Rusch (graphic art)

Resisting Predatory Finance w/ Raúl Carrillo (Recovered Audio!)

Money on the Left is proud to present recovered and remastered audio from our interview with Raúl Carrillo, published previously solely as a written transcript. The recording also includes a new  audio introduction in which Billy Saas reflects on the significance of our dialog with Carrillo for contemporary politics. 

In our discussion, we explore the promise of the public money framework for advancing antiracist, anti-imperialist, and democratic politics across the world. We discuss how the public money or MMT perspective shapes his work as an attorney fighting against predatory finance and for an international, rights-based approach to full employment. A significant portion of the conversation is also devoted to Raúl’s ongoing critique of the “taxpayer money” trope in U.S. political culture. In both his recent article for the UCLA Criminal Law Review and a 2017 piece (coauthored with Jesse Myerson) for Splinter, Raúl persuasively shows that the myth of “taxpayer money” is not only incorrect in operational terms, but also a significant threat to marginalized communities and a major rhetorical obstacle for progressive politics. 

Raúl Carrillo is an attorney, chair of the board of the Modern Money Network, Research Fellow with the Global Institute for Sustainable Prosperity, and member of the advisory board at Our Money.

You can read his article for the UCLA Criminal Law Review here: https://escholarship.org/uc/item/7rp8g89c.

See his article on “The Dangerous Myth of Taxpayer Money” here: https://splinternews.com/the-dangerous-myth-of-taxpayer-money-1819658902

Theme music by Hillbilly Motobike.

Visit our Patreon page: https://www.patreon.com/MoLsuperstructure

Transcript

The following was transcribed by Richard Farrell and has been lightly edited for clarity.

William Saas: Raúl Carrillo, welcome to Money on the Left.

Raúl Carrillo: Thanks, Billy. I’m really happy to be here–long time hype man, first time participant.

William Saas: Thank you so much. It’s a long time coming. And we’re really thrilled to have you here. As we normally do, we’d like to ask you to start by telling us a little bit about your personal, political, and professional background as they relate to your appearance on the show today.

Raúl Carrillo: Sure thing, Billy. I’m on this podcast in my capacity, as you all know, as the co-chair of the Modern Money Network, the power vacuum behind the throne so to speak. But I’m happy to walk through my journey and how I got to MMT, which is rich and a little bit unique, just like everybody else’s. That’s sort of how it happens. You don’t come into heterodox economics, much less heterodox interdisciplinary studies, without a wild ride. So I’m happy to take it from the top. I grew up in the US Mexico borderlands, southern New Mexico, west Texas, which is where my folks have been for a very long time on both sides. It is a financial as well as biophysical desert. I grew up in a lot more relative material comforts compared to my community, my family, and my friends, but that allowed me to start to gain an appreciation of the wide gaps between the level of wealth, income, and resources in our area versus others. And so, I’ve always had this economic justice bent given my own family’s history, which has always been focused on racial justice.

I grew up on the stories of the Chicano civil rights movement, the Poor People’s Campaign, alliances with Black activists in the south, as well as stories about indigenous rights. I started to study economics when I got to college in order to better understand the extraction and massive inequality that I had seen back home in the United States and during my time in Mexico and other places. For me, it’s always been about intertwined injustices. When I was studying economics in college, the bottom fell out in a way like it does with everybody else. I was an undergrad learning about why all the things I believed in weren’t technically feasible. For me, this was instruction from a lot of the folks who have written textbooks; a lot of people who had made a career out of capturing political energy, filtering it through neoclassical or orthodox economics, and constraining it. That is essentially what happened to me as an undergrad–upwardly mobile dreams of people of color are cast in a certain way and the economics that attends that is a neoliberal set of economic ideas. So when everything fell apart, I couldn’t explain to anybody back home why things happen the way they happen despite all my time with these economists. This became increasingly frustrating. And so, I turned more broadly into the social sciences and law in particular.

The first MMT thinker I ever read wasn’t Dr. Kelton or Dr. Tcherneva, even though I’m very close to both of their work at this point. It was the work of William Black, who is a law professor and white collar criminologist that wrote a book called, The Best Way to Rob a Bank Is to Own One, after the crisis. He also has an interesting life. He was an assassination target of some financers back during the savings and loans crisis. He has traveled across multiple continents. But what he did that was special to me–and he wasn’t the only one who did this but he was the first one I was introduced to–was to connect some grand theses about austerity and public finance to predation. And I’d say that this is the site of my work today. Again, after the crisis, I abandoned economics in general and then went into law. I spent some time working in California on the multi-state mortgage fraud settlement. Then, I went to law school with a financial reform and racial justice lens. I didn’t really understand money or the deeper roots of the financial system, although I very much wanted to. I was lucky enough to meet Rohan Grey in law school. He was a year ahead of me and had already formed the corpus of the Modern Money Network. Over time, we turned that into what it is today with the help of y’all and many, many other great folks.

Maxximlian Seijo: As you’re alluding to already, you clearly work across myriad areas of law and political economy, and when we were preparing for this conversation, we tried to pour through your work once again and articulate a more or less single thread that links to various projects, which you’ve done just now in one framing and fashion. In our reading, it seems that your work insists that really we can only fully detect, resist, and overcome racism across the globe in a powerful and systemic way if we adopt the public money lens, or the Modern Monetary Theory perspective, which we all variously share. Would you consider that to be a fair assessment? And perhaps could you say more about how you came to this particular conviction?

Raúl Carrillo: Absolutely. Thanks, Maxx. I think that’s a fair encapsulation of the aim of my work as a scholar, organizer, activist, and someone who’s in this space with y’all. For me, certainly my focus has been race. Again, that’s the background and the lens through which I came to this, but it’s more about predation and depression in general, and the monetary architecture that creates those dynamics and lends itself to the exploitation of people of color but also any folks who are marginalized or oppressed in myriad ways. A lot of people have done some really great work about austerity, financial regulation, and social reproduction theory, for example, Zdravka Todorova, Donatella Alessandrini, and others who have been involved in the MMT community. I came to start focusing on race again because of my background, but also because it struck me that knowledge of the monetary and financial system has been used as a cudgel against movements for racial justice, social justice movements for emancipation, and other more egalitarian aims.

We discuss all the time how the “pay for” question is used as a trump card, but it’s really used as a trump card in specific contexts. Usually, it’s to tell people of color or other people demanding rights to shut up. That’s not the case when we think about, for example, the broader security state, the military, the surveillance state, war, incarceration, deportation, etc. The right wingers demand blank checks for the security of a small group of people that they imagine are deserving of care. I know you all touch on these things in MMN-HD especially, but that is also a guiding premise of my work. Having studied how Wall Street and Silicon Valley prey on people, working in a field on how public money finances rights, social justice, socialism, or to paraphrase Dr. King, you can call it whatever you want but it’s a system within which all of God’s creatures are entitled to a certain amount of resources, you really have to confront the monetary architecture. To stop the predation, you have to have a vision of abundance that cuts at the very roots of why the predation happens in the first place. For me, MMT crystallizes that in a way that most other bodies of work and thoughts across the social sciences withhold from doing.

The way that I frame it is that it is extremely difficult to have your eyes on all the balls that are in the air right now. We can’t afford to be in silos as far as movements go. We need to be talking about the holy trinity–race, gender, and class–but also immigration, nationalism, surveillance, climate change and ecology more broadly all the time. And so, the way I try to approach talking to fellow activists, fellow organizers–especially those working towards racial justice–is to try to meet folks where they’re at and also come with an open mind as to what I might learn. I think there’s a tendency, especially among the white Left, to zoom in on the organizers or just everyday people trying to make their communities better, and think that they’re not demanding a certain thing because they don’t get it conceptually. However, I don’t think that has been the case in my experience.

I was a financial regulator after law school. Then, I was a direct services attorney for three years. I worked in an organization in New York where we had a financial justice hotline where folks who were experiencing problems with debt collectors, landlords, or credit bureaus, problems of financial nature, could pick up the phone and call and ask for help in English, Spanish, and sometimes Mandarin. What I remember is that people on the ground have an extremely sophisticated view of money. I remember that from my community, my family, and from other folks. Because that was brainwashed out of me by neoliberal economics, which forces MMT into a position where it’s explaining things that strike people as really jargony and aren’t always articulated in an inclusive register despite the great work that a lot of us have done here and despite the great work that Stephanie Kelton has done, etc.

And so, I think that poor folks across the board, they’re used to making money to pay off loans. They understand where every penny has gone. In my experience, when you talk to people about the public nature of money, even not necessarily MMT, but whether it be public banking, complementary currencies, or another kind of economic development initiative, people actually get it. It’s no more counterintuitive than the premises of Orthodox economics, which are like, assume there is an apple and two white guys on an island and they’re redistributing the apple back and forth, and there’s no society. This is not a good model for analysis in the social sciences, as we can go on and on about.

What I try to do when I engage with folks on the ground, which is maybe a little bit different from when I engage with critical race theorists who have a different jargon problem, is that I tell folks I think you know that money is a public thing, that money is a government thing, and look at how the system is jacked in all these different ways. And people get that. Academics sometimes have a little bit more trouble, partially because they’re locked into the tropes of their own interlocutors, for which I don’t blame academics of color at all. Nor am I here to say that I have all the answers. But I do think that when you massage, interrogate, or just get in conversation with a lot of things that critical race theorists say, for instance, the assumptions are there, and they just need to be teased out.

For instance, there are tons of critical tax scholars who have talked about the ways in which white taxpayers do not necessarily see taxpayers of colors as part of the same social class. And yet when it comes to the macroeconomics or political economy, we still find the tropes of taxpayer money, of the deserving benefit recipients, as Angela Harris at UC Davis says–and that’s to credit Professor Harris on bringing in MMT and interrogating it in a very constructive way compared to some other theorists. So, I think the seeds of thinking about money, more critically, are already in a lot of critical race theory. From my understanding of feminist legal theory, they’re also there as well. What needs to happen is an evolution in the bridging more so than necessarily a course correction, if that makes sense.

Scott Ferguson: I really appreciate that. I’ll say in my own experience just talking to folks in my own community, they tend to have an easier time than a lot of academics I know who I try to talk to about it. Because they can begin with like, “Oh, yeah. Money comes from the government. I guess that makes sense.”

Raúl Carrillo: Yeah, I mean property comes from the government. Whether a contract is a contract is something that comes from the government. All of these basic things that construct our society that economists want to say are brought from the market or whatever it may be, once those people take a minute, they get it. So why would money be so much different than all these other things that leftists and social movements interrogate every day?

Scott Ferguson: Absolutely.

William Saas: Let’s stick with taxpayer money for just a little bit. This is an area that you’ve consistently set your critical sights on, talking about the political and legal construction of the taxpayer as a racialized and racist identity. Recently you published about this in the UCLA Criminal Justice Law Review. Before you published something in Splinter Magazine with Jesse Myerson, called “The Dangerous Myth of Taxpayer Money,” which, by the way, I’ve found to be a very useful article to use in the classroom, so thank you for that. Could you walk us through your argument here and while we’re also on the subject of reception, maybe reflect a bit about how people intuitively understand the publicity of money? Is it the same case with the taxpayer money versus public money argument?

Raúl Carrillo: Yeah, excellent bundle of questions that I really think is particularly important and I’m happy to talk about this right now because of the moment that we’re all experiencing with the uprising and all the very courageous movements shaking what’s going on around the country. This figure, the legal and cultural figure of the taxpayer, is very central to the creation of mass incarceration, the policing system, and the general security apparatus that protects private property. This is obviously not just my insight. My friend, David Stein, the very first guest of Money on the Left, will tell you that. Virginia Eubanks, a scholar of surveillance, will tell you that as well. And many, many, many other people will. It’s no secret that in the United States taxpayer forces have often been reactionary.

I think the best encapsulation of this vision that I’ve come across thus far is the book Racial Taxation by the legal historian, Camille Walsh at the University of Washington. Dr. Walsh has done us all a great service by actually going back into court doctrine, digging into archives and letters between supreme court justices, and finding out the extent to which the figure of the taxpayer, taxpayer money, or taxpayer rights in terms of taxpayer citizenship, is central to the story of the failure of the liberal vision of integration in this country. One reason for that is in order to prevent schools from being segregated, a lot of reactionary forces just reverted to the cultural primacy in the United States of the idea of the taxpayer, of protecting taxpayer funds, and having local fiscal control over that which we consider to be critical to society or to social reproduction.

Just to give a little bit of background on Walsh’s book because my work wouldn’t exist at all without it, Jesse and I wrote this Splinter Magazine piece a year before Dr. Walsh’s book came out, but her book absolutely fundamentally changed the game. Dr. Walsh tells the story of racial liberalism of the Warren court just as much as she tells a story about taxpayer money. For Dr. Walsh, the attempt by the judiciary during the 50s and 60s to not integrate analysis of identity with analysis of economics, as you all discuss frequently, resulted in the material failure to integrate schooling and eventually led to a loss in the journey of Chicano civil rights activists, children, families, and educators in South Texas to achieve equal funding at schools. Essentially, our team in this lawsuit, which was called San Antonio vs. Rodriguez and heard in 1976, had folks who were Mexican-American in Chicano schools alleging that their fundamental constitutional right to education was being violated by local property financing, or a predatory property tax financing scheme.

To an MMTer, of course, that makes intuitive sense. Like if something is supposed to be a right, or something is supposed to be of critical importance, then why is it not supported by the power of the public purse? Essentially, they were saying, we do not have equal schooling because we do not have equal funding, and thus our rights are being violated. What happened in that case, as Dr. Walsh outlines, is extremely interesting and important. Justice Powell, who was formally the superintendent of a local school board back home, turns out is extremely interested in this case and is having back and forths with representatives, taxpayer associations, and other reactionary folks. His ruling eventually stands on the idea of taxpayer money, saying it may be true that under some state constitutions, or perhaps even under the federal constitution, there is a right to education, but that doesn’t trump taxpayer rights.

That’s not exactly the whole thing but that’s what’s important for this conversation. It’s no lie to say that the federal fundamental right to education died at the feet of the taxpayer money trope. And in our fight for new rights now, that is extremely, extremely important. I hope we can discuss that in a little bit but I would like to circle back to this UCLA article and the abolitionist moment in general. So right now, we are seeing calls to defund the police, which while it can be perceived as an abolitionist demand, is not necessarily as I understand it from folks like the organizer, Mariame Kaba. Of course, the question is, after you defund police, what do you fund? What do you invest in and at what level? And other folks are doing great, great work in this area.

My friend and fellow MMT traveler, the sociologist Tamara Nopper, wrote an interesting article in Jacobin a couple of weeks ago, talking about how the defund demand is an evolution in and of itself that should be lauded, and I absolutely agree. Back after the Rodney King beatings and what went down in LA afterwards, a lot of folks bought the idea of minority owned business development and corporate investment and it’s taken a long time to get to the defund movement. Now, the question is: what sort of funding for the nurturing world, for the actually safe world, do we want? I think that fundamentally has to be federal, as any MMTer will tell you for technical reasons. But it also has to be federal for political reasons. And in no small part, it’s to avoid this mess of the myth of taxpayer money.

So the myth of taxpayer money essentially says, whether folks want to admit it or not, the more that you pay in taxes, the more of a damn voice you have in society. There’s this liberal idea that we are all a monolithic taxpayer class and because I pay sales taxes on things, I have a lot in common with someone who pays a lot of capital gains taxes. And I just fundamentally don’t think that’s true. Dr. Walsh’s work makes it abundantly clear that that’s not true. When we think about taxpayers to be extended to social class at all, it’s extremely stratified, it’s racialized, it’s gendered, it’s sliced up, and it’s diced up. People don’t look necessarily horizontally at each other as peer taxpayers. In fact, taxpayer money–this idea that you’re entitled to more because you are a taxpayer rather than a citizen or a human or any other kind of subject–is replete within right wing movements.

It’s obviously essential to the Tea Party, but it’s also essential to the Charlottesville torch bearers and every other white supremacist force in this country. And it’s not just the United States to be clear, even though that’s where we’re situating this conversation. There’s a fiscal sociologist at the University of Alberta named Kyle Willmot, whose work I have been recently diving into, who is a scholar of indigenous taxpayer identity, but is also just investigating the global role of taxpayer associations generally. He finds that taxpayer associations serve a particular role within neoliberalism and within crafting subjectivity, in encouraging people to bound their government and see it as a resource extractor rather than a resource generator, which I think is something that’s very familiar to all of us. I should take here to note that Dr. Wilmont, like Dr. Walsh, takes care to note that taxpayer identity doesn’t necessarily have to be reactionary. It’s in some ways a mercenary concept as they say, but it has been wielded, I think, irredeemably by the right in this country. Although, I know folks have done other work about that, and I’m happy to discuss the ways in which perhaps you all see where it’s recoverable.

But that’s pretty much where I’m at at this point. The UCLA article, which is really more of a short reflection piece, complicates the taxpayer identity within the movement to end monetary sanctions. What I’d be welcoming or open to doing here is having a more integrated and more detailed conversation about the role of taxpayer identity and whether it’s recoverable or not. Maxx, I know you have thoughts on that and I’m sure that other people have thoughts on that, but I don’t want to push it too hard.

Maxximilian Seijo: No, that’s cool. I think Billy has also done some thinking about this. So I can defer to Billy first if he’d like.

William Saas: I think this is more about your work but I really appreciate you opening up space for it. Maybe one of the things I was trying to get to in a roundabout way was talking about reception. I think that’s one of my ways of thinking about whether or not it’s recoverable. It strikes me that even though it is, and I agree with you, probably irredeemable, the taxpayer identity that looms large in all the ways that you’ve identified is also super firmly ingrained and even mobilized by people with good intentions frequently. I know currently we’re talking about cutting university budgets and things like that and the taxpayer trope is showing up. I wonder if you might offer some advice for somebody who is concerned about that long insidious history that you’ve outlined for us, and that Dr. Walsh outlines well in her book, how to, with compassion and respect, offer an alternative? I guess maybe the answer is in the question there, but how do you present this to people humbly and how is it received?

Raúl Carrillo: Sure. This is a great set of questions, Billy. I do spend a good deal of time sort of just shouting to stop saying taxpayer money and say public money instead.

Scott Ferguson: Yeah, so do we.

Raúl Carrillo: Haha, as many of us do. But I think that there’s not a monolithic answer. It is different strokes for different folks. The first question you have to ask is: what are folks using the trope to try to achieve? To give a basic example of one end of the spectrum, if folks are arguing for racial or gender equity literally as taxpayers, like as they’re filing their tax returns, for instance, then that’s not necessarily a frame within which to inject this whole argument. It’s not gonna be as successful. But of course if we’re talking at the federal level, then it’s a lot easier. I think folks are starting to understand that all the money that the Fed is lending out is not taxpayer money. How could it be taxpayer money? We’re all broke right now so how does that make sense? Also, and this weaves into the pertinent questions regarding the UCLA article and the protest, what happens when people feel a sense of injustice as taxpayers, especially at the local level? Lots of folks have argued against incarceration, against utility gouging, against all sorts of things as taxpayers, and they are clearly not right wingers. I have some thoughts as to why this is strategically still unhelpful for us, but I want to pause here because I think that you’ve identified an essential question for this project and for all of us. Given that we pretty strongly think what we think and believe what we believe–and other folks do as well–how do we form a bridge here for people who are very interested in economic justice and social justice?

Maxximilian Seijo: I really like this conversation because it’s an open one that still necessarily insists on some hard values. We’re explicitly thinking critically about the historical and contextual framings that are within this concept of the taxpayer identity that you so well draw together out of some important scholarship. I’ve thought about this in the past and what strikes me is as interesting about the question of public money versus taxpayer money, is that it seems to be about framing, ultimately, because if you’re thinking with public money, there are, of course, operations of taxation inside of the public money framework, inside the fiscal-tax circuit, and many different ways of thinking about that. But it also seems what’s crucially important for synthesizing what has been said already is how one rhetorically frames one’s claim to being accounted for by governance, or another version of some democratic claim on fiscal authority? The taxpayer identity is a problem because it refracts an exclusive vision rather than an inclusive one, which is what the public money vision conversely offers. And so, it’s not that taxpayers aren’t inside a public money framework. It’s precisely that in foregrounding what taxation actually is, what it actually does, the taxpayer is resituated within an inclusive structure of claims on democratic governance and accountability. It seems like that’s what’s at stake in these questions, and I’d be curious to hear your reflection on it.

Raúl Carrillo: Damn homie, I agree with all of that. The problem is that, right now, taxpayer money is the encompassing frame. It’s the bounding frame. And there are claims for equity and justice or revolution that could be made by taxpayers within a public money frame. For me, the more immediate question is, what do we do given how not only exclusive the concept has become in the United States, but how stratified it is? It’s not just that taxpayers, and people who primarily identify as taxpayers, don’t see black and brown taxpayers as taxpayers in the same way that they are. It’s also because of what a progressive taxation structure is, because people pay different amounts of taxes and are in different tax brackets which also quantifies the concept. I would also say it corporatizes the concept. In other words, you become more like a shareholder and less like a rights holder, if that makes sense? Your claim isn’t as a political subject; your claim is as a fiscal contributor. And it’s not an economic contributor in general, to go back to your previous point, much less a social contributor or just a general contributor to the public. It’s about how much dough did you cough up for the taxman when it came around, because that’s the only kind of public finance we understand.

It’s so twisted in the United States that we call all sorts of monetary sanctions that aren’t taxes, but should be thought of as taxes, as not taxes. Fines and fees, court restitution, student loan debt, and all of these sorts of sanctions that are levied on various people throughout the economy aren’t even encompassed within the taxpayer money framework. And that becomes especially problematic when we’re talking about somewhere like Ferguson, Missouri, which is an open air debtors prison, because the local taxpayers association has destroyed the municipalities ability to raise property taxes. In fact, now they run on fine and fee money. The concept is exclusive, as you were saying in the contemporary American context, but it’s also stratified. It sets people at each other’s throats in a way that it doesn’t have to. Even if you just want to highlight everyone as a member of the economy as well as a society, there are many other categories that we can use to describe people. Public money, I think, is one of the broader ones.

William Saas: A critical difference between public money and taxpayer money that I’ve thought about is that the taxpayer identity is something that individuals can latch on to and identify as and then identify themselves as part of a collective and join a taxpayer association, for example, whereas public money is a bit more abstract, and like you say, there are a lot of different categories that we can identify. But there also doesn’t seem to be something that has such a strong rhetorical cachet as “taxpayer” that’s readily available. And maybe that’s an important part of that bridge work you were gesturing towards before.

Raúl Carrillo: Yeah, I think that’s another excellent point. Perhaps we still are on a quest for embeddedness and we’ll find other terms that create individual connection as well as making the points that we make–that money is public at the end of the day in terms of its origin, in terms of its generation, in terms of the source of the enforcement and patrolling of its use that occurs throughout the society, the legal system, and that scaffold. I like public money because for the same reasons, I like public schools still, for instance. But it does not accomplish that yet, or perhaps isn’t capable of accomplishing that connection yet. No term is perfect.

Scott Ferguson: Yeah, I think one other great term other than public money is the framing that Delman Coates is running with, which is “Our Money.” Another way of putting it is this is collective money. This relationship already belongs to us. But yeah, we need to be turning it in other kinds of directions

Raúl Carrillo: Yeah, “Our Money” establishes a social claim while avoiding the abstract term public. And I just said public schools, I like public schools, but a lot of people don’t like their public schools. A lot of people don’t like their public assistance, a lot of people don’t like public public X, public Y, or public Z. So yeah, I’m very here for “Our Money” as a board member and frequent collaborator with Dr. Coates.

Scott Ferguson: Thanks, maybe we can shift gears here. One of the things that you’ve influenced me a lot on is the important but also tricky question about a “politics of rights.” And so, I was wondering if you could lay out why a “politics of rights” really matters? How do you conceive of rights? What’s a bad way to conceive of rights? And what’s the necessary way to fight for certain rights?

Raúl Carrillo: Thank you, Scott. So this is the conversation that is going to make everyone hate me. I swear my whole vibe is synthesizing different intellectual traditions and trying to get them to talk to each other, but this is one area in which I think building a bridge, for instance, between the legal Left and Left economists requires a lot of folks to give up their premises. I know that’s a bold claim but I’m here to back it up and have some scholarship coming out about this in the fall.

So if you were to ask the most lefty lawyers right now whether we should be fighting for rights, I think that a great deal of them would say: “Screw rights, what have rights ever gotten us, rights are abstract and indeterminant.”

Maximilian Seijo: They’re Superstructure.

Raúl Carrillo: Haha, they’re slippery; too slippery to fight for. They’re liberal proceduralist stuff. They’re utterly epiphenomenal. I heard about that on another podcast; everyone listen to Superstructure with Maxx and Will Beaman. Anyways, so a lot of the legal left, and about 60% of those people live in Brooklyn, will tell you that. And I don’t mean that in a good way. It’s not a care-based Marxist approach to the law. It’s one that is predominantly held by white folks. The back and forth within the left legal academy about rights is often really split along racialized lines, as well as gendered lines, to say nothing of comparative constitutional law debates, etc. I’m trying not to be too crass about it, but I see this dynamic reproduced amongst lawyers my age. Just to give some brief background, in the 80s, professor Mark Tushnet, whose work I love, wrote an essay called “The Critique of Rights,” which pretty much outlines what I just said–rights are too slippery, too shallow, and too vague to actually achieve. And it was pretty compelling. I have felt persuaded by that argument at times. This argument was replicated in terms of its ethos with respect to property and contracts throughout this school of thought.

And then what happened is a legal scholar by the name of Patricia Williams, who is a critical race theorist as well as someone who engages in a wide variety of spheres, wrote a book called The Alchemy of Race and Rights. To paraphrase another critical feminist legal scholar, Robin West, I believe she characterized it as unwittingly eviscerating Tushnet’s essay. What Professor Williams said is, yes, rights can be all of those things, but rights are the only thing that has ever achieved a damn thing for marginalized and oppressed people in this country. And that wasn’t to say that there isn’t a generative force or power within, for instance, striking or any other sort of real political activity, but that the rights were also a necessary component of achieving any modicum of justice, much less equality for especially folks of color. That is the perspective that I have pretty much adopted. I think that there are good points made within this debate over the last few decades, on all sides that are really, really important and outstanding, but one thing that this whole sphere of discourse suffers from is an utter reliance on the premises of orthodox economics and also the trope of taxpayer money.

Scott Ferguson: So can you talk about some of your work on specific rights, like rights around our collective work on the job guarantee or a right to a job?

Raúl Carrillo: Absolutely. Most of my work on this has been presentations and other things, but this fall some of this stuff is going to start to see the light of day. For instance, there’s an essay coming out in a book called, Tipping Points in International Law, about the state of international labor law and labor generally. What I try to accomplish in this essay, drawing on the work of some of the people that I’ve just discussed as well as various other legal scholars and economists in the broader MMT and critical money world, is to say that, one, the job guarantee should be pushed through international law, which is messy, difficult and aspirational. But also international labor law, and specifically human rights law, is totally underpinned by a vision of austerity. One sort of expects that is this point now given that the Bretton Woods institutions are thoroughly neoliberalized, but a lot of the covenants in the international human rights law, for instance, are basically trying NAIRU or even something akin to NAWRU, the non-accelerating wage rate of unemployment, which they use in Europe because they don’t like to hide the ball.

There’s this sort of problem that MMT comes at about the public nature of money, which you’d think a lot of otherwise extremely incisive legal scholars would be aware of or dig a little, it plagues the very idea that there is a human right to work, which is something that is promoted by, of course, the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, but also the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, as well as CEDAW, the new treaty on international women’s rights, and all these sorts of other canonical documents from international law. And this myth is, of course, replicated in various national constitutions and labor laws across the globe, but it’s presence in international law is truly staggering. And of course, there’s no global body to coordinate fiscal policy or anything like that. In placing membership mandates on the members of these covenants, it’s utterly, utterly orthodox, and in a way that it’s damaging to any future for these places.

Maxximilian Seijo: This totally connects up to the recent Democratic primary and some of the questions around candidates’ different plans for an internationalist vision not only for climate change mitigation with the Green New Deal, but as a new way to think about how we address things like trade or other global questions of political economy. The vision that you seem to be offering here is one that takes all of the planet into account and doesn’t then seek to fracture, like perhaps Elizabeth Warren’s plan for a Green New Deal with an American first base approach to what one could call “rights,” into a more nationalist approach to addressing these international questions. And that’s a sort of mosaic, but perhaps you could reflect upon what your vision of a more internationalist framework for rights in relationship to employment means for the Green New Deal?

Raúl Carrillo: Sure thing. Perhaps this should have been the preface before talking about this book chapter. I’m not under any illusion that liberal internationalism is going to save us. That being said, I do believe that there is a more social democratic form of international human rights that is available. That’s a bit of a contentious thing to say in the legal discourse at this point, but that’s because I’m an MMTer. I think that a lot of the reasons that rights are abstract and indeterminant, vague and slippery, are fiscal and administrative. The person I owe extreme debt to here is Phil Harvey at Rutgers University. Phil has been a scholar of, as he says, the law and economics of the right to work–I would say the law and political economy of the right to work–for about 30 years. And Phil began his journey by investigating human rights law, but also investigating the transmission of some New Deal insights into international law via the United Nations Foundation and the creation of these various covenants. Phil mapped how FDR’s “Four Freedoms” were eventually transported to Geneva and became the basis of a lot of second generation of rights that actually is enshrined in international law but that we do not have in any real way in the United States.

Phil pointed out that, amongst other problems, the issue here is that the bills, the actual legislation for direct job creation, caps things at inappropriate levels. It creates no clear maps for courts to follow when they’re trying to determine if the government should try to redress a violation of a right to work and all these sorts of other operational and administrative problems. Now, Phil’s not an MMTer. And in fact, professor Harvey and I disagree on how the job guarantee should ultimately be financed, for instance. But he did make this point that this connection between public finance and rights has to be totally revisited. My contention is that if they’re fundamental rights, then they demand blank checks in the same way that the Pentagon does with their atrocious demands without anybody batting an eye. I mean, we bat an eye over here on the left, and the liberals do too, but it never really changes. Speaker Pelosi shepherds in Trump’s military bill. And the reason for this is not just that I am an MMTer. It is that the resiliency and stability of rights enforcement depends upon full funding and service.

Dr. Harvey said the distinction between a job guarantee and direct job creation is that enforceability is the individual right. And there’s an allergy to judicial enforceability of rights on the Left, because we don’t trust the courts, and that’s understandable, but Dr. Harvey empirically showed that if you have clear tests for what’s supposed to happen, for instance, when someone can no longer work in a particular job or there’s an ecological problem within that job site, what’s supposed to happen in terms of redress, is the courts are more willing to follow these sort of rubrics. Yet, the missing piece is, again, the funding. The funding has to be open ended if it’s to be a fundamental right. And that doesn’t mean that everyone’s going to flood the job guarantee all of a sudden, because you still have to want to do that type of work with that wage level and benefits. But if people can’t gain redress if they’re kicked out of the job guarantee program or not allowed in because of their race, gender, sexual orientation, or whatever it may be, then the rights aren’t real. You need something like an MMT vision to ballast anything like a social democratic or Green New Deal vision of rights.

If you bound them to a pot of money, a trust fund, or tether it to attacks, and God forbid attacks on your enemies, then you’re gonna run out of money. Not in the grand sense, but you’re going to run out of money in the administrative sense and the program is going to fail. People are gonna hate it. If the job guarantee can’t consistently hire people to produce things in the public eye so that people are perceived as successful, then it’s not going to take off as a political enterprise. And the Green New Deal doesn’t just include the job guarantee; it also includes a housing guarantee, an education guarantee, and a healthcare guarantee. So we’ve got four rights we need to fund. I think we need to be just as voracious and as fucking loud as the right wingers when it comes to providing the resources and the structure that we need to create and reproduce anything like a just society.

Scott Ferguson: Beautifully put. And this actually recalls a slogan that I came up with last year that I actually haven’t thought about in a while which is: “Inalienable rights require inalienable money.”

Raúl Carrillo: Exactly, Scott. I think yours is better, haha.

Scott Ferguson: Yours is the explanation, mine’s just the sign you hang out front.

William Saas: We’ve talked a bit about your work across various important fields. I wanted to wind us down by letting you talk a little bit about the advocacy that you’ve been up to recently on the hill, and to include things like your critique and commentary on the Libra Facebook currency and anything else you might like to talk to talk about.

Raúl Carrillo: Thanks, Billy. For about 10 months now, I have been working with a consortium of labor groups, consumer advocates, financial reform advocates, antisurveillance advocates, digital rights advocates, antitrust advocates, and various other folks on a progressive left response to what’s going on in financial technology. I know y’all have had Rohan and various other techie people on here before. My role is not really as an engineer, but as an architect. I get to break shit. I get to say when things shouldn’t be allowed to exist as they’re proposed based on various bodies of financial regulation, law, privacy, etc. That’s what I’ve been up to for roughly the last year and we’ll be continuing to do for the foreseeable future. To connect it to our discussion, I’ll tell you that in my work around the hill with all these advocates, the MMT perspective has actually been essential. Because what’s happening right now in the financial technology or #FinTech sector, is what we can loosely call the automation of finance, to quote Brett Scott.

But it’s also much bigger than that. What we’re seeing is Silicon Valley starting to exercise monetary power and vie for monetary agency in a way that mostly banks have done previously. And because they’re not banks legally, they get away with a lot of shit. This is predation in the same way as Wall Street targeting certain people to bring into a shadow financial system is. But I would argue, in terms of magnitude, it is more scary because of surveillance. Because the way that the internet works is that it takes our data, or on some occasions, it creates data about us in ways that are punitive. And so, all these big tech companies are starting to move into the financial services space, and particularly into the payment space. And the reason for that is that it’s the next data frontier. Right now, Facebook knows what you like and it has the content of your communications with people who are near and dear to you in your life. It doesn’t necessarily know what you want or what you would spend money on beyond what you like and the ads you click on, etc. Despite the existence of various thin legal firewalls and a few technological firewalls, they want the payments data and your social media data and also they know more about you so they can sell you another goddamn ad, but also so that they can increase their general economic and political power.

And the worst example of this is something called the Facebook Libra project, which as I argue in something called “The Libra Black Paper” that was created with the Americans for Financial Reform in Education Fund and the Demand Progress for Education Fund, is they’re creating a combination shadow banking system and local financial surveillance tracking. The money is going to serve as the basis for broader financial infrastructure, as every MMTer knows. That’s the goal. If you want to create power, mimic the ways of the sovereign. But also the goal is to watch how you move the money. Now, banks already do this to a far greater extent than most people are aware of. But their business model is not selling that data or sharing it as Facebook will do. And so, what we’re seeing is a giant collision between Silicon Valley and Wall Street. It also includes all these ticky tacky startups, which can be predatory and dangerously exploitative in their own way. But we’re seeing Amazon, Facebook, Google, and Apple, not to mention a bunch of larger companies in China, who are entering the monetary realm. And in the United States it’s particularly troubling because we don’t have any fucking privacy law.

This is another instance in which folks think they have rights, but they’re like consenting in a boilerplate contract to having your face analyzed. And otherwise, you don’t get to use the service and sometimes it’s “opt out.” No one gets punished to the extent that they should. I might be exaggerating a little bit, but not too much. We’re seeing, as of now, an utterly unregulated, wild west, unnecessarily imperialist Silicon Valley start to do some of the things Wall Street did with the added layer of surveillance, which also connects to state surveillance because the NSA and other organizations, as Edward Snowden showed us, have a backdoor into Facebook’s facial recognition database of protesters, for instance, where people who aren’t following the rules about pandemic guidelines are targeted. So sorry to ruin your day but that’s what I’ve been working on.

Another thing I haven’t really touched on is the color of surveillance and fitting that within the racialized predation framework I talked about earlier. Again, the Facebook Libra project is basically a combo of financial extraction and data extraction. But it’s hard to really overstate the ambition here. When this project started, it was sort of just a middle finger to regulators and policy makers generally. And my sort of personal thesis is that Facebook was doing this because that’s just how it roles. The old slogan is “move fast, break things” regardless of whether they’re laws, apparently. 

And so, the idea is to create these coins which are called stable coins. As opposed to unstable coins like Bitcoin, they’re supposed to maintain value as a medium of payment across various jurisdictions and economies across the globe. And for now, it’s just these coins. And then Facebook gets to create a digital wallet that people use for transactions which collects its own data, etc. The whole thing is actually not technically a Facebook enterprise because they’ve taken great pains to shield themselves from liability by creating an association in Geneva, Switzerland, which is of course famous for its very strong banking laws. And it has this nonprofit techie altruistic clause, which is fundamentally neoliberal. It says we’re going to create a payment method, and eventually a whole financial infrastructure, including lending, credit scoring, and all kinds of things. It is going to bank the unbanked, not just in the United States and Europe, but across the world and perhaps especially in the global south. That was the message that came out. 

In fact, in September of 2019, the CEO Facebook’s Libra enterprise, a guy named David Marcus, boasted that “Libra is going to allow the free world of Western nations to preserve the influence that, in my opinion, is necessary to maintain a good balance in the world.” It’s not difficult to just call this an imperial grab, right? And the way they’re going about this is equivalent to monetary primitive accumulation, as Mat Forstater in the MMT world describes it. They are defining what the method of payment is. The idea is that maybe it’s not accepted as taxes right away, but it’s needed for various other services if you’re interested in quick payments or if you’re interested in digital payments at all. There’s a socio-legal necessity that’s there given a weak infrastructure in the financial sectors of some economies around the world. And so, the data grab doesn’t work unless you get the currency grab. It’s currency substitution. The idea is instead of dollar-izing these economies, you Libra-ize them, and then you can Hoover up data as well. And maybe folks don’t have IDs in a certain country. In that case, what they’ll do is allow them to use their Facebook profile and a facial, retinal, or fingerprint scan, and all kinds of other things to get into the banking system. And they have all these sort of nasty techtopian plans.

Of course, the casting is altruistic because if you’ve ever been in the unfortunate spot of being next to a finance bro at a bar, you know that they know they’re jerks. But Silicon Valley people think they’re good still. They see this really as a civilizing force throughout the world. And so, it’s fundamentally an imperialist enterprise in many ways. Why in the world would anyone who cares about any sort of justice at all allow this to happen? No one asked Facebook to do this. What is it going to mean if folks like Dr. Sylla, who is fighting against the CFA Franc in Senegal, have to contend with the internet trying to beam in and take away its monetary sovereignty even after they’re successful against Macron? How is that supposed to be good for anybody for any of the things that we believe in? But yeah, Iza Kaminska at the Financial Times has called this “imperialism by stealth.” It’s just as naked when you look at the facts, but it’s coated in this California ideology gloss.

Scott Ferguson: Yeah, it also reminds me, to bring this back to the Fed, that recently Jerome Powell is on record weighing the idea of public Fed banking and banking all the unbanked, which is what this California ideology in Silicon Valley is purportedly wanting to do. What is his answer? Oh, no, no, that’s a terrible idea. The private sector will hate it.

Raúl Carrillo: I’m glad you brought this up because the war on cash isn’t just the war on cash, or the gentrification of payments, as Brett Scott calls it. As our colleague Rohan Grey says, it’s a fight for the soul of the future of digital money. It’s becoming pretty clear that the monetary system is going to become increasingly digitized. Obviously, most money is digitized. Most of the layperson MMT metaphors get it that money is increasingly keyboard strokes, digital electrons, etc. But really what we mean by this is the decreasing presence of cash as a form of money and therefore of privacy in many ways. The innovative work that’s being done around money as private cash in the digital world is mostly being done by people I have a lot of respect for, but they are not interested in a public money framework. These folks are interested in private-private money; they’re not interested in private-public money. That really is what’s going on here. There’s this conversation about creating essentially digital bank currency systems, some people call it the digital dollar, that really involves the core of this debate. And I just want to make clear that I absolutely support bank accounts for all, basic financial services for all. I don’t think that’s a neoliberal idea. I think that’s necessary.

The issue, of course, is when private credit or lending becomes the purported vehicle for curing poverty. That gets predatory real, real quick. It gets extra predatory with FinTech because, again, we’re not just talking about potentially outrageous interest rates. We’re talking about the data. We’re talking about increasingly building a scored society, as Dr. Nopper and also law Professor Frank Pasquale have both written about. These apps, as Dr. Nopper says, analyze one’s digital character. They create an image of you which has been shared, probably not just within the financial world, but within a whole sphere of industries that now rely on data collection. And finance becomes another gateway by which corporate tycoons gain more and more information about people. But it’s not just the ads and the antitrust violations. It’s the insane surveillance that crosses over to state surveillance.

Because again, the government is usually just one subpoena away from getting this information. It requires these big tech companies, in something called the Upstream Program for the NSA, to release certain kinds of data that includes the contents of communications, including your texts, for instance. And this becomes especially dangerous when you consider the color of surveillance. A lot of these FinTech products are marketed specifically to communities of color and other marginalized folks because they are folks who are more likely to not have a traditional bank account or to be excluded from the “mainstream system.” And I would argue that this is predatory. And it’s not just predatory because of the financial extraction, which is bad enough, but it’s predatory because you are jeopardizing the health and safety of people of color in a white supremacist state that is running absolutely bonkers right now.

We know that these companies have to fork over data to federal law enforcement and some of them willingly fork over data to local law enforcement. That’s what Amazon Ring is–in order to protect the white suburbs, protect their property and their goddamn taxpayer money from super predators in the embryonic criminal class, as Khiara Bridges would say. You have to create more surveillance. Workers must be watched, delivery people must be watched, people who borrow money must be watched. Amazon has this camera that says what’s up to anybody who comes up, and then that goes to the cops. And so, what happens if a delivery worker is also a protester? What happens then? And even outside of the protest context, surveillance is the norm for black folks in the context of public assistance and predatory debt. And it’s the case for many, many other people, including Muslims, for instance, and anyone who’s considered to be a threat to the Trump administration. So this whole FinTech enterprise needs to be chilled. Everybody needs to cool it. I understand that lots of folks are into financial innovation, and I would welcome their skills at blockchain or whatever it may be within the public sector. Because if the goal really is to include people, MMTers know what the right organ is for that. I think in order to push back against predation, we have to empower public money for public power in myriad ways, and not just as it is a monetary enterprise narrowly, but as it is a social one broadly.

Maxximilian Seijo: That’s sort of exciting and depressing in its own way as you suggested. But I think with that, I just wanted to say what a pleasure it’s been Raúl to have you on Money on the Left finally after all of these episodes. I think this is episode 28 now. Yeah, it’s really been such a pleasure. We are really happy to keep having these conversations and keep making this show in ways that highlight the certain things that we’re all doing as well as bringing others into the fold. And this very much fits into the former of those two things. It’s been great. Thanks so much.

Raúl Carrillo: Thanks, Maxx. It was a real pleasure to finally jump on here. Hope to return fairly soon and I will be listening to every episode. Y’all keep on truckin’.

* Thanks to the Money on the Left production team Richard Farrell (transcription) & Meghan Saas (graphic art).

Criticism LTD w/ Matt Seybold

Matt Seybold joins Rob Hawkes and Scott Ferguson to discuss the political economy of literary criticism from past to present, amateur to professional. Seybold is Associate Professor of American Literature at Elmira College and Resident Scholar at the Center for Mark Twain Studies. In addition to writing and teaching in the field of literature & economics, Seybold produces and hosts The American Vandal podcast, an ever-growing collection of conversations and presentations about literature, humor, and history in America that is inspired by Mark Twain’s life and legacy. 

Our conservation focuses, in particular, on The American Vandal’s magisterial eighth series titled, “Criticism LTD.” With 16 episodes totaling 24-hours of listening, “Criticism LTD” marshals a diverse cast of over 50 voices to provide fresh perspectives on the origins & trajectories of literary criticism and the so-called “crisis of humanities.” Episodes take on a wide range of topics, including: the marked contrast between today’s “golden age of criticism” (Ryan Ruby) in amateur and para-academic venues and the “Ponzi Austerity” (Yanis Varoufakis) and “Ed-Tech Griftopia” (Seybold) undermining contemporary academic research and instruction; the mid-20th-century trouncing of the neo-Aristotelian Chicago School Critics by the neoliberal Chicago School Economists; how the ugly politics of race, class, gender, and colonialism have both informed and met resist in practices of close reading; and the importance of the 19th-century feud over literary criticism between Matthew Arnold and Mark Twain for imaginatively contesting imperialism, then and now. “Criticism LTD” has much to offer teachers, researchers, organizers, and creators interested in building a more humane, collaborative, and democratic education system in the shell of the old.

Visit our Patreon page here: https://www.patreon.com/MoLsuperstructure

Music by Nahneen Kula: www.nahneenkula.com

Transcript

The following was transcribed by Mike Lewis and has been lightly edited for clarity.

Scott Ferguson: Matt Seybold, welcome to Money on the Left.

Matt Seybold: It’s very good to be here. Thank you for having me.

Scott Ferguson: We’ve invited you onto the show this month, because we were extremely impressed and very grateful for your work on the American Vandal podcast. In particular, this season of the American Vandal podcast, which you’re calling “Criticism LTD”. This episode is largely dedicated to an exploration of this season, and we’ll get into why it’s so interesting and why it’s worthy of our discussion. But just to start us off, perhaps you can introduce yourself to our listeners by talking a little bit about your background, your training, your interests, and maybe some of your academic and pedagogical work in literary humanities on the one hand, and economics on the other?

Matt Seybold: My official title or titles is I am an Associate Professor of American Literature in Mark Twain Studies at Elmira College. Elmira College is home of the Center for Mark Twain Studies. So my primary service role at the college is as the resident scholar at the Center for Mark Twain studies, where American Vandal is the Center from Mark Twain Studies’ podcast. We have a website, we have a host of both online and in person programming. We welcome about a dozen visiting fellows every year or so. I participate in all of that in various ways. So a big part of my job revolves around the Center for Mark Twain Studies. I came to Twain Studies, however. I was trained in 19th century American literature, that was my primary specialization as a graduate student at University of California, Irvine. But my methodological specialization that I was developing while I was there, sometimes called literature and economics, sometimes called critical finance studies, cultural economy, economic humanities, back in the day called new economic criticism. I was there during the 2008 crisis, and definitely part of a community of scholars who I think were really formed in literary studies by that event. Along with one of my classmates at UCI, Michelle Chihara, we edited the first major companion to that subfield, the Routledge Companion to Literature and Economics. That interest in the history of political economy and the political economy of mass media has informed all of my scholarship, although not always in obvious ways. It’s really what brought me into Twain Studies as well. I see Twain primarily as a political economist and a media theorist, as well as, of course, a novelist and humorist. What excited me about him was how invested he was how informed he was about this period that’s really important to the history of economic thought, the neoclassical period and then the Gilded Age globalization that’s happening concurrent with that. That’s how I got to Twain Studies, and then once I was at the Center for Mark Twain Studies, I always am trying to come back to how media and specifically literature intersects with finance and economics.

Scott Ferguson: That is great. In some of your writing, you’ve shown the ways that literary culture and economic thought are actually indistinguishable, they’re mutually intertwined. And then they become disentangled with a certain organization of the academy and a certain professionalization of these disciplines. But maybe you can talk to us a little bit about those analyses that you’ve offered.

Matt Seybold: I think that idea of disentanglement is, I believe, always arbitrary and superficial and it’s something that I’m trying to resist in the kind of histories of economic thought that I have tried to offer. Absolutely. One of the reasons why I call myself a Keynesian even though most of the people who are identified as Keynesians are people who I would disagree with about most things. The reason I call myself a Keynesian is because what I see happening in John Maynard Keynes’ work that I haven’t found elsewhere in economics thought is an acknowledgment, as Gertrude Stein says, that words are money and money are words. What Keynes recognizes is that once you have organized finance, ideas are a currency that is, in some ways, indistinguishable from other currencies, or at least is in constant exchange with other currencies, which means that literature and other forms of cultural production, particularly when it has a mass audience, can be as important as our immediate material conditions. It isn’t always the case, but it is at times the case. That means that cultural products are as influential on economic behavior as any kind of rational optimization, any kind of training, any kind of awareness of models or accounting, etc. For the vast majority of us, our economic behavior is driven by the cultural products we consume.

Scott Ferguson: Absolutely. And to your point, it’s a false disentanglement. Right. It’s a performance, and contradictions abound. I was starting to think of some. Recently, I realized that Cass Sunstein, The Nudge guy, wrote a whole book called The World According to Star Wars, for example. I know that from work that’s done by my friend and colleague, Todd Barnes, that in finance, Shakespeare is everywhere. All kinds of popular finance books will reference Shakespeare left and right. So the idea that literature and economics and finance are somehow divided is ridiculous.

Matt Seybold: I’m rewatching, or actually watching the final season for the first time, but I’m planning to rewatch more of it, because I’m planning to do a podcast with Anna Kornbluh about this show that we both love called Billions on Showtime. It is filled with exactly that. Now how much of this is coming out of the imagination of Koppelman and Levien, the show runners, but the way they present it, the floors of private equity and venture capital firms are just filled with people who have these elaborate encyclopedic memories for especially film, but also continental philosophy and Victorian literature and so on and so forth. Although they probably take it to a kind of extreme, I think a lot of that is true, right? That even those people who characterize themselves as number crunchers are oftentimes deeply influenced by some sort of corpus, some sort of canon of culture.

Rob Hawkes: I’m a big Billions fan. So I’m looking forward to that conversation. That sounds great. This may be super obvious to everyone listening, but it might be worth underlining just in case that Keynes was an important member of the Bloomsbury group, which was most famous for being a group of primarily modernist writers and artists.

Matt Seybold: A lot of where I got interested in modernism, which I know for both of you is more of the specialization that you came out of, and as a 19th century Americanist I had only a fringe introduction to modernism as a graduate study. But I started working on Eliot, specifically because he was friends with and oftentimes somewhat of a critic of Keynes and their relationship, and the way that it influenced both of them. Elliott definitely regarded Keynes as a cultural critic, and Keynes regarded Elliot as an economic thinker. That relationship was really important for me to justify what I was seeing in Keynes, I was not alone. Virginia Woolf, T.S. Eliot, they all were very interested in what Keynes was doing, even though he was doing it out of the Cambridge Economics Department, which they saw very little other interest in.

Rob Hawkes: My interest in modernism, I think it’s so interesting to think about that period as a time of literary experimentation, but also a kind of experimental-ism in economic thought, and that’s kind of what Keynes was doing. But also to think of money and economics itself as a kind of experimental discipline. We’re not often taught to think of it that way, but it is.

Matt Seybold: Yeah, yeah, absolutely. I sometimes question how much of this is intentional, and how much of it is just a matter of economics’ habituated ignorance to its own history, but there has been, I think, a suppression of Keynes in economic departments, certainly. Even in the relatively rare heterodox economics departments, I feel as though they have a somewhat cautious relationship with Keynes because of the neoclassical synthesis. He’s reduced, oftentimes, to that synthesis as opposed to read as an original thinker unto himself. You guys can see it, the listeners won’t be able to, I have this 32 Volume collected Keynes on the shelf behind me. It took me years to assemble that, because it’s not available. It’s still in production. Keynes has been reduced, essentially, to the General Theory, which is certainly wonderful. There’s lots of things in it that are well worth considering, but his thought really is growing over the entire course of his career and in some ways, the work that follows from the General Theory, particularly his critiques of quantitative economics, critiques of Tinbergen, are as important to me as the General Theory. His characterization of the interwar period in The Economic Consequences of the Peace, in particular. I mean, that has influenced the way that I see the world just as much as the General Theory has.

 Scott Ferguson: It’s hauntingly prescient.

 Matt Seybold: Yes, absolutely. And so readable, so accessible. If you are somebody who feels a little bit intimidated by economic thought, start with Economic Consequences of the Peace, it reads like a work of modernist literature. 

Scott Ferguson: Indulge me on this, because you two are the literary scholars, I’m the film and visual scholar. When I’ve studied that text, I’ve always been struck by the character descriptions, the mannerisms, and the ways that heads of state hold themselves, and how President Wilson is regarded and disregarded by the European powers. It reads like a novel.

Matt Seybold: Yeah. Another member of the Bloomsbury group, his name is escaping me at the moment, maybe Rob can help me out. But we have this moment of biography changing by virtue of Bloomsbury, as well. Where the satirical biography is becoming, and the treatment of political figures not as necessarily icons and idols, but also as characters and flawed, tragic characters. I think Keynes is learning from that, in that book and moving forward, as well. Some of his obituaries for economists, and for politicians; Alfred Marshall was really his mentor. But his obituary for Marshall is rich with irony, as well as admiration.

Scott Ferguson: Let’s pivot to your podcast. I think we should probably start by letting you set up where the podcast came from as such. And then we can work our way toward this particular season which we’ve asked you to come on the show and talk to us about.

Matt Seybold: So I think this is a relatively common narrative. But in 2020, I started the podcast. I had done one episode of a podcast for what is called America in the 19 Century. It’s an anthology podcast that is crowd sourced through the C 19. The Society for 19th Century Americanists. It’s a great show, I highly recommend it. I just listened to an episode the other day that was just wonderful, tracing the history of a ballad that was brought to America by an enslaved person. Just an amazing show that’s always finding ways to tell stories about 19th century American History and Culture, that don’t get told in academic journals, and through the other primary mediums that we have available to us as scholars. So I did an episode for that, on Mark Twain and Elmira. It was a great experience that came out in December 2019. It took me months to prepare it. I took a step back from that, and was talking with the director of the Center for Mark Twain Studies. We had been talking for a while about the possibility of doing a podcast. We just decided it’s too much work. It’s too much time, too much labor, we just can’t take that on at the moment. So we put it aside, and then the pandemic came. A big part of what we do at the Center involves in person programming: we have an annual symposium, we have three lecture series in the fall, the summer and the spring, we depend upon that as a justification for our funding. So we couldn’t do any of it for the entirety of 2020 and portions of 2021. So that became a rationale for trying to shift some of that programming into some sort of digital space. The podcast was born of that. For the first year, it was really just throwing stuff against the wall. So I thought up topics, coming up with people I wanted to converse with, trying to find sometimes a connection to Twain, sometimes only a very loose connection to Twain. Over time, I realized that what I really wanted to do was do thematically-linked episodes, not necessarily narrative. Episodes that would develop some sort of ongoing conversation, that would allow me to bring together scholars who were doing work that was related to each other’s work, and to have listeners exposed to a range of topics that they could draw the connections between. So basically the third through the seventh seasons are all of that type. Then, with this most recent season, “Criticism LTD”, I wanted to introduce some kind of narrative element where the conversations would not be self-contained to the episode, but they would be woven together. And I would be trying to draw connections between them and sort of gently guide the audience towards a set of questions, if not necessarily a particular argument or theory, although there’s a little bit of that going on, obviously, as well. I have referred to this as a kind of stereograph on the model of the monograph, something that there’s a set of interrelated chapters that deep dive into some specific topics. But in this case involving a lot of voices, dozens of voices, not just my own.

I think it ended up being close to 50 voices. Now, the number of people I did interviews specific to the series is closer to 30 or 35. But then I ended up incorporating a lot of found audio, either stuff from earlier podcasts that I had done or I wanted to use the audio that I found from some of the Chicago school guys.

Scott Ferguson: You had the AI stuff. Oh my god.

Matt Seybold: Yeah. So it ends up being close to 50 voices that appear at some point or another. Yeah.

Rob Hawkes: So, yeah, so we’ll give you two minutes to summarize.

Matt Seybold: The only way I’ve been able to think about it is just the sort of personal narrative approach, which I know is something that I sometimes critique within American Vandal. But very much this came about organically from just the experience of both thinking about what Twain’s vision of the critic was, and simultaneously witnessing the reception, particularly of John Guillory’s book, and the kind of glory that mainstream media was taking in defiling the profession of criticism in the early part of 2023. Then also recognizing that there was a whole host of other texts that were in conversation, to some extent, with Guillory, that Guillory was self consciously in conversation with at times. Obviously, there was that wonderful chronicle back and forth between him and Bruce Robbins, for instance. It felt to me like there was something really fascinating happening, but that the mainstream media perception of it was very shallow and very, very limited. I really wanted to have a bunch of conversations with people about how they were experiencing this moment, a moment that was really, what we talked about in “Criticism LTD” is twin crises or the possibility, the potential, of twin crises. One, very much a material crisis within the university, and particularly within the humanities, and the difficulty of reproducing our profession, due to what I call Ponzi austerity. Then, the other potential crisis of our methods. What is the purpose of literary criticism? What is its object? Why is there a series of what we have called method wars, cannon wars, etc. Why is there this sense of the metaphor of conflict defining literary studies, whether rightly or wrongly? That was where it all began. The other important piece here, and I think there’s a lot of other things, as you said, going on in this series, but the other really important piece for me was the impression I had that literary criticism was being defined almost exclusively by academic print texts, that is peer reviewed journals and University Press books. Not that those things aren’t enormously important. They are. But I felt as though my understanding of literary criticism at this particular moment is equally defined by what is often called para-academic criticism that exists in digital spaces and in multimedia spaces. I really wanted to think about how our understanding of what literary criticism is changed when we think about what’s happening at Public Books, LA Review of Books, all of those digital hubs, some of which are very large and very influential, like the ones I just named, but also ones that are really niche. I founded one at the Center for Mark Twain Studies that is very specific to Twain studies. We talked to Ainehi Edoro about her work on “Brittle Paper”, which revolves around African literature. There’s all these things that are happening in digital spaces, and then also podcasts and video essays and YouTube channels, etc. That just wasn’t being captured by conversations around Guillory’s book. That was maybe, perhaps a somewhat self interested mission was to think about, okay, how does this change when we start thinking about the breadth of what Ryan Ruby called “the golden age of popular criticism”.

Scott Ferguson: When we were speaking informally before officially beginning, you brought up John Guillory’s book. For I think most listeners, they’re not going to even know who John Guillory is, let alone the fact that he had a book. If they read generally, maybe they might have heard of it, or it might ring a bell, but maybe it’d be worth retelling that, but saying more about this book. 

Matt Seybold: I’d had this idea that I wanted to do a more mixed narrative and conversational format. But I didn’t necessarily have a topic in mind for it. I was giving a talk in Washington, DC early in the year. In preparation for that talk, I had been reading a relatively obscure work by Mark Twain about Shakespeare, a work in which he’s also somewhat cynically describing the role of literary critics in his own time. I happened to be preparing for this talk and then giving this talk at exactly the same time that a series of reviews were coming out in The New Yorker, in the nation in New York Review of Books of this same book, Professing Criticism by John Guillory, a book that was getting this kind of mainstream press that very few academic books get anymore. I’m an admirer of John Guillory, I’m an admirer of Cultural Capital. I was reading John Guillory’s book, as well, at the time. I felt as though the way it was being characterized in the reviews was not necessarily inaccurate, but it was definitely selective. There seemed to be a pleasure that legacy media critics took in the suggestion that John Guillory, a renowned endowed chair at NYU, a major voice in literary studies for over three decades, was offering up a kind of mea culpa about how literary criticism doesn’t matter, and has failed in some sort of way. There are elements of that argument in certain sections of Guillory’s book. There are ways in which he would like the profession to self examine and change. But, as he himself says in “Criticism LTD”, he did not intend to write a kind of obituary for the profession, although it was sometimes interpreted that way. Certainly the headlines suggested that. There were things like “The End of Literary Studies”, “The End of The English Major”, “Is Literary Criticism Dead?”, those were the kinds of headlines. I read the book and was simultaneously reading Bruce Robins’ Politics and Criticism. The Andy Hines’ Outside Literary Studies, which is about the history of Black criticism, and its interwovenness with the history of US literary studies. For me, Professing Criticism, John Guillory’s book, fits within this larger dialogue about the state of literary studies and the purpose of literary criticism. A dialogue that I thought really deserved to have more attention and to be developed self-consciously. I really wanted to hear what other people were thinking about this moment. That’s really where the idea was generated. Obviously, it took on some other legs from there, and maybe we can talk about that.

Rob Hawkes: Yeah, absolutely. It really is a wonderful series of these interwoven conversations, as you put it. I think you said already there are around 50 voices there. There are 16 episodes, I think it adds up to something like 24, or just over 24 hours as a whole piece. We could talk for 24 hours and not exhaust all the topics, but I think there are a few things that we’re really interested in. A few threads that maybe we can draw on because and perhaps where the conversation about literary studies most-obviously intersects with the economic, certain economic questions. Then, I suppose one of those is the broader state of higher education and the role of things like Ed Tech, and various industrial disputes going on in US higher education that echoes some of the things we’ve seen in the last year in the UK, as well. I wonder if you could speak a bit to those kinds of themes that run throughout the season?

Matt Seybold: Absolutely. There’s a few ways to approach this. Like you said, I won’t be able to summarize all of the major claims and arguments that are made in relation to finance and technology, and what I have referred to as a kind of extension of the corporate octopus of 19th century America. The mollusk of Ed Tech and private equity. But I think the two main points I would like to make that I think are supported by the conversations in the series. The first is that what’s happening in the humanities is coming for many other disciplines that have been traditionally housed in the university, at least in the United States. And although I have not studied the UK situation, or the European situation, I have been told that there’s a lot of analogies that are not perfect, necessarily, but reasonable. What I’m seeing is that the MacGuffin of growth that has driven private equity and venture capital since the first tech bubble in the late 90s, and early 2000s, seems to have run out of steam. The process of amalgamation and capture that has come for everything from banking to retail to healthcare, has exploited those things, almost draining them of any potential future earnings. That process of capture is now entering into education. It’s starting with American public universities, but will and I think is already moving towards higher education at large and will eventually move into secondary schools, primary schools into sort of every corner of education, if it is allowed to. This is what I have called Ponzi austerity is a method by which public funds are delegated for the purpose, the alleged purpose of education, but are very quickly siphoned into private enterprise. One of the most insidious ways of doing this, and perhaps the most innovative one is through education technology firms and products. That’s something that is accelerating, it explains so many of the crises, including what’s going on at West Virginia University. What’s now happening at SUNY Fredonia. If we look closely, the budget crises are often caused by delegation of resources to private enterprise that does not show any returns in terms of that attraction of students, the better outcomes for students, so on and so forth. Underneath that ideology, at least initially, is the idea that humanities disciplines, in particular languages, literature, history, philosophy can be automated, that they belong to a set of existing corpuses, which might be able to be fully automated and repeated, without any additional labor or input or research from faculty. I think that’s the rhetorical design. I don’t think there’s any merit to it, but it’s a rhetorical design, the goal of which is to de-skill and eventually eliminate labor. Not to reduce the costs of the institution, but to defray those costs to ed tech firms and then vicariously to private equity. That’s one of the key arguments that I introduced early in the series, that develops over the chorus in various ways that one of the things we have to take into account whenever we talk about the crisis of the humanities, is that that crisis might originate from a private equity business model that is sucking the life out of so many industries, and is now coming for education.

Scott Ferguson: This gets at what I take to be one of the most important critical aspects of the whole framework of this podcast and this season, which is that you’re taking up questions of literary criticism in a very expansive sense, on the one hand, and questions of popular media, fine art, our metabolizing of it, our making sense of it, our making sense of ourselves to ourselves, our pedagogy, our institutions of pedagogy, and bringing that into conversation with these kinds of nuts and bolts, changes and contests, in political economy, such that you end up posing the question over and over again, to what extent are conflicts that seem internal to the academy, that might seem esoteric, might seem only the concern of certain kinds of academics and scholars like the so called method wars, which I’d like us to talk about, to what extent our method wars, conditioned by maybe a symptom of larger structures of austerity, privatization and exploitation. I would just love to hear you talk about in your own words, how that kind of conjunction worked for you in constructing this season?

Matt Seybold: Well, I think the short and easy answer to the question is that that’s just how all of my critical approach to anything works is that I have a tendency to see everything to some extent through the lens of how it is being financialized and corporatized. I certainly would readily admit that I might jump to those conclusions, sometimes because I’ve just been habituated to them, and I haven’t been convinced that I’m wrong. I hope that people will listen to the series and recognize that this is not something that I am necessarily laying out at a granular level within the series. I really want this series to be a sort of organic conversation between a whole bunch of scholars, not all of whom will see this the same way that I do. But for me, the question that you asked about the method wars, I unfortunately think that the idea of a post-critique literary studies, a version of literary studies that is founded upon affection for culture, emotional response to culture, and sometimes is associated with a return to canonical appreciation of great books. I see that as very convenient for the mechanisms of private equity, and capture of our institutions. That critique is one of the things that, I would say, capitalists don’t really want our students to learn or be familiar with. They don’t really want it to be done, period. When it comes to my personal understanding of the method wars, and this is not to say that those who are opposed to Jameson who have poked holes in the habit of literary critique are doing so in any sort of cynical way, or are self consciously serving the interests of oligarchy. That’s definitely not my claim. But I do think that their intentions are sometimes misappropriated, misinterpreted, for the purposes of saying a kind of literary studies that aspires to show how the world works, in the same ways that economics tries to show how the world works, or sociology tries to show how the world works. That we should not regard literature professors as having the kinds of qualifications or clarity that gives them the right to make those kinds of claims that some of the social science disciplines and science disciplines do. I think that that is definitely the attitude towards the humanities on Wall Street is that this stuff doesn’t really matter, the people who are coming out of humanities fields who claim to be able to show us something about how the world works, how can they claim that if they’re just reading Dickens, or Twain. I think that sometimes the desire to get away from politics and literature, the desire to get away from critique as a method, certainly the desire to characterize everybody in literary studies as a Marxist, these are all things that serve the idea that we are part of an obsolescent and perhaps a profession that lacks skills that are appropriate for this age.

Rob Hawkes: Yeah. In connection with that, then, I think another important thread of the whole series that I guess begins, in certain respects, with your interest in Twain again, but is a historical dimension and isn’t just about the present moment. One of the parts of the narrative we were especially interested in is the whole story of the Chicago fight which involves a particular kind of version of this story around the University of Chicago but reflects and also resonates in all sorts of interesting ways on the present moment and on this whole relationship between economics and literature, I guess.

Matt Seybold: I wrote, and I don’t think it’s even out yet, but there’s a new edition of the Hopkins Guide to Critical and Cultural Theory that’s coming out. I wrote the chapter on the Chicago School of Economics. So I had done that research a few years ago, and obviously my interest in the Chicago school or awareness of the Chicago School of Economics goes back to my initial training in literature and economics. But I did not realize until I started working on this series, that there was a relationship between the emergence of the Chicago School of Economics in mid-century America and the incredible influence that they have had internationally, in many ways it is the ideological center of neoliberalism, that their origin story involves a feud with literary studies, and specifically with a group called the Chicago Critics. One of the texts that I’m borrowing from, that John Guillory is also borrowing from in his title, is called “Criticism Inc.” by John Crowe Ransom, an early 20th century literary critic. Reading that or rereading that essay, I was drawn to his description of the Chicago Critics, and that is a set of literary studies professors at the University of Chicago, as the first group who were trying to professionalize criticism. That is, make literary studies not just about literary history, and the trivia of literary history, but make it about a force of interpretation that would, I think, inevitably lead it to have some sort of consequence, in terms of a description of how we process information, how we understand the world. Not just literary studies as an archive of great works, and an archive of the people and biographical associations with those works, but actually literary studies as a means of using those works to address greater problems of understanding. Those critics kind of fell out of favor in the middle of the 20th century, and became relatively invisible, I think, in the way that we teach literary studies. And one of the reasons they did is that over the long haul, they lost the fight within their institutions, with the social scientists and with particularly economics. That was completely new to me when I started working on this series, and which I spend three episodes in the middle of the series, which is what I call “the hinge” talking about because I think there are a lot of lessons for us to take away from it and how the institution level, the department level fights sometimes have consequences that extend to the national, professional level, disciplinary level, even sort of global. That’s the story that I tried to tell with the Chicago fight.

Scott Ferguson: Can you tell us a little bit more of some of these juicy details? I don’t want to have you totally repeat because listeners should just go listen. I mean, somehow the Walgreens Corporation is involved in this. I had no idea. And the Mont Pelerin Society, can you just tease us a little more?

Matt Seybold: Yeah, absolutely. There are a few scholars who I should really give thanks to. John Guillory, first. Also, Anna-Dorthea Schneider, who has a wonderful book called Humanities at the Crossroads, that really gives details about what was happening in literary studies at Chicago, less so about the economic side, but because she talks about the relationship of literary studies to the administration, we can start to see the story unfolding through her work in really interesting ways. Then Eddie Nik-Khan, who is a historian of the Chicago School and of neoliberalism. It was really looking at all those pieces together, that I was able to see, what I think, is this really interesting personal squabble, in many cases, between the President of University of Chicago, the humanities faculty, and Dean’s at the University of Chicago, and then the economics department and broader social sciences at University of Chicago. One of the key moments and Eddie is the one who really makes this argument is: Charles Walgreen, the founder of the Walgreens drugstore chain in the United States, becomes involved initially, in a kind of Red Scare moment, where he’s accusing the University of Chicago of promoting communism. A very, very familiar moment, right now. There’s almost no foundation for this claim. It doesn’t resonate with the courts or with the legislature very well. But with the help of his friends in the Chicago press, he’s able to create a kind of moral panic, temporarily. He kind of does a mea culpa a few years later, and donates some money to the university to promote undergraduate education, and particularly founds a lecture series that is going to bring big ideas to campus, specifically for the benefit of introducing undergraduates to a range of perspectives. One of the first Walgreens lectures is even the person that the president of the university who he had been most aggressively feuding with. So there really was a mea culpa to this, but it also brought these funds in. Over the course of the coming decades, those funds actually got transferred to the business school and were eventually the funds that were used to bring major voices in the Chicago School of Economics back to campus, and to build the infrastructure that would make it the powerhouse of that university, and arguably, the kind of academic powerhouse of the United States in the 1970s, 1980s, and beyond. I don’t want to give too many spoilers here, because I can’t tell the story in brief in a way that will quite capture how insidious this design is. A kind of version of people like Milton Friedman, who many listeners will be familiar with, you get a sense of the kinds of institutional operators, the Chicago School economists were, as well as political operators, and international operators today. It’s an achievement of capture that I think becomes a model for so much of what neoliberals do well for the remainder of the 20th and into the 21st century.

Rob Hawkes: One of the moments in that strand, that what did you call it “the pivot” in the series was that the pointing out of the ridiculousness of the idea of a marketplace of ideas version of events where, if these ideas were just good ideas, and if there was a marketplace of ideas where good ideas would just win naturally, then why does all this institutional shenanigans have to happen? It’s because that’s how it is happening. It’s through institutional mechanisms; markets are not the kind of natural phenomenon we were led to believe they are. They’re created that way through institutional mechanisms, just as then the embedding of those ideas within universities.

Matt Seybold: Eddie, again, makes this wonderful point that the ideological foundations of the Chicago School is that we are all at least adequately adept at responding to market signals. Therefore, the creation of those signals through unregulated marketplaces is the best way to create the most efficient and healthiest and smartest, most intelligent designs. Yet, what we see in this story of the Chicago fight is the Chicago economists being disappointed over and over again, that both students and the broader public are not responding to the market signals in the way they think they should. They have to put their foot on the scale over and over and over again. It does very much put the lie to the idea that neoliberalism is about sort of free markets, right? A kind of old cliche that very few people still believe in. We see that that ideology was discarded almost from the get go.

Scott Ferguson: Another thing that I really appreciate about this series is that you do open up so many important questions and tensions and conflicts that are not resolved. One of them being the question of, is there a crisis in the humanities? Maybe yes, maybe no, maybe the way it’s being characterized is misleading. Maybe it’s elsewhere than what the New York Times would like to imagine it is. I’d like to invite you to tell our listeners a little bit about that. Maybe with reference to what one scholar Ryan Ruby has called the “golden age of criticism”, where he’s arguing that because of our expanding media, digital network platforms, we’re seeing a proliferation, a renaissance, of criticism that betrays any any suggestion that there’s some great decline in literature and literary thought?

Matt Seybold: At the center of the series is the idea of crisis, maybe multiple crises, maybe fabricated crises. The one crisis that I think is absolutely real, is the funding of the academic humanities. We’ve already talked about that a little bit, so I won’t belabor the issue. Chris Newfield has spent 30 years and four books tracking this. It is undoubtedly real, and it’s definitely something that we need to have strategies for responding to. I don’t think there’s really anybody in this series that would dispute that piece of it. What they might dispute is: what are the causes of it and how is it related to other questions about method, about object, about medium of publication, about what belongs in literary studies, about how literary studies distinguishes itself from cultural studies, Film and Media Studies. Those are where the disputes, I think, lie within the conversations in “Criticism LTD”? I don’t have an answer to all of those questions by any means. That’s kind of the whole purpose of the series. I don’t want to act as though I am the amanuensis for this large group of very diverse scholars who are involved in “Criticism LTD”. For me, I think one of the crises is the deskilling of and defunding of research. That one of the things that we are told sometimes explicitly, certainly implicitly, but I’m gonna forget his name is Asheesh Kapur Siddique, who has been tracking the ways in which the funding, a lot of the Mellon and other organizations have slowly but surely decreased their funding of humanities scholarship. Almost all of that money is going actually into administration, or it’s going into pedagogy, or into other kinds of program building. The resources available, the time and money available to humanities scholars to do specialized research is dwindling. And that is important. But what it doesn’t mean, and this is where I think things get really confused, and we talk about this at some length in the series, is that there’s not great research and great criticism being created. That in some ways, as Ryan says, this is a golden age of popular criticism, because there are all these multimedia and digital venues for really interesting, critical work. Oftentimes, that critical work relies upon the specialized research that has been done until recently and continues to be done, but just in smaller and smaller portions from within the academy. There’s this tension, where I think there is an absolute crisis in the resources available to academic humanities scholars. This goes beyond the kinds of scholars that you might expect the John Guillory’s and Chris Newfield’s of the world who are working in R1 institutions who have traditionally had lots of access to sabbaticals to research funding, opportunity to go to archives, all that kind of stuff, who are oftentimes teaching a very small course load. That’s one layer of scholars who are being defunded, and that’s really important. But I think what we almost never talk about is the fact that there’s this whole other set of a class or classes who are working at regional universities, at liberal arts colleges, at small private colleges and community colleges, who not only are they not having the opportunity to go write monographs for U. Chicago or SUNY Press or something like that. They’re not having the opportunity to read those monographs, that their work is so de-skilled and defunded. The labor intensification that they are suffering is so intense, that they’re not even able to keep up in their fields of specialization. That, I think, is a major crisis that endangers the reproduction of the discipline. It has the potential to endanger the interests that students have in the courses we teach. Although, I don’t actually see that happening all that much. But I think it has the potential long term to contribute to that. The argument I will always make is that administration’s often forecast the crises that they aim to create, right? What we are being told now is that students don’t have an interest in the humanities because the humanities are not giving them the kinds of knowledge and information and training that is necessary for the job market. Two things. First, the market signals are not telling us that. The people who get humanities degrees do very, very well. There is no indication that is a disadvantage. And also the students really aren’t telling us that. They enroll in humanities courses, they show interest in humanities courses. They don’t necessarily show interest in humanities majors. But my argument is that is because those majors do not have resources. That they are being told they are actually responding in some ways to that market signal and saying that I’m not going to major in a discipline that the university does not provide satisfactory support for.

Scott Ferguson: Is it a market signal? Or is it just an institutional ideological thing?

Matt Seybold: Absolutely. Yeah. And this is this, this is I think, what, whenever I hear an administrator or an Ed beat reporter making some sort of prediction or speculation or conjecture or interpretation, I always see that as an intention, not as an objective assumption about what is actually happening or objective description of what’s happening. There’s absolutely a widespread desire to reduce the number of humanities faculty, and the resources devoted to humanities instruction. The rhetorical moves are designed to rationalize the defunding that’s already happening. That’s sort of my interpretation. I think we’ve gotten far away from the original question. But that, for me, is the crisis that maybe I am most worried about. One of the things that I think the series captures, that is counterintuitive, is that, in part, because the academic publishing arm of the humanities is no longer accessible to many people who would like to be part of it, they are creating criticism outside of it. This is where we get to Ryan Ruby’s thesis. There’s very little, and I’ll even talk about myself, there is almost no incentive within my institution, for me, to publish an academic monograph. I work at a small liberal arts college. The way that our research model is designed, that’s going to give me very little advantage here. So unless I thought it was going to do some other kind of good, it was going to give me some other kind of advantage. There is nothing driving me to spend all of that time and energy, much of which I would have to make room for myself, because it’s not built into my contract. Instead, there’s far more incentive within my current contract for me to make podcasts or to publish in the LA Review of Books or to write journal articles, or even to build out a blog or something like that. Those things are more valued by my institution. That’s one individualized example of a phenomena that comes in many, many different forms across the profession, where people are seeking other venues for publication, for research, for promotion, promoting their own work for professionalization, because the traditional ones, university presses, peer reviewed articles, conferencing, these things are increasingly cut off from them. So what happens is we have this flood of actually really good para-academic criticism, really interesting academic, or pseudo academic podcasts, great material being created all across the web, much of it open access, much of it being created for no pay, which makes it easier to flood the market with it. That gives us maybe the mistaken impression that the infrastructures of the academic humanities are alive and well and healthy, and to some degree, that’s true. But I worry that that “golden age of popular criticism” cannot continue without our re-investment in the specialized research that historians, literary studies researchers, world language professors, etc., have traditionally done.

Scott Ferguson: And that informs pedagogy, and that informs social reproduction. And it’s all interlinked.

Matt Seybold: Absolutely. I think the thing that administrators generally don’t understand at all, and I fear many faculty don’t even understand or have blinded themselves to, is that having a healthy research life is absolutely imperative for being an effective instructor over the long term. Now, over short periods of time, it may not harm you that much if you go a couple of years without keeping up with the field or without having a research project or writing project of your own. Over the short term, you might not feel the immediate harm of that in your classroom, but over the long term, you will. And the longer you go without it, the harder it is to weave it back in. I definitely have seen a variety of examples of that where you have faculty who, for whatever reason, have let go of their professional development in terms of research and writing publication. Maybe they’ve been instructed to do so, to take on more service work. Maybe it’s just out of frustration, burnout, etc. But once it happens, it’s so hard to get it back. It may not harm the students over a short period of time over three to five years. But, professional lives are long, and when we start to get to 10, 12, 15 years of negligence towards research and writing, then the harm in the classroom is very considerable.

Rob Hawkes: That really speaks to something that I really wanted to ask, which I’m going to cite you, I think it’s in the middle of the three part finale, you mentioned that “the convention sometimes taught in graduate programs is that your inclusion in a critical conversation must come at somebody else’s expense. Criticism is competition for scarce resources.” And also a number of times throughout the series, I think Kyla Wazana Tompkins, “The Shush” is cited, and the idea that method wars are really resource wars. In that article, she also said let us imagine a world where our fields and our disciplines are properly resourced. So I wonder if we could ask what your thoughts are, what would higher education, specifically humanities, perhaps even more specifically literary studies, look like if it weren’t starved of resources and if it therefore wasn’t a kind of a battle for a fight over scarce resources? If money were no object, what would the opposite of a Ponzi austerity be? Could we imagine a Criticism Unlimited?

Matt Seybold: That’s a great question. It’s the thing that keeps me up at night perhaps the most. There’s a few things that I’ve been thinking about a lot over the last year that maybe offer some version of an answer to this question. Chris Newfield brings up something like this in our interview in “Criticism LTD” is that one of the things that the humanities lack or that literary studies in particular lacks is a kind of hub for research on the model that the social sciences and particularly economics has. That the Bureau for Economic Research is a sort of extraordinary portal. Setting aside its ideological assumptions, which are numerous and problematic, right. We think of it just as an institution that holds together a whole bunch of diverse fields, types of faculty, etc. It serves an extraordinary purpose. The humanities doesn’t have anything like that. The journals and presses and everything that we publish through, there is no aggregating place for the big ideas that are coming out of academic humanities research. Here’s just what was published yesterday. We could really use something like that just to make it easier, again, for those people who feel like they’re on the fringes, who feel like they’re having trouble keeping up making time for any kind of professionalization, just to be able to say, here’s a place I kind of trust that I feel is going to give me a wide range of relevant resources. And it’s going to make it easy for me to consume them to some degree, even if it’s not in their entirety, I’ll be able to see an abstract, I’ll be able to see a clearinghouse of similar types of publication.

Scott Ferguson: Heterodox economics has their own version, they have something called the Heterodox Economics Newsletter that I subscribe to. And I can catch up on the latest.

Matt Seybold: That’s one thing that I think about the humanities and we can think about this being for some subset of humanities disciplines, or for literary studies, specifically, or history specifically. We haven’t built out that infrastructure, in part because we haven’t found funding for that infrastructure. Because it hasn’t necessarily been treated as advantageous for other industries or private interests. That is definitely one thing that I think we lack, and that we could significantly benefit from. The other thing that came up a few times in this series, which I generally agree with, is that we lack a culture of collaboration and collectivity. Even though we often give lip service to those values, the actual products that we lionize and that we hold up, almost always have a single name on the spine. That’s one of the things I love about podcasting. I think it’s something that we’re seeing maybe develop in the digital humanities, more of a culture of collaboration. But I would like to see it happening across literary studies and across the humanities in maybe an interdisciplinary level. I’m a big fan of Kim Stanley Robinson’s novel The Ministry for the Future. One of the problems that he cites over and over again, is our difficulty conversing across specializations across disciplines. And that’s going to have to happen for us to solve big problems like climate change. I think the humanities have a lot to give to that kind of problem solving, but we have not developed a culture of collaboration, either within or across disciplines. That’s another thing that I think a healthy humanities that isn’t founded on the idea that the best way to claim your spot in the profession is to disagree with somebody else, to make an intervention. That’s something that I would like to see change, not that those interventions aren’t important. It’s just that that maybe shouldn’t be the only way we think about knowledge production.

Rob Hawkes: Collaboration across disciplines is what Money on the Left is all about. So join us.

Matt Seybold: Interdisciplinarity has sometimes a bad name, because it can often be seen as a vehicle for further ostracizing or de-skilling the humanities. That we’re only given some kind of gravitas if we can be associated with medicine or with science or with economics or sociology, right. I think that’s why a lot of humanities faculty are resistant to interdisciplinary projects. But hopefully, there are some which will break down that reasonable reticence.

Scott Ferguson: This leads to another question I wanted to ask you like really nicely about process and about collaboration. I’m wondering, from start to finish, so pre-production, production, phases of production, because it’s clear that one can glean from your release patterns, and from the structures, the kind of montage, collage-like structures of your podcast. That you’ll record a bunch of interviews, and then you’ll cherry pick from them and edit through lines together to create episodes. But then there’s moments when it seems like oh, no, you’re speaking to how you’ve released a bunch of them. And now you’re speaking back to them. So I’d really love to hear about what that process is like, and then just pile it on just because we’re running out of time. I also am really curious about reception and feedback. We were talking before about the emails and the DMS, what do they look like?

Matt Seybold: Well, that’s the easier one to address. It’s the one that I’ve also been thinking about how to process because honestly, while the series was ongoing, I literally could not keep up. There was so much stuff coming into my inbox, I tried to read most of it, at least a little bit, but often I couldn’t respond. I was still doing my day job. I’m still teaching three classes. One of the things I’ve been trying to process since the series ended about three weeks ago, and I’ve actually been able to go back and respond to at least some of those messages and read them in greater depth and start to think about what are the some of the through lines that seem to be consistent, the things that people were most interested in, the things that people are most likely to object to. That’s been something that I’ve been thinking a lot about recently. But in doing so, I have also come to the realization that there is something that I had really hoped for, and that is some sort of formal reception. I had really hoped for, whether I had admitted this or not to myself even, that this series, given the clearly the number of people who were listening, and the way in which it was generating conversation within the profession. I would get notes from friends that “I was at a conference, and there were people talking about it,” or “I gave a lecture someplace, and when they mentioned that I’d been on the American Vandal, people responded to that,” right. There clearly was a pretty ranging consumption happening. But the reception I was getting was all informal. All notes, all emails, and DMs, and certainly circulating it on social media and stuff. No review, at least so far, right? No response. 

Scott Ferguson: That can take some time.

Matt Seybold: And it can. I’m not saying that it’s impossible for it to happen at this juncture. But I definitely had held out the hope that something like that would manifest. Part of the reason is that it would give some legitimacy to podcasting as an academic medium. That’s one of the things that certainly we talk about within the series. I try to gesture towards various points in the series that I think is a really important medium for academics, not just in the humanities, but throughout. I think that that importance has already manifested in the raw numbers of people who listen to academic podcasts. I’m guessing your data shows the same thing. There are far more people listening to my podcast than there are reading my Mark Twain annual articles, or even probably some of my LA Review of Books pieces. The audience is there. But the mechanisms for translating that into an ongoing conversation, which is really what I want, have not been formalized. So when you ask about reception, that’s the thing that comes up. I’m not the only one doing this. We talked about Remarkable Receptions, which is this amazing podcast series by Howard Ramsey, High Theory. There’s a whole host of academic podcasts which deserve to have that kind of reception and engagement in those formal spaces. So far, at least, it hasn’t really happened. I really hope that that’s something that the profession will adapt to. Going back to the first question, the process, which is a harder one to answer, in part because this is the first time I’ve made this kind of series. There’s definitely some things that will change and alter when I try to do it again. But the goal I set out for myself, when I began, was going to be different from anything I had done before was that I was going to do all the interviews before I released the first episode. I started doing the interviews, I think, in March. I was doing them all through the summer. Then I was going back and relistening to the raw audio to see the things that were connecting between the various interviews. My questions were obviously developing, although I had a set of two or three sort of standard things that I wanted everybody to approach, and then some specific things around people’s specializations and researches. It developed over time. But I really wanted the narrative of the podcast to be developed organically from the conversations. And I didn’t think that could happen until I had done all the conversations. So it’s just I’m gonna do all these interviews, and then I’m gonna see what comes out of them. I think that was a very fruitful process. It was also a process that led me to feel like I was seeing gaps all over the place. So when I made the first five or six episodes, really up to the Chicago fight, I knew a sort of general arc of where the series was going, but I was like, I’d really like to talk more about, for instance, AI. I need to talk to Annie McClanahan and to Ted Underwood. When I knew that I was headed towards Jed Esty’s book being at the center of the finale, I felt like I needed to get more people involved in that conversation. And I hadn’t asked that question, because I didn’t really know where the series was headed, when I first did the interviews. So I did do a kind of second batch later on that then was integrated into essentially the final five episodes, I think. That process will probably look a little different the next time I do it. Also, 16 episodes is a lot. That was not how I imagined it at first. I hope maybe I’ll be able to think a little bit more concisely about topics the next time and maybe have it be a seven or eight episode bundle or something like that. But one thing I will say and this may be a little bit shop talk, but the other thing that’s happening and I address this, to some extent in this series is over the course of preparing “Criticism LTD”, the technology for podcasts was changing rapidly. We get a little bit in the series into the voice generation and the kind of the ways in which you can edit your audio without re-recording stuff, and that’s definitely a boon for podcasters. We talked before we started recording, we talked about transcription and the improvements that are happening to transcription, which improve access and a lot. There’s a lot to be thankful for there and I hope it will continue to get better. But maybe the biggest one for me was the introduction of Descript as a platform for editing and just the ability to edit the audio file through a text editor instead of going into Audible, I think dramatically reduced the amount of time that I had to spend on just the the nitty gritty editing of individual interviews. One of the things that I do with Vandal is I try to really tighten up every interview. In the past that has meant going through every cut by cut, taking out every space, every um, every like, or at least the ones that I decide are not helpful to the conversation. Descript basically does that automatically now, and that happened within the last six months. The first interviews I was editing we’re talking about for every 15 minutes of audio, I’m spending an hour on it or something like that. Now, for every 15 minutes of audio, I’m spending 30 minutes. That’s a big difference. And that’s all been made possible within the last year.

Rob Hawkes: If we have time, we’ve been talking for a while, but this reminds me of something I did really want to ask. It kind of loops back to the question of modernism, to the question of experimentation, experimentalism that almost was where we started, and to something Ryan Ruby said in your conversation, one of the parts of your conversation with him about poetry as inherently experimenting with new media and poets always being at the forefront of new media. I think he also says that criticism is having a kind of modernist moment. With those thoughts in mind that what you’ve just said about the podcast and what you’ve done in terms of podcast as an experimental medium as this project, as this wonderful experimentation with the podcast form, I’ve not heard anything like it. The way that these voices are woven together, and people can come back and refer back to moments. Yeah, it’s a fascinating piece of work as Scott’s already kind of alluded to, from a formal sense. But thinking about the podcast as a kind of experimental form of criticism, and then as criticism as a form of experimentalism as well, which also speaks to some of the threads in the series about the relationship between creative writing and critical writing, and problematizing that distinction, as well.

Matt Seybold: I remember that moment, when Ryan’s talking about writing context collapse, and how writing that poem was part of his transition to self identifying as a critic. The claim that he makes that poets are always on the cutting edge of new media is a powerful one, although I think it is also disproportionately formed by modernist poets. I’m thinking about, like, Evan Kindley’s work here. Modernist poets oftentimes share that kind of dual identity as poet and critic. So we might argue that critics are also part of that Vanguard, who are always reaching for and engaging new media, maybe sometimes more successfully, more progressively than others. For me, the last few years have definitely been kind of slow falling in love with podcasts as a medium. Both ones that I’ve been consuming for a long time, but not really thinking about as anything other than what I put on in the car or what I put on while I’m washing dishes or whatever, right? Not really thinking about them as anything but kind of wallpaper and recognizing as I became a podcaster myself, both the I think inherent tendency for them to be consumed as such, but also also the potential for them to fill spaces that are maybe lacking in our digital ecosystem. The space that I most associate with podcasting is just length. If you know anything about web publication, it’s that our tolerance for long form narrative and argumentation is incredibly low. That even audiences who are attracted to more ambitious and more literary digital publications, don’t really like to read things that are longer than 2000 or 3000 words. That reading on our phones, reading in our browsers, is just something that’s harder to do. And as a result, as criticism has become more digital, as scholarship has become more digital, I think our tolerance for long form argumentation has reduced. And I definitely still find that when I want to read something like a journal article, even though I’m often getting it through the web, I either want to print it out, or I want to put it on my iPad in a way that more resembles reading a book or reading a magazine. I think the technological era that we’re going through, is trending towards not to mention the labor and taste intensification that we talked about earlier, all those sorts of things. It’s trending towards, you know, more editorial, more short form, right. The podcast, I think, is an alternative to that, right? We’re now almost two hours deep in this conversation. I don’t know what it will look like when you publish it, probably an hour and a half or something like that. But people will listen, and then they’ll listen all the way though. They might listen in 10 or 15 minute bursts, they might listen in their car on the way to work, but you have this opportunity to really dig deeper into a conversation and to subject matter to develop a long form that I think is increasingly unavailable to us in other mediums. For me, maybe that’s the biggest attraction of the podcast is that I miss the long read as a dominant, or at least a consistent genre of publication.

Scott Ferguson: Thank you for that. I think by way of conclusion, because I don’t want to take too much of your time, I’d like you to talk a little bit about the soundtrack to your podcast which, hopefully, we will have already incorporated little snippets of into our own interludes, but it plays a kind of constitutive, ongoing aesthetic role. You talk to the musician responsible for the score, as it were. Maybe you can talk about that.

Matt Seybold: Yeah, absolutely. An underappreciated turning point for the series was when Joe Locke gave permission to use his new album released early in 2023 as the soundtrack, and he basically gave me carte blanche to use it however I wanted. As long as I was protecting the copyright. I never played a full song. I always had it coming in, coming out, I had various layers of audio on top of it, things like that to protect his copyright. He gave me that permission, and it really provided this aesthetic tone to the series. I asked him for that album for a reason because I felt like it gave me a kind of palette that I wanted. But as I sort of spent more and more time with the music, I heard the kind of things in it that I hadn’t heard initially. To get back to that conversation about the podcast medium, I think the relationship between voice and music is one that podcasters should try to hold on to. It’s obvious, there are a lot of things that I don’t want us to inherit from our radio predecessors, but that’s one of the ones that I think I do. Certainly talking with Joe, thinking about the backdrop to that album, and the story behind it, and the emotional chorus of those songs was very useful to me and thinking about the arcs that I wanted to create within each episode. Oftentimes, within “Criticism LTD”, the narrative arc is not necessarily an explicit one. It’s not me saying this is what I want, sometimes it is, but it’s not always me saying: this is what I want you to take from this conversation. It’s one that each listener is intuiting for him or herself. But the thing that binds them together is they all get those musical cues. Those musical cues, I think, are really important. I told my dad recently, in every season so far of American Vandal, we have had some kind of theme music that we have orchestrated with the musician. Dan Reader had this wonderful song that he gave us for The World’s Work, we had The Snarling Yarns, a punk band called Squirt Gun for when we were doing our series on social media. So we’ve always had some kind of musical theme. It’s gonna be hard for me to do anything but jazz going forward. Because there was just something about how working with Joe’s album affected my editing and mixing, that I’m gonna be longing for the next time, I think. Yeah.

Scott Ferguson: Thank you so much for joining us on Money on the Left. Oh, did you want to say more? Sorry, you’re kind of delayed because of the Atlantic Ocean. Did you want to add something?

Rob Hawkes: It was just something about jazz experimentation and the kind of call and response, voices in conversation, that I wondered if that had something to do with that.

Matt Seybold: I have been a lifelong jazz listener. I actually played jazz saxophone in an earlier phase of my life. I care a great deal about that music. My dad taught jazz history as an adjunct professor for decades. He was a presenter of a jazz series at Purdue University. He was a jazz disc jockey. It’s been just part of my life ever since I was a little kid. But it wasn’t until I was making this series that I realized, oh, that combination of really deep, technical development, the shedding and practicing that jazz musicians have to do in order to perform, combined with the spontaneity and the improvisation of the performance itself. That’s what I want for Podcasting. I’m not saying that we always get there or that I always get there. But that’s definitely what I want.

Scott Ferguson: Any final questions from across the Atlantic? Well, thank you so much for joining us on Money on the Left.

Matt Seybold: It’s been a real pleasure.

Rob Hawkes:

Thanks so much.

* Thanks to the Money on the Left production teamWilliam Saas (audio editor), Mike Lewis (transcription), & Robert Rusch (graphic art)

Teaching Economics with Benjamin Wilson

We are joined again by Benjamin Wilson to discuss what it is like to teach Economics from a heterodox Modern Monetary Theory perspective in 2023. Wilson is associate professor and recently-minted chair of the department of Economics at SUNY, Cortland. In previous episodes, we have chatted with Wilson about his research, the Uni Currency project, and his innovative work experimenting with classroom currencies. Developing these topics further, our conversation this time explores the potentials and dangers of using neoclassical textbooks in the heterodox classroom; the utility of classroom currencies for Econ classes of all levels; the place of narrative in neoclassical and heterodox theory; and so much more. Our dialog with Wilson is shaped in several respects by our conversation with Larry Johnson in last month’s episode of Money on the Left. If you are passionate about pedagogy, then this episode is for you.

Visit our Patreon page here: https://www.patreon.com/MoLsuperstructure

Music by Nahneen Kula: www.nahneenkula.com

Transcript

The following was transcribed by Mike Lewis and has been lightly edited for clarity.

Scott Ferguson:  Benjamin Wilson, welcome back to Money on the Left.

Ben Wilson:  So great to be here. Thanks for having me.

Scott Ferguson:  So since you last joined us, I hear you’ve become the chair of the Economics Department at your university. Is that true? Are the rumors true?

Ben Wilson:  The rumors are true. I took that role with a tremendous amount of hesitancy. The rumors are true that it is a significantly greater amount of work. But I’m glad that I’m doing it. I’m halfway through my second year, and it’s looking like I’ll probably take on a third year because at the end of my third, then we’ll have enough people that have been tenured and gone on sabbatical and done things that we can go forward and and elect a new chair and then have rotations of two to three years for each of us moving forward, which I think is a really exciting evolution in our department and really part of us getting a series of new hires after retirements and coalescing as a new team for what will be hopefully the start of my second full decade at SUNY Cortland, which is a little bit mind boggling to me.

Scott Ferguson:  What’s it like teaching economics at SUNY Cortland? As an outsider who knows just a little bit about economics and economics pedagogy in the United States, my impression is that most economics departments really suck, and they teach some pretty horrible things and reproduce a culture of neoclassical economics that doesn’t really encourage critical historical, social, political, or ecological thought at all. I have a sense that something different happens at SUNY Cortland in the economics department.

Ben Wilson:  Yeah, it very much does. In terms of what goes on in other economics departments, I have a hard time saying because my graduate work was at UMKC, which is another super unique opportunity and space. Even as an undergraduate at the University of Kansas, which ended up being a pretty strongly orthodox department, my first professor at that university was very much more of a heterodox inclined political economist. I really didn’t appreciate how great that was until I started doing the PhD work there, and it was all models and maximization and all those things. We’ve talked about that previously. So at Cortland, we have a very pluralistic department. Hopefully this airs before we close our next application process for interviews because we are hiring another two new tenure line faculty this year.

Scott Ferguson:  Congratulations.

Ben Wilson:  Yeah, it’s just amazing. I mean, it’s exhausting work. But it is really exciting to bring new folks on. I’m very much the beneficiary of a legacy of people at the school that really valued political economy. All of our students, whether business economics is their major. So we have a business economics degree that’s housed in a college of arts and sciences. We’re ahead of the curve there in that right now, lots of business schools are looking at their programs and thinking that they’ve kind of missed the boat in their School of Professional Studies in terms of being able to incorporate the benefits of developing and thinking about an education that brings forth good citizens and really focused too heavily on the narrow values of productivity, efficiency, profits, individuality, etc, that are the cores of neoclassical economics, really. All of those students, whether in an economics major or the business economics major start their journey with Political Economy and Social Thought 105. That class is taught by four or five of us and we rotate those sections and all of us approach it in a little bit of a different way. We share different textbooks and procedures. I myself have taught it a host of different ways. It’s a really hard class to teach just because you want to do everything. So, do I start with Adam Smith in 1776 and sort of work through it chronologically to the modern day? Or do I start with a modern day and then work backward deconstructing those things? Or do we construct it based on thinkers? Do we construct it based on ideas? I go back and forth. This semester, I’m teaching it as an honor section. This is one of the things that I’m guilty of, I’ll read a book in the summer, and I get really excited. I think this is going to be a game changer. It’s gonna be an awesome read for this class…

Scott Ferguson:  Then you tell me about it.

Ben Wilson:  That’s right. And then I read it for the second or third time as I’m teaching it, and I’m like, God, why did I do this to myself? This book is Robert Shiller’s Narrative Economics. It’s actually been better than I just said, but Shiller is as big a name in the orthodoxy as you could probably put forward, but he’s really wrestling with this idea that narrative matters. It influences the length, duration, severity, etc, of the financial crisis, but he falls a little bit short of really digging into the structures that are causing the crisis. The Great Depression lasted longer than it needed to, because people kept talking about unemployment in various ways, and it’s not that people were actually unemployed that was the problem. Bubbles and real estate happen because everybody’s talking about how great it is that their house price is going up, and it creates irrational exuberance, and all these things, and no mention whatsoever at all of deregulation and assets, and that the US economy was creating the environment for this and these stories. It’s a good book for thinking about just how shallow a lot of Orthodox analysis can really be, and that we need a little bit more complexity in the way that we’re thinking about these things to really prevent and understand and make these sorts of crises less painful for the people that bear the brunt of it. So far, so good. It’s been a great reintroduction to the classroom post-pandemic in a way that has been so rewarding as these students have really engaged with the reading and are giving me a hard time. They’re predicting that I’m not gonna like this chapter, and the reasons why I didn’t really care for it. It’s just been a really good semester so far. And I think, as department chair, the most rewarding part of that job is classroom visits. As part of the evaluation of the quality of our teaching and maintaining a strong culture of teaching, the department chair has to visit anybody who’s coming up for a particular review. I’m just blown away by how much thought and care and energy our faculty puts into their classes. I’ve stolen a few techniques here and there that have been very useful in my classes. I think my favorite is the use of the software Perusal. Are you guys familiar with that?

Billy Saas:  Just got something in my inbox about. I’ve not used it before.

Ben Wilson:  Yeah, it’s been great. It’s like Brightspace, or any of those other online learning management systems, but it allows you to highlight and comment in the readings and everybody can see it. So the students really appreciate it because they say it feels like we’re reading it together. The other really nice thing about it is it keeps information and collects statistics on how long students are in the document. So they can’t just open it and leave it open. So for example, it’ll say it was open for 24 hours, but they were active in it for seven minutes. So I even give people a little bit of a hard time and be like, alright, let’s see if we can build that stamina from seven minutes to 21 minutes and maybe by the end of the semester, a solid hour. For maybe 45 minutes consistently in the readings, and then we’ll really be cooking with some gas.

Billy Saas:  I want to talk about Shiller a bit more. What was the name of the book again?

Ben Wilson:  It’s called Narrative Economics.

Billy Saas:  Maybe a word for it could be a foil for the class. It’s like you’re teaching through critique of the book. And in our last episode, we talked with Larry Johnson, and that’s how he shared his story of coming into heterodox economic thinking through critique of Samuelson. Would it be fair to say that Shiller is on par with modern Samuelson? Not quite every classroom.

Ben Wilson:  He’s kind of been my victim. But it’s been a fascinating book, because it was published in 2019, just before the pandemic. The subtitle is: How Stories Go Viral and Drive Major Economic Events. The whole metaphor throughout is about contagion and viruses. So the narrative is always this sickness that’s happening. One of the questions we asked is, can we write some positive stories? Or are there some good ways that we can turn this ship around?

Scott Ferguson:  Does he not really allow for that?

Ben Wilson:  My reading is that I don’t even know that it’s crossed his mind.

Billy Saas:  Is this meant for a popular audience, do you think, more or less?

Ben Wilson:  That’s one of the reasons why it’s a good one for the 105. I wish one of the things that I would like to see more heterodox folks do is write sort of this 100 level book. We’re confined either publishing in our journals and writing these really heavy books, or the textbooks, like I said for 105. They’re either sort of this, featuring the great thinkers sort of way or…

Billy Saas:  Accessible, heterodox? Yeah,

Ben Wilson:  Raj Patel, he’s got a book, The Value of Nothing, it was published in 2008. So it’s starting to get a little bit dated. But it aligns so nicely with the critique that I levy against microeconomics in my 300 level economics course. So starting with Homo economics and the individual consumer and then thinking about the corporation and the firm. He has a nice chapter on value theory and then the second half of the book kind of explores alternatives in forms of democracy that allow us to think about the state, firms that aren’t maximizing profits, and nonprofits and co-ops and all those sorts of things. I guess there are a few, I just wish that they came out and got as much acclaim and fancy book jackets.

Billy Saas:  You can’t buy him in the airport. So I want to talk about that 100 level heterodox, economics intro book, and see what we think would need to be in there. But before we do, is there an index? Or are there sources cited in that book? I’m just curious, because it seems to me like what Shiller’s describing is also incredibly derivative, and a story that’s been told a bunch of times. I wonder to what extent there’s any kind of citational practice there.

Ben Wilson:  It’s pretty shallow, and for a second, he talks about MMT, but I can’t remember the exact straw man that he uses. But it’s really bad. So those are good things, right, to be able to point out and say, this is the way people write in these books similar to the textbook and in our economics class. They write things like instead of saying in our model, they say that if the government provides a tax incentive to increase investment, it’s going to increase interest rates. Instead of saying, in our model that has all of these assumptions, if the government provides an incentive, then our model predicts that interest rates will rise. There really should be much more thought to that. There’s just no room for thinking that what the model does is not going to happen in reality. Which is really problematic. Especially when you teach a loanable funds situation, and go through all that, and the interest rate is going all over the place. At the end, we really should say, but none of that really actually happens, because the interest rate is a policy variable. I don’t know, it’s really hard. Having been trained in neoclassical economics and spending all that time, when you think about it from an intellectual project, the idea that we can model the economy using these tools of physics, it’s actually pretty creative and kind of a fun idea. But at some point, the fun idea, and the fact that it just keeps failing us; at what point can we abandon it and just stop teaching this stuff? I don’t know.

Scott Ferguson:  You’ve told me about how you teach Orthodox economics in the past, and I think you’ve referred to metaphors of building blocks, there might have been Legos involved.

Ben Wilson:  Yeah, so I mean, it is model building. And, the micro economics, the 300 level class we teach, I teach the textbook, and we develop the model and all of its calculus glory, and drive the demand curve and the law of demand and find our supply curves. Then we go through, meticulously, all the assumptions of the perfectly competitive market. We do the whole shebang, in all of its glory, straight out, honest, and I even speak about its elegance, and how it is sort of captivating to think that we could somehow harness the power of physics to control and think about unemployment and inflation and all these things. What we derive is partial equilibrium and the way that I present it toward the end is that, what we’ve accomplished, people like Alfred Marshall did, and all the economists, long lines of them have done this work. Since then it’s developed into general equilibrium. From general equilibrium, we get dynamic stochastic general equilibrium. Really, all that’s occurring is that we’ve gone from what we did in this class, which is the Duplo, LEGO model of the economy. All you really are doing when you get to the more sophisticated is you’ve made the pieces smaller, and more complicated, and much more painful when you step on them as a parent. But at the end of the day, the pieces are all the same, right? The rational agent is an efficient firm, you’ve just made it much more rigorous, and the assumptions and the assumptions actually become even more narrow and less like reality, the more complex the math gets. So there’s like an inverse relation between the two.

Scott Ferguson:  For example.

Ben Wilson:  To get to general equilibrium, you’ve got to assume perfect information. And you don’t necessarily need perfect information in the simpler partial equilibrium model. So things just get more and more convoluted.

Scott Ferguson:  So is there a theory of the press that goes along with how perfect information circulates?

Ben Wilson:  Oh, man, that’s a good question. I’m not, I’m not aware of it off the top of my head. That would be an exogenous shock that the press is presenting information in the wrong way or something. What’s the press? Is there a market? Where are they exchanging their words?

Scott Ferguson:  So much narrative, so much viral narrative getting in the way. We need more monetary silencing.

Ben Wilson:  It’s an exogenous shock to the system that will create a short term perturbation and then we’ll return to normal.

Scott Ferguson:  So the rational agents get their information by simply using their five senses and by looking at the market?

Ben Wilson:  Oh, I don’t even know that they have five senses.

Scott Ferguson:  They’re just brains in a vat.

Ben Wilson:  Yeah, they’re agents, right? They’re solving optimal problems. It’s not even so much that they’re agents or things because we’re not even really looking at them, we’re looking at the optimal points that emerged from their decisions. So, the aggregation. Economics, from the free market perspective, it’s just constantly aggregating choices, optimal choices, to form these structures that we call the demand curve, the supply curve, and then there’s one magic optimal point …

Billy Saas:  Subjectivity is a veil over real aggregate relations.

Ben Wilson:  Yeah, I mean, this is where we should invite Mitch Green into this sort of conversation, because he is the master of the neoclassical language. And in jokes, the neoclassical dad jokes, he’s the master. So we go through that, and does this Death Star model of Legos really tell us any more about how we behave and who we are and what’s going on in the economy than the Duplo one? I’m not really sure that it does. I wish they had to go through and say all the assumptions every time they make a proclamation about what’s going to happen in this policy choice. Because it’s really unfair, even in their papers or in a presentation, they would just say: assume the standard assumptions. If they even acknowledged the assumptions at all. It just presents theirs as “this is the way that it is.” Then, when you critique or raise an alternative, you have to deconstruct all that stuff. So it’s almost like you’re reproducing it again, in your own head, and then they’re listening to you reproduce it again. And then by the time you get to the punchline, they’re like, Well, you just said, all the same things. You just talk past each other all the time.

Scott Ferguson:  And you’ve cited the hell out of orthodox journals.

Billy Saas:  Yeah. That’s why I feel like the kind of the by now pretty standard, or standardized approach that Shiller seems to be taking in that book, without having read it, but having your description in hand, there’s fundamentally a defensive posture in it. It’s like “what we’re doing is not narrative, everything else is narrative,” right? And to the extent that we can detect narrative, that’s the extent to which we can detect that we’re straying from our Death Star model. And we’re out in kook land.

Ben Wilson:  Yeah, please stop telling all these stories, because you’re shocking people’s preferences, and they’re not making optimal choices anymore. Whereas maybe, the fact that we let people take out a bunch of mortgages without proving income, that’s why we got a bubble?

Billy Saas:  And the trick there is that you can always locate narrative in those points of breakdown. There’s no narrative at the optimal point, but there is always narrative at the non optimal points. Right, the irrational.

Ben Wilson:  Shiller is clearly very much influenced in thinking about the Great Depression. Lots of the narratives and stories that he tells about consumption and frugality and the way that things move through that period come up throughout the book. One of the things that we’ve brought up in the class as a counter is the interview you did on the myth of the redemptive depression, which really goes into how these stories come about, and why they come about and what it was actually like, and what was going on and the vivid descriptions of what it means to have nowhere to go and to be hungry and to be trying to care for children through this time period. At some points, even having to give up your children. That sort of thing is why narrative and story carries on through generations. Not that it was a shoeshine boy telling Rockefeller that something bad is gonna happen. When you get the redemptive depression narrative, thinking about Grandma’s here because she had local supply chains and worked hard and made it through and came out of this morally stronger. Then you transition to the 60s in the civil rights movement, and Martin Luther King talking about the right for jobs for all and why do we need jobs for all? The New Deal didn’t really actually do anything to allocate resources. What’s the argument here? Then, you can pull back these sorts of silly individualist stories and think more holistically about all the things that are interconnected in our lives. The importance of work and jobs and stability and risk and why we study what we study and all these sort of bigger questions that are much more interesting and fundamental. So you guys, big shout out to podcast and I mean, I love returning to this catalog, and listening to these episodes. There’s just so much in this podcast that is so applicable. The value, like I was saying, is that there are these accessible books. Lots of the books, and the people that you guys talk to, the books aren’t appropriate for the class, but hearing them discuss their books and their work in the podcast is sort of like an introduction to how to critically read and how to think about what an author might be trying to do, and the way that they’re structuring their books and their articles and their research. So in those ways, it’s so useful, especially from a heterodox perspective to be able to think about what are these different methodologies? What are these different tools that we can use to start understanding these economic outcomes from different perspectives? Because one of the challenges of being a heterodox economist is there’s no “this is our method.” Right? This is our toolbox. This is what we do, we’re not going to stray from it.

Scott Ferguson:  It’s automated.

Ben Wilson:  Where’s my beta hat? It’s really much more eclectic. We’re always wrestling and grappling toward what is a social science methodology that can give us meaningful and useful knowledge?

Billy Saas:  That’s the thing: meaning and purpose as objectives versus the internal model consistency.

Ben Wilson:  Yeah.

Billy Saas:  I agree.

Ben Wilson:  Let’s tell a really good story about utopia, and there you have it. Right, and that’s frustrating too, right? Socialism gets painted as this utopian narrative, but free market economics is the most utopian story maybe ever told. That autonomous individuals with no constraints will spontaneously decide that these tokens are money and that all of us transacting and doing things will lead to our harmonious and good society. Like, what? This is crazy talk. Like, we can’t even spontaneously agree what to get for dinner most nights. Like society is supposed to spontaneously believe this is our medium of exchange because it has an intrinsic value.

Scott Ferguson:  So I think our listeners, at least our longtime listeners, know you on this podcast, in part because you are a pioneer of classroom and university currency experiments where you model so-called tax-driven money as an obligation to the institution, as the foundation for monetary production. I think often when we gloss those experiments, we’re doing so in different contexts. Now, we’ve invited you on to talk about economics pedagogy, and in a more kind of holistic way. So what happens with these service learning currency experiments in relation to learning about orthodox economic models, the different models of equilibrium, different heterodox models? How do conversations get started? Or how do students metabolize, make sense of all of these things in conversation with one another?

Ben Wilson:  Yeah, that’s a great question. It’s one that has changed, really, every single time I’ve issued a currency in the classroom. It really depends on what classroom. So it started off that I would only do it in the 105 class, as an introduction, so that they would know what I’m talking about when we get to the upper level classes, or at least have been introduced to it. Now, I’m gravitating toward that I just need to do it in all my classes, so that when they get to the upper level classes, maybe they already have some of the currency already in their possession, and it’s transferring between time periods. I mean, this is what Fadhel has been able to successfully do at Denison is this intergenerational thing. I’ve just not quite ever, I think I was building up toward that pre-pandemic, especially with the debt theme that was going on on campus and bringing people like Stephanie Kelton to talk. We still have to get you up there, Scott, to give your talk that was canceled, like so much else that fateful spring. This semester, the last time I did it, I did it with digital money, and they had wallets and that had its own sort of fun to it. But this semester, I went back to just paper money. And it’s a Comparative Approaches in Political Economy class, where we’re looking at the differences and methodologies and political economy from Orthodox and Heterodox around questions of money and how it works and what it does. The primary text in the class is the classic Ten Men of Money Island that I learned about from Jakob Feinig, which is really pretty fascinating, just because who knew you could write an imaginary story about money that’s grounded in state theories of money.

Scott Ferguson:  Tell us about it.

Ben Wilson:  It’s really fascinating and terrific. The characters in the book are named after what they do. So like Sledgehammer, and Reaper, the agriculturalist. The name for the government person is Do Nothing. The name of the banker is Discount. It really builds the story, right? They’re all kind of doing their own thing, they’re building their community on this Fantasy Island, and they decide that they need a bridge, right? They’ve set up shop in ways that, now they’re spending so much time getting around the island that it would really benefit everybody if we just had a bridge right in the middle. They’ve wrestled with how they’re going to do it, how are we going to mobilize the resources to build this bridge? Basically what they arrive at is: Do Nothing writes notes to prove that you spent time building the bridge, and they set a timeline for when you’re going to have to prove that you contributed equally to the building of the bridge. There’s a central ledger, Do Nothing is issuing this new money and it’s comical. I don’t know if it’s intentionally satirical. These conversations that they’re having and thinking like Sledgehammer spending a lot of time on the bridge, but the guy that does all the textile creation in clothing isn’t spending any. He’s so excited about these new shirts, and he’s got extra shirts and Sledgehammer has extra money and what on earth are they going to do? So at the end, they get a bridge and everybody’s contributed to the building of the bridge or they’ve been able to contribute to those who have built the bridge. All the money gets turned back in and they’re like: Alright, great, what should we do now? Then the idea comes up: well, I’ve seen this shiny stuff in the river. Maybe we should go dig that up, and that will be how we established the money is, this gold. So they spend the next chapter, some of them are digging up this river and bringing all this gold and they’re issuing their monies. At the end of they’re like, Oh, what did that do? All we’ve got now is a ruined river and this big pile of gold. Which is so Bitcoin, right? It’s just like, Oh, what do we have now? We’ve got all this carbon coal that we burned in China and nothing really to show for it. So that book is good. It gets them imagining money and gets them thinking about … it goes all the way through. The finance franchise gets developed with the creation of the bank and their over reliance on debt and not issuing credit through the state anymore. The bank gets really greedy, and then the state colludes with the bank to do its thing. Then at the end, they start over and they’re like, “well, we were not going to fall for that stuff again.” Then we read Jakob [Feinig]’s Moral Economies of Money. The parallels between the development and the experimentation and the wrestling with theories of value and production and money as a democratic medium, and that it mobilizes production and the scarcity of money really seems to be a significant problem. We can solve the scarcity of money problem by creating more money. It’s starting to sink in. Along the way, we’ve listened to Saule [Omarova]’s interview with you guys to think about the finance franchise. Then we show Bob and their diagrams and their paper. Now that we’ve gotten to Bitcoin and thinking about digital currencies, that allows us to think, again, about the importance of the philosophy that’s undergirding the monies. This idea of individual, decentralized exchange, and that is not what’s producing stuff. I think it’s starting to sink in. They’ve given some good presentations and done some nice group work, and now they’ve been assigned. I’ve given them all jobs at the Federal Reserve. Their final project is to use the criteria and the four sort of big questions about where does the money come from? How much should we produce? How do we create demand for that money? How do we do these things and those criteria and thinking about should we just edit the US dollar? Some of the ways that it enters the economy, or how much we should produce or the tax circuit? Or do we need new monies in New York state or here in Cortland, like our classroom currency? It seems to be working: we’re mobilizing resources, we’re solving problems. You guys are getting interesting and meaningful work done for loaves and fishes and the SPCA. We’re gathering data with our partners in the Adirondacks about HVAC providers that are part of New York State’s bigger plan to reduce carbon emissions and move to energy efficiency. So we’re doing all sorts of these little things that are adding up, hopefully to big things and, do we need the federal government to issue the money or change the money? Or can you do it at a local level? All those sorts of questions really challenged the idea of governance and challenged the idea of “inside” and “outside” the state and market. I’m having a lot of fun, and I think some of them are having a lot of fun. We’re having writer’s workshop meetings before the break to go over their project and talk one on one, which I think always helps ground the community and get us off on the right track. I don’t know if that answered the question. Next semester with urban I want to continue sort of the same projects in the Adirondacks, but we’ll think about it from the urban economics perspective, and land and land use and data and GIS and all that sort of stuff. It’s pretty fascinating.

Scott Ferguson:  I love this. I think we’ve come full circle because we’re right back at Narrative Economics, but now it’s not a dirty virus that gets in the way of distorting optimal preferences, but instead is the lifeblood of provisioning as an imaginative process. I guess my next question for you that you started to kind of answer is: you ask them to write these proposals, what are the strategies, what are the genres that they can write in? Are they telling stories? You say that they maybe mobilize data in different ways?

Ben Wilson:  Yeah, so in our individual meetings we’re wrestling with their idea that I’ll be able to suggest various opportunities. They could be doing an interview on a podcast. So that could be an interview that they could write. Or the standard sort of field guide, case study style as one of the ways that I think is pretty straightforward. That translates well for professional writing and thinking about that. The writing assignment that has the most freedom that I’ve given this semester is in that 105 class, the Shiller class, where I asked them to write their own economic narrative, and it’s 2050. I just kind of picked 2050 randomly, but it’s actually just about exactly the difference between my age and their age right now. That kind of helps them think about, well, it could be this huge radical change, or it could be sort of still looking fairly similar. But they have the freedom to write a dystopia or utopia and use the different context and stories and what catches fire. How do we rethink the individual as cooperative and altruistic and always interdependent? Or do we keep beating our brains against the wall and trying to separate ourselves and isolate ourselves and be individuals? Homo Economicus. I’m really hoping that these conversations are as fun as I anticipate them being and that they have the chance to free their minds from all the constraints that exist. What is the problem that is keeping you up at night? Right? Is it just about getting a job? Or are you worried about climate, and let’s work through and think about the work that you might do for the rest of your career to make a meaningful and useful contribution to solving that issue? What sort of institutions and support would you need to do that? Hopefully, we’re getting there, because so much of what we talk about is how dire things are, the crises, and it’s awful. But at the same time, we really have to equip them with the vision and the ability to envision a better world than we currently have. I think that that’s something that most of these generations since World War Two in this country have kind of had. That’s under attack right now. Even as the data suggests that this generation of students has got a less than 50-50 shot of having a better income and life outcome than this current generation. That’s kind of terrifying and sad. We don’t want to shackle them with those sorts of doomsday scenarios. I mean, we need to take it seriously. But we’ve got to give them the tools and the freedom to think about what a good and just and verdant and exciting and healthy world looks like.

Billy Saas:  I love that so much. What does a rubric look like? Is an A paper for its convincing portrayal of a dystopia achieved by Goldbug resurrection, insurrection, or the intensity of your feeling of joy and euphoria the vision of a Green New Deal world that they give you? How do you grade this thing?

Ben Wilson:  There’s specific parameters. One of the most important parameters I think students need to get familiar with is following directions. 12 font, double spaced, and then familiarity about where to turn it in. So I use OneDrive and things like this where they’ve got to navigate folders and submit it to the correct space . This is an iterative project, so they’ll submit an abstract or an outline, and I’ll provide comments. How well do you address the comments that I’ve provided? There’s a number of quotations and references and I’m looking for the intertwine of the readings and the materials in the course. Then, I get a little bit of leeway with something like creativity, to sort of emphasize that they should try to have fun with this. I experienced this as an undergrad. My Growth and Development teacher, her assignment was: you are now the leader of this developing country, implement your economic strategy. And I tried to find this paper, because I know that I wrote a super neoliberal, crazy, terrible …

Billy Saas:  Micro loans for everybody!

Ben Wilson:  I remember thinking that it is so good, and free markets. Like everything, you get so influenced by what it is that you’re reading at the moment, and I remember that I got a good grade because I used all the references, and I followed directions, and it was a pretty good story, I think. I could tell that the teacher was just like, oh my god, how did he just totally miss the point of this class? I’ll have some love for the Gold Bug emergence and Bitcoin decentralization occurs. Softens the blow, right?  You know, because we all go through…You gotta have an intellectual crisis at least once in your life, or you’re not thinking hard enough.

Scott Ferguson:  Provisioning intellectual crisis with Benjamin Wilson.

Billy Saas:  Good one-two punch would be you and Larry because his kind of inductive approach alongside your critical narrative driven approach?

Ben Wilson:  Well it’s so exciting to hear that somebody is teaching future teachers how to wrestle with this stuff. Can you imagine the system of education that is cultivating an understanding that money is a productive promise that we are announcing to each other all the time? The Uni project, and the classroom currencies and thinking through Jakob’s book, and the whole thing is really these folks wrestling with how to organize productive activity. This tool is either being used really well, or really ineffectively all along the way. If we could harness that spirit of experimentation throughout our educational curriculum, the same way that we’ve allowed homo economics to infiltrate every dimension of our educational system. All of our disciplines and all of our laws, going back to Oliver Wendell Holmes, giving his “Bad Man” speech at Harvard Square, right? How do we begin to disentangle and take apart all of these ugly structures that assume the worst in one another, and allow us the freedom to experiment and think about production and money and promises in so much more rewarding and effective ways? This sort of thinking is so much a part of social studies, and even the sciences, right? How many great scientific experiments are submitted to the National Science Foundation, they get turned down just because it’s a random selection or the reviewers don’t necessarily like this particular project, or having an affinity to it. Do 91% of the projects to the NSF not deserve to be funded? I can’t imagine that.

Billy Saas:  Then there’s the old thinking about the context of what gets submitted. There is the stuff that is going to satisfy the expectations of the review committee, and that is to sort of colloquially show that you already know what you’re gonna find, right. So, discovery is not a priority in this otherwise discovery-oriented discipline, as a result of monetary scarcity imposed from the top.

Ben Wilson:  Yeah, the question of the unknown. In our conversations about what it would look like if we implemented this full employment program: you don’t know any more than Jerome Powell knows what’s going to happen if they raise the interest rates again. But there’s like, a certain amount of gravitas or so many people saying: yeah, this is what’s gonna happen. That we’re allowed to experiment in that way, but not others. It’s so constraining and so narrow, and it’s so self defeating. It seems like people are finally, at least in the moment, like Galbraith’s piece the other day was really great calling out Jason Furman. Yeah, well where’s that six and a half percent unemployment? Maybe we don’t need to throw people out of work, except for maybe you. Then maybe we can move forward with the business of finding those meaningful and useful jobs. That’s one of the things, selfishly, why I like the classroom currencies and engaging with the nonprofit sector, and in these groups that are trying to solve some of our problems outside the business world, so to speak. Sometimes it is a little bit hard to imagine what all these jobs are going to be and how many jobs we would actually need. If we solve the problem of hunger, what’s next? What’s the evolution of this new care driven economy? How much less material waste do we produce? I think those sorts of unknowns are a lot less scary than the unknown of when we’re gonna burn the final tree on this planet or the ocean isn’t going to be able to support life anymore. I would much rather pursue these other avenues of when there is too much art? When is a workday just way too short? Is it three hours? I put in my half hour today and AI cranked out the rest.

Scott Ferguson:  I’d like to talk about the future of your department. As chair, you’ve discussed with me a little bit in the past that your department is going through a kind of generational turnover, and that the curriculum has been divided and organized in a particular way. The participants who put that plan into place are phasing out and retiring. It’s raising the question of where to go from here. Like all these other topics that we are describing, there’s no automated map for you to follow. Obviously, you’re not doing it single handedly. Being a chair is not being a dictator, or it shouldn’t be. Unless I’m in charge. Can you tell us a little bit about this history of the department and what kinds of questions, challenges, and aims seem to be bubbling up as you reckon with the question of the future of this institution?

Ben Wilson:  This all happened well before my time, so that my institutional understanding of a lot of it is probably guided by conversations and things of this nature. But the short of it is, that a long time ago, they made the decision to create a business economics degree in a liberal arts setting. That turned out to be a really shrewd and an excellent move because over the course of the last 20 years, the department rather than shrinking in size has steadily grown and now we’re the largest department on campus in the liberal arts and sciences. We are operating from a position of strength and stability and the success of that department and our students in those things are all terrific. So we’re wrestling with this question. Out of these 500 majors that we have, 30 of them are economics majors. Is the goal to have a better balance between economics and business economics? Is there a way to more robustly teach the business economics degree as sort of a pluralistic economics degree? I’m a little bit torn. As a political economist, I’d like to see us just teach all these political economy classes. The work of Sanjukta Paul and [Nathan] Tankus on coordination rights and thinking about the firm has been something that I think fits really nicely in the literature for liberal arts management and thinking not of it as management, but as organizational behavior, is the new name. I think that that’s a great sort of way of introducing a lot of heterodox concepts and ideas into a business curriculum. The sole proprietorship is going to, organizationally behave significantly differently than the corporation or the worker-owned cooperative, or the non-profit. So it begins to introduce all the ways in which the corporation will maximize and fit these really narrow value systems of efficiency, production, shareholder value. Whereas the Mondragon cooperative has managed to be a very successful global enterprise for multiple decades by embracing a much more holistic view and a democratic workplace. I would love it to see us sort of embrace this idea of the structure of the organization really matters, and to be training students to adequately be able to assess whether or not I want to run and manage a corporation, or a Mondragon. I think that that would be infinitely more healthy social enterprise and the budding hipness of social entrepreneurship. I think all guide themselves to this idea that we could really create a robust and interesting liberal arts education that gives students the idea to think through these issues. Even beyond, it would turn right back to money, where how we structure access, and who creates and how it is entering the system, and all those things become that coordination right, as well. There’s no inside-outside, we are always all practicing governance. Whether it’s our department or a business or a family or a nation-state, there’s always the possibility for experimenting and decision making and collective decision making that we should be approaching. With all the resources that we have here locally in the Finger Lakes for experimenting in farming and agriculture, tourism. That is just exacerbated up in the Adirondack Park with our partners in our campus up there. I think the possibilities for this really exciting new degree programs that aren’t abandoning business or management, but framing them from a liberal arts perspective is super exciting. That’s not gonna happen overnight. I think a lot of it has to do with how the hiring process goes and that sort of thing, but I think it opens up the possibility especially for grant writing and community partnerships and things in a really exciting and robust way that lots of people are excited about.

Billy Saas:  So where does podcasting fit into the new curriculum at SUNY Cortland, in the economics department?

Ben Wilson:  Great question. I think that’s no more than trying to get other faculty in my department to issue the currency. I would love the communications department to issue for the creation of new digital medias around the reporting and analysis of these new organizational structures that we’re creating in the economics department to mobilize production. Because we need some good news, and we need some good reporting, and we need de-sensationalized our need for breaking news and Donald Trump. Can we just take a timeout from reporting about this person? He’s just not that interesting.

Billy Saas:  A different kind of social media like in a very literal sense.

Ben Wilson:  Yeah, we had a guest speaker, I think it was last year, she did the movie, Tik Tok Boom. It was a pretty good, interesting film about how TikTok is shaping our children’s brains, and how the algorithm works to keep you on it and engaged and how that works for influencing and all that. The heart of the way that that application is structured is all around the idea of attention and attention translates to profits. So how do we create apps that aren’t about that, right? TikTok, it’s not all bad. I think it helped my golf swing a little bit this season. Occasionally, a nice recipe pops up. Otherwise, it’s just a time sink that is so unuseful. TikTok and Facebook, and all these folks are starting to think: we need programmers, but we need programmers who understand some history and the humanities and can communicate. We can desperately not let them go to those platforms. Or take them over, yeah.

Billy Saas:  Maybe from the inside. We’re wrapping up a course in Media Studies, and we just had a conversation about TikTok and the different platforms through Cory Doctorow’s lens of ‘Enshittification’. Are you familiar with this one? The platforms like TikTok, Facebook are designed to degrade right? Essentially, in terms of quality of the experience. They begin as these big, hospitable places in order to get people in, and then the more people get settled in, the less they feel like they can leave. That’s when they turn the levers and start making life more shitty in Doctorow’s theoretical lens. So we talked about with the students what would it take for this ‘Enshittification’ to be reversed? Not to just keep talking about old Money on the Left episodes, but let’s do it. Kim Stanley Robinson, a critical portion of the utopian, mostly utopian near future, a version of climate catastrophe. Part of the story is the development of a public social media. A publicly-funded and non surveillance driven, non ad driven, open platform for social interaction online. That’s where we should send the historians. Let’s build something new and as utopian and far off as that can seem, it seems pretty important.

Ben Wilson:  Yeah, I wonder when you read about the New Deal, and the amazing archives and interviews about family members of former slaves, and the catalog that was developed in that time period: how are we going to know about this time period in the future? Where’s this data going, and who’s cataloging it? Our department is full of file cabinets with all the documents that have recorded the history of what’s been going on in our institution. Now they’re all on our U-drives. Where do those go in the future? And will we even know what our history was, as this technology gets wiped out? I think that’s a lot of meaningful and useful work that’s not getting done right now. Or at least I’m not aware of how it’s getting done or what it would look like. Our vision of things changes as we change what meaningful and useful product is instead of just like, how do we streamline this to be cost effective all the time.

Scott Ferguson:  Do you get resistance in the classroom? Somebody who’s just team Homo Economicus and insists as much?

Ben Wilson:  I think it’s so hard for them to see where I’m coming from ideologically, I think. I don’t know if they know when to be resistant or not. Even when I teach the 301, I do two thirds of the class on neoclassical in 1/3 of the class heterodox micro, with the critique of the neoclassical throughout. At the end, I’ll have two or three students ask me: so are you an Orthodox or a heterodox economist? The real answer is that you’ve got to be both. You’ve gotta keep up with what’s going on so that you’re not straw manning them the way that they do us. But as far as I can tell, the neoclassical model still remains the driving force of so much of the thinking that’s going on. In the Twitterverse, they’ll say, oh, no, that’s not informing our research, and then they’ll post their textbook diagrams in their threads below. I don’t know. I’ve gotten a little bit away from that, because I feel like there’s a little bit of dishonesty there. So in recent years, I’ve just flat out said, I was a really staunch neoclassical orthodox economist, it was in a Ph. D program, and I became disenchanted with what the school of thought was delivering, and I no longer had the feeling that I was doing something that was going to make the world a better place. I really felt lost, and I didn’t know what to do. I left school for a number of years and worked in the professional environment. Then I found out that there was this other school of thought that I could return to, to be part of the academy and teach and that was all very exciting. And so here I am, and every once in a while I look back, and I’ll wrestle with some of the ideas in these pieces. I’ll be like, Oh, maybe that is a meaningful move forward. So I think, as long as you’re never 100% sure of what you’re doing, students respect that. They have the freedom to be an orthodox economist. I’m not gonna tell them no. If you want to do your Orthodox, maximization problems and you find joy and excitement, and you think that that’s gonna make the world a better place, go for it.

Billy Saas:  Just imagine what that looks like. Yeah.

Ben Wilson:  My master’s thesis at Kansas was a factor model. So what’s the impact of institutions on economic growth and development? And there was this really interesting government data that was all like, categorical variables about whether or not they were a dictatorship or not, and the houses of how their government was divided. It was an interesting, fun exercise. It turns out that institutions with more democracies have better economic outcomes.

Billy Saas:  You get a hell of a grant for that one, I’m sure.

Ben Wilson:  Yeah, I mean, so you can still tell good stories from that perspective, I suppose. But I find much more joy and excitement and thinking about social science methodologies, and how to role in the humanities and institutional structures and human behavior as not an individual thing, but as a collective. So I’m gonna stay there for now. Billy, how did your class end up that I talked to, how are those projects?

Billy Saas:  Yeah, so in that class that you visited over Zoom to talk about classroom currencies, the class was called Money, Culture, and Media, or MCM, if you’re into acronyms. But of course, it’s from the MMT perspective. The course, each student is tasked with designing a complementary currency for use in the New Orleans area here, whether it’s in the city or on campus. We had a lot of fun, they did presentations of them. At the end of the semester, we held a vote and the top ones were going to be passed on to the next class. The next class would inherit the top proposals, and then develop and refine those proposals with the idea of iterative design. I think my intervention from the communication perspective was on the design and the discussion and the deliberation back end. Whereas I think a lot of the existing excellent classroom currency assignments are about design, but then it’s also implementation. I’m intimidated as hell of actually rolling out the classroom currency and managing it.

Ben Wilson:  I get that apprehension. That’s probably the most common thing that I hear from folks when I’m like why don’t you do this?

Billy Saas:  Another hang up. So there’s that, and I think it’s understandable. But we also, in that class, talk about grades and debt, like in the framework of debt, and you earn credits, and we’re in this whole accreditation system, and so on. So it ends up being usually a pretty interesting conversation. We’re talking about the rhetoric of debt in economics, and then we just locate it everywhere, like Lakoff and all that stuff. To what extent using the classroom currency as a stand in for, or as a part of their grade is sort of a redundant thing to do. Right? What are we actually achieving other than introducing complexity to the situation in the form of … Maybe complexity is community, complexity is buy in, and maybe that’s worthwhile. I am asking you, I guess, if a student comes up and says well isn’t this just the same as 10 points that you were already going to assign me based on work that I did? I guess for me, the answer is, yes, but we have now talked about it as opposed to just being the de facto.

Ben Wilson:  I think that having the grade component, whether it’s 10% or 5%, that you get that part of the grade through the redemption of the money that you’ve issued opens up the conversation about coercion. Was it even necessary for me to implement this tax? Would I have gotten the same result and the same amount of productive activity without it? Because 10% of a grade for the semesters is a pretty good chunk. It’s also a chunk that they’re guaranteed to get 100% of if they do the work. I think it gives them the choice, how much of this am I going to do? What am I going to do? How coercive is this actually? Because I also have students that just flat out choose not to show up for a midterm. I think it’s an interesting way of thinking about what we’re actually getting out of this credit process and out of education, and how much we’re buying into the way that we’re chunking up these classes and saying, was what you learned working for Loaves and Fishes really 10% of what the learning outcome of this class was, or maybe the most enriching and fundamentally eye open component of the class versus the 25% that I gave you for the paper, the particular readings and all these sorts of things. I think it is worth the physical issuance and redemption process to really drive home that it comes from a particular place first, and that we’re not recycling tax money. That I can always deliver my promise of 10% of your grade, just as the state can always deliver on whatever it is that we collectively promise, whether it’s whatever $1 trillion of military spending is supposed to deliver for us versus however much money I have to mobilize in this class to get the data that I need. We are capable as we the people of making whatever promise we the people want to make. I think employment, education, health care, and all those things are there if we want to mobilize in this different way and wondering and thinking through what the redemption process is in the circuit and how we create demand for satisfying each other’s collective promises, I think it’s an important exercise and thinking about our theories of value.

Scott Ferguson:  It seems to me that it introduces the question of, but also a legitimately new structure of receiveability in the classroom and beyond and among the students because grades are, and credits that they’re earning without the currency, those are receivable higher up the food chain. Those are receivable in the wider institution, and then in different ways on the job market. Maybe for getting into a graduate program, right? There’s many ways in which those grades that they are earning are receivable, but we call it cheating if they try to do horizontal coordination, which I refuse to call exchange, but that’s just me. If they are horizontally coordinating, that’s an illegitimate liquidity, right? Whereas, at least the way I’ve heard it described by you, Ben and Fadhel and some others, there is the possibility for horizontal liquidity. That’s different from the vertical redemption or the vertical liquidity of the teacher to students relationship.

Ben Wilson:  Yeah. I don’t think it’s ever happened where I didn’t have a number of students to weigh more than they needed to satisfy the tax obligation. That might be because they were already doing this work beforehand, or you’re doing community service by mandate already. There’s all sorts of things going on. But there’s also this situation in which a student was like, this was so awesome that I kept going back. This student that was going to feed people at Loaves and Fishes said this is the most rewarding and eye opening thing about people and life, I just did more of it. That’s part of it too, right? When you find reward in your work, that is so insanely valuable. I think that’s an important thing to be teaching our students as anything else, right? It’s not just about clocking in and clocking out, we want to find meaningful and useful work. I love that terminology for the full employment program. So at the end, as we’re closing in on tax day, there’s those students that have way more than they need, and there are students that still haven’t done anything. I’ve issued more than enough to collect and satisfy a balanced budget, should I just close the opportunities, and you guys can now turn to Jimmy and Sarah and Samantha, and you guys can go work for them? Because now they’re the private sector. So that you can get the money that you need to pay the taxes? Then we will hold the vote, right? Should we keep the government open at the risk of running a budget deficit and running a full employment program? Or should we allow you guys to reevaluate your life choices and pull yourself up by your bootstraps and go do some volunteering or gather the data that we’re working with our community partners to build on. 17 hands go up to keep the government open and three hands or one hand will go up to close it. So those sorts of things are surprising and unexpected, and you would think that when you describe it, it just sounds like all the students will go and do exactly 10 hours of community service and that’ll be the end of it, but inevitably these students are unpredictable, right? Just like all of us are, we all have things going on in life. The question about whether or not these folks had “already had these volunteer opportunities lined up for them, is that fair? It was so easy for them, I had to go find it.” It opens up all those really good and interesting discussions that don’t happen unless some of them have the money, and some of them don’t.

Scott Ferguson:  I’ve been thinking recently a lot about my 15 year old son, who is part of this pretty great … I mean we’d like to see college being free for all and open enrollment and all these ways, but living in the state of Florida, we have a program called Bright Futures. If you get a certain GPA, and you fulfill a number of requirements, basically your tuition is taken care of at a public university, which the future of the public university system in the state of Florida is another kind of impending question. But one of the key requirements is 100 hours of community service, and my son’s been doing a lot of these hours. He usually tries to get in an hour a week or so. And I keep thinking about what a tremendous mobilization of young people and their labor, and my son will go to a local nonprofit that serves communities in need, and whether it’s about food service, or working in their thrift shop, he does any number of things. That is a lot of money! That is a lot of money, that is a lot of labor, and yet, we put out a proposal for a university currency system at the federal level, and people think we are insane. Right? And how do we live in a world in which…

Ben Wilson:  And our workers are old enough to work!

Scott Ferguson:  Yeah. How do we live in a world in which one of those models is gigantic, tremendous, in a currently super right wing state, and the other one is absolutely nuts. It is unthinkable. In fact, they’re not that different. I think that the pedagogical experiment of the classroom currency, in constant dialogue, and in this reflexive relationship around the institution, and grades, and coercion can be one way of pulling down the kind of conceptual barriers that make one of those sound totally rational and doable, which it is because it’s happening every single day in the state of Florida, versus these other proposals.

Ben Wilson:  I would imagine none of these students that are trying to participate are having any trouble finding work. There’s so much that needs to be done. I applaud the idea there. I think maybe that’s a way of merging and thinking through the transition from high school to college, and higher learning in an interesting way. Talk about having exposure to some really important social and environmental issues and going into college with those ideas already in mind. Then, having that experience to be able to continue to grow on what it is that you’ve done in the past in new places, with new people and organizations, and build capacity in those areas that doesn’t exist when we’re only relying on volunteerism. That’s really the hardest thing that occurs. I’ve built really good partnerships here, but all my partners are dependent on soft money. Lots of people work in these places as long as they can and then the reality of expenses and mortgages and family and the turnover in the space is just non stop. Programs just end on a fiscal date, and then you gotta start over again. If this program could grow and provide them with that sort of monetary labor stability such that we’re always building capacity and growing and achieving these goals and objectives and missions, that would be terrific. But we’re still …

Billy Saas:  The transitory nature of public good inflation. People come in and do good work, and then they gotta go.

Ben Wilson:  The buffer stock is an interesting pedagogical tool and should we choose gold or labor. If it’s really meaningful and useful work, you don’t want people just picking up and going because they got a higher bid from the private sector. That’s not really building capacity and stabilizing communities in the sort of way that I think creates this ongoing social cohesion and environmental awareness and respect for human life. I think it just falls into that trap that we’re automatons making choices and doing our own thing, rather than part of this much bigger collective that is really something that we need to be more aware of.

Billy Saas:  This has been really great. Ben Wilson, thank you so much for joining us on Money on the Left.

Ben Wilson:  Thank you so much for having me. Please, please if you want to issue your own currency and experiment with this, I am always open to talking and chatting. You can reach me on Twitter at @autogestion77 and it’s a similar handle on Blue Sky. I’m just starting there. bcw@cortland.edu is my email and that’s where I’m bombarded every day by all sorts of things. So it’d be nice to get a question about how to issue currency in my classrooms.

Billy Saas:  Where do we go for job ads and when does the job close?

Ben Wilson:  Oh, that’s good. First week in December, it’s available on the JOE (Job Openings for Economists) and our website, our Human Resources website. Thanks for asking.

* Thanks to the Money on the Left production teamWilliam Saas (audio editor), Mike Lewis (transcription), & Robert Rusch (graphic art)

Monetary Foundations of Education with Larry Johnson

This month, we speak with Larry Johnson, associate professor in the Social Foundations of Education Program at the University of South Florida, Saint Petersburg. In his pedagogy, Johnson focuses on the complex relationship between education, culture, and society with the goal of exploring policies and practices from historical and contemporary perspectives that address structural inequality, and transforming educational institutions into sites for social justice. Johnson is notably a long-time proponent of Modern Monetary Theory (MMT) and variously mobilizes MMT’s insights when training our teachers-to-be. In our conversation with Johnson, we discover just how constrained the US system of public education is by wrong economic thinking and what it would mean to think otherwise. Together, we ask: How do federal interest rates shape US education policy? What do standardized tests have to tell us about neoclassical economics and the nature of money? Why is the rhetoric of education in the United States so narrowly focused on preparing students for careers? How do classist and racist myths of taxpayer financing create unequal schooling? And how could we ever reasonably hope for the political economy of education in the United States to ever be otherwise? Pondering such questions, Johnson opens a window onto his longstanding advocacy for radically rethinking US public education through the lens of endogenous public money theory.

Visit our Patreon page here: https://www.patreon.com/MoLsuperstructure

Music by Nahneen Kula: www.nahneenkula.com

Transcript

The following was transcribed by Mike Lewis and has been lightly edited for clarity.

Scott Ferguson:  Larry Johnson, welcome to Money on the Left.

Larry Johnson:  Thank you. Good to be here.

Billy Saas:  We’re excited to talk to you today about the Social Foundations of Education, which is your area of expertise and something you teach about at University of South Florida. Could you start us off by telling us a little bit about what the Social Foundations of Education are and how one like yourself comes to study them?

Larry Johnson:  Sure, sure. The basic idea is you are trying to look at the relationship between school and society. As an historian, I look at how education is related to political economy and ideology. That really runs throughout the social foundations field. So we’re always trying to think about how, for example, if you’re thinking about kids not doing well in school, we have to look not just at what’s happening in school, we have to look and see, poor communities often–the kids in poor communities often do badly in school because their schools are poor as well. Both the community and the school lack resources, just as an example.

Billy Saas:  And we’re specifically excited to talk to you about the overlap of your research and teaching in the Social Foundations of Education with questions related to what money is and how it works. In fact, I think we have slated this episode, The Monetary Foundations of Education. What do you think of that? Does that work?

Larry Johnson:  Ah, that actually might work. Yeah, yeah. Yeah, maybe even MMT is necessary for education.

Scott Ferguson:  I like it. It’s just too long for our title art, but I do like it.

Larry Johnson:  Okay. I got thinking about issues of the federal budget and how it works fairly early on. When I was in high school, I had a teacher. This is 1965, the year after Goldwater’s run for the presidency. And lots of students in class were Goldwater supporters. They were preoccupied with passing a balanced budget amendment, and they raise those kinds of issues in class all the time. And one day the teacher happened to say, as he was addressing some of these kids, and I can’t remember exactly the context. He told us if we went down to the IRS office in Ogden, Utah, where people in the Rocky Mountain West send their taxes every year. If we paid our taxes, we’ve got a bag full of cash and got down there and paid our taxes with cash, the IRS would shred it. And yeah, so what does that mean? And I just happen to think, well, it means the government doesn’t need our taxes to spend money. And he kind of smiled. That was the end of it. We didn’t go any farther. But I went home and asked my dad about it. And he told me, like he often did: call someone and find out, so call Ogden and find out. So I called. The receptionist was very good. She ended up connecting me with the chief economist at that IRS office. And he got on the phone and said I hear you’ve had an interesting conversation in school. So I told him about it. He said that’s exactly right. If you paid your taxes in cash, we would shred it, because we don’t need that cash. We issue the currency. And that was really interesting. And I must say, the man was very nice. He invited me to come down to Ogden to meet with him. But I was a 17 year old, I never did go. I passed up a real opportunity to learn something. And the next instance where I really got a chance to think about this was the fall quarter of my sophomore year in college, I took a class: general introduction to economics. And the fellow thought it was a guy named George Fuller, a very interesting economist who had read Keynes had read Marx. He used both in the class, and the department had assigned this class to use the Samuelson economics textbook. So what George would do is, we’d go through Samuelson and then he’d give us stuff to read to critique what was in Samuelson. A very interesting way to teach it. During that semester, he gave us a pre-publication copy of something that Hyman Minsky had written critiquing the War on Poverty as a conservative effort to address poverty. So we read that. It was fascinating to me because my dad was a Roosevelt Democrat. Although, he would say he’s a Roosevelt. One time some supercilious businessman tried to correct his pronunciation, and he asked him, How do you say the name of the animal that crows wake up in the morning, rooster or roaster. Rooster. He said Roosevelt. But he was very critical of Kennedy and Johnson, because they simply weren’t doing enough of the kinds of things that Roosevelt did to intervene directly in the economy. And of course, both of them argued that education was the way to solve poverty, which I knew even at the time didn’t make sense, but I wasn’t exactly sure how to make those arguments. So we talked about it a lot, my dad and I. When I got assigned Hyman Minsky’s piece, it really gelled, and he helped me see important ways to criticize the War on Poverty: criticizing it because it did not spend enough money; criticizing it because it wanted to change the people who were poor, instead of changing the economic system. For example, guarantee people jobs or had a full employment policy so people could work. It was always very clear that people who faced long spells of unemployment and frequent spells of unemployment are much poorer than those who are able to work continuously at a decently paying job. So that was clearly the most important thing we can do to address it. Training and stuff was not of any great interest. I wrote a paper about that the next quarter, winter quarter of 1968, in a social psychology class and the teacher was just absolutely enraged, because he was a strong supporter of the War on Poverty and believed it was exactly the way to go and education was the only solution. So we had this confrontation in the class. And, wow, this is really interesting, people really don’t like to be told this stuff. That made me even more interested, so I spent a lot more time trying to find information and then look at it. Then, when I was out of college, I was working for a community action program in Weaver County, Utah where Ogden is. I was put on the Manpower Training Council. John Kennedy passed this law to create these Manpower Training Councils around the country. The whole purpose was you got this federal money, and you could choose programs to train the poor. We were on that for a good couple of years, and it became clear to everyone on the council that this was not the way to end poverty. I mean, you’d have businessmen who really liked the idea of training workers because they want to socialize training as much as they can, the cost of training. But what we needed was more jobs in the county. We needed better paying jobs. So we all began to advocate for that sort of approach. And just reinforced the idea that what we really need is a meaningful full employment policy. I ended up getting my doctorate in education because I wanted to partly address the criticisms of education, which were unfounded, and talk about how education actually fits with our economy and what we ought to be doing, kinds of things. I was always motivated by the history of education, what people have said throughout history the purpose of education was. When I teach my classes, we often start on the first day by looking at what the Manifesto the Plebeians in the French Revolution said: “All knowledge, universities, and schools have to be held in common. If they become the property of a single class, they are oppressive.” And that’s extremely important right? The enclosure movement is driving people off the Commons, and commoners said straight up: you’re not only destroying our livelihood, you are destroying the way in which we teach our children to live. By driving those people off the commons, forcing them into the cities, putting them to work in factories was destroying a way of life. It was also destroying a way of education. They were very tuned into the idea that education has to be for all. Of course, the United States gave Horace Mann who creates the common schools, so rich and poor, Muslim and Christian, would be taught in the same schools. Of course, Catholics criticized his schools for being Protestant. But that’s for another time. So that’s going on. Then, a couple of interesting things happen in the 19th century. African Americans develop very powerful arguments that education should be for liberation. It should help them think about what their freedom means and how to shape it. And of course, you had philanthropists in the North trying to impose what was called industrial education on Blacks. That didn’t have anything to do with industry. It was meant to teach Black teachers how to farm, do all these menial tasks from sunup to sundown, and then get a couple hours of education at the end. Well, let me backup. If you look at the schools that were created to train Blacks by Northern philanthropists, like Hampton Institute, and Tuskegee Institute, one in Virginia and one in Alabama. They promote what was called industrial education, which didn’t prepare Blacks to be in industry at all. These were schools to teach teachers, they were normal schools. But their idea of how to teach teachers to teach Blacks was you’d make them work from sunup to sundown, give them a little bit of training on academic subjects in the evening. But their goal was to work in schools and teach Blacks the value of labor. Odd for people who’ve labored for centuries. But that was their goal. So Blacks clearly understood that that was an education for subordination. What they needed was a much more academic education, what we think of as liberal education, so that they can think about freedom and what it means and how to shape their own freedom. In the late 19th century, you’ve got the Populists, an organization of Blacks and whites, trying to constrain the power, overthrow the power of the planters in the south, and the bankers and railroads in the North. Their conception of education was that education should help us understand the machinery of society, and how to control it to benefit ourselves. How to control it in our own interests as a large working class. Then, one of the statements that my students really gravitate to was from WEB DuBois in a commencement address that he gave at Howard University. He said, “Our task is to out-think, and outsmart the people who own the world.” So they’re very different conceptions of what education ought to be doing. Then we get from presidents of the United States, from John Kennedy, to Joe Biden, that education is about training people for work. And so we need to recognize that people have thought much more deeply about what education is, and why we ought to do it. So that’s how we start and then we move on from there to raise a whole host of issues about education, how it’s related to the economy. I don’t argue with him that there’s no relationship. For example, we know that we in our society use education to compete for things. We compete for jobs, we compete for incomes, we compete for status, and we use education in that competition. So it surely is the case that if you get more education than people in your neighborhood, you have a better chance of getting a job than the people around you. An economist named Barry Bluestone said many years ago: getting an education is like getting a new pair of running shoes to go bear hunting with your friends. On your own, you can’t outrun the bear, but all you have to do is outrun your friends, right? So the bear eats them and you survive. That helps students understand that particular way of thinking about how we use education. Again, that’s thinking just about education in a very narrow way. But it is an important way that we use education. We spend a lot of time talking about why education can’t end poverty. In recent years, we get a chance to see, for example, in 2018, there was a magnificent headline, well two headlines, in the New York Times. One was about how prisoners were being taken out of prison and put to work in factories because the factories couldn’t find enough employees. Okay. And the other one was, employers no longer require drug tests. Okay. Now, for decades, we’ve been told that these people end up in prison, they really can’t get jobs, they’re not job qualified and so forth. And the people who smoke dope, obviously, they’re unemployable. Well, it turns out, they’re not. In a tight labor market, there’s room for all those people to be employed. And that’s important, because it wasn’t that those people got an education in prison that allowed them to go work in an automobile factory. It was that we had a tight labor market, employers were competing for employees, and they wanted to expand the pool of employees. So they wouldn’t have so much pressure to pay them more. So they go into the prisons, they get workers who they would have rejected before, because they would have failed the drug test. But now they can hire them. It really is that these people are functioning as a reserve army of the unemployed, being drawn in when the labor market is tight. All of that helps students to think about education in a much broader way. That all helps students think more deeply about the limitations of the conception of education of our political leaders. They really are misleading us about the role of education. For example, we actually talked about this in class: President Clinton always talked about people who are unemployed and were not job ready, and they needed to get the training, so they would be job ready. Well, the only time you talk about job readiness is when you have unemployment, you’re a political leader, and you don’t want to say, well, I could have different policies, and then people will have jobs. Instead, you put the onus on the unemployed and say: well, they’re just not job ready. But Clinton himself, when he ran for president in 1992, the big conflict between him and George Bush Sr was how low unemployment could go without triggering inflation. Clinton said it could go down to 5.5%. George Bush thought it could only go to 6.1%. So they’re debating this, of course, and they’re saying, oh, unemployment, we have to keep unemployment high in order to forestall inflation. It’s interesting when we talk about that, just as an aside, I tell my students: now if you believe that, how would you distribute unemployment fairly? Would you have a lottery? So it’s not always the same people who get shoved on the unemployment line. But what’s interesting to note is that Bill Clinton, I had this really interesting, short article that for years I had students read. It was titled, “Professors Give the New President High Marks.” Bill Clinton was talking about how low unemployment can go without triggering inflation. Then Clinton says, “we have to have” … It’s interesting, he talks about, these people are unemployed, because we need to have high unemployment, to forestall inflation, but the people are unemployed because they’re not job ready. They don’t have the training and the skills to get the jobs. If we did that, they’d find jobs and it’d be fine. My students read that and just within a couple of paragraphs to get a chance to, okay, here, he’s saying we need high unemployment to forestall inflation. And here he’s saying, we need education so people can get jobs. But if education actually worked and people got jobs, it would undermine his effort to use high unemployment to constrain inflation. Of course, unemployment dropped to 4.0%, and we didn’t see inflation, right? Alan Greenspan, appointed by Ronald Reagan, as chairman of the Fed, continued for many years through the Bush administration through Clinton. He’s saying, well, there is this rate of unemployment that, if we fall below that it will trigger accelerating inflation. But we can’t see what it is. We know it’s there. But we just can’t see what it is. A very odd thing for someone who calls himself an Objectivist to claim, right? I mean, so anyway, you see how Clinton was just simply wrong about 3 million people not having the skills that were needed to get a job. Of course, he’s wrong about the other millions too. Under the right circumstances, of course they would have jobs. They’d be able to do just fine.

Scott Ferguson:  So we’re getting this sense in which your pedagogy around the social foundations of education are not only situating education in a broader social context, but also in a political economic context. And that for you, and for a long time, Modern Monetary Theory, or the ideas surrounding Modern Monetary Theory have been really central. What we’re hearing is that you have a practice of orienting your students to the evidence of the world like. Like a seemingly innocuous article about giving the new president high marks on his economic discourse, how whether it’s explicit or implicit, how the Modern monetary theory perspective makes contradictions in the dominant political, economic and education discourse extremely salient, such that you can’t ignore them. You can’t pass over them. I want to go further into this project of yours. But I want to step back for a second and tell our listeners a little bit about how I’ve gotten to know you in the last year.

Larry Johnson:  Yes.

Scott Ferguson:  You emailed me probably about a year ago. You are a professor at the University of South Florida, as am I. You’re at our St. Petersburg campus, I’m at the Tampa campus. And you invited me to participate on a committee that you were putting together. And that all went very well. There’s no reason for me to talk about the committee work on this podcast. But I remember when you first emailed me, you introduced yourself and said, how about you join this committee? It’ll be good fun. And by the way, I’ve been practicing MMT for something like 40 years. I did like a triple take. I read the email like 10 times and I thought to myself, first of all,: what? I thought I was the only strange Freakazoid at the University of South Florida that cared about Modern Monetary Theory, let alone heterodox economics. Secondly, I was just delighted that somebody else cares. I’m not alone. And thirdly, I was pretty confused because, as far as I know, Modern Monetary Theory is not that old, right? Modern monetary theory came into being in the mid to late 90s, famously on a heterodox economics listserv. And you’re telling me that you’ve been doing this for decades. And I’m just scratching my head. Part of me thought: I’m sure he thinks he’s telling the truth, but is he lying to me? What’s going on? But then it turns out, right, that as you’ve informed our audience, you’ve actually been reading the works of the heterodox precursors to what eventually comes to be known as MMT. Right. 

Larry Johnson:  Okay. Yeah, yeah.

Scott Ferguson:  And then MMT is a much later designation for this body of scholarship. I mean, here’s another aspect to this story that I think is defamiliarizing for me and potentially for our listeners, which is that I think of Money on the Left and our editorial collective as being, along with certain movements in critical legal studies and left law scholarship and activism, I think of us and this generation as being on the vanguard of doing interdisciplinary research with MMT principles and ideas and trying to think about what are the implications for MMT once you start taking them outside of heterodox economics as relatively narrowly defined? And it turns out, I guess you beat us to the punch a long, long time ago. So we genuflect to you.

Larry Johnson:  Well, Thank you.

Scott Ferguson:  But with this background in mind, I’d like to get back into some of this interdisciplinary thinking and pedagogy that you’re doing with your students around education and the political economy of education, and obviously, the sort of political and even radically political importance of education for social justice and environmental justice. But at the same time, the kind of blind spots the normative or hegemonic blind spots that position education as a kind of salve, and as a kind of excuse to perpetuate a society of austerity and all the kinds of sexist and racist and homophobic and ecocidal impulses that are behind it. And I know you’ve talked to us in our kind of preliminary conversations a lot about the way that the rhetoric and politics of testing has informed this kind of dominant impulse of austerity. I was wondering if you could flesh out some of that argument for us?

Larry Johnson:  Sure, sure. Yeah, it’s useful to start with a couple of things that happened in the early 80s, particularly in 1983. Oddly enough, one year. You had the publication of A Nation at Risk; the report from the Reagan administration that claimed that schools were failing, and that’s why we were unable to compete effectively with Japan and Toyota was making better cars than Ford and selling a lot more of them. This report made a number of claims about declines in test scores, what students were and weren’t able to do. I’ll just give you a brief account of that. It has a list of 12 or 13 claims that justify their report. I always have my students go through and look at those claims. One example is that in the report, they say, there’s been an unbroken decline in science test scores for 17 year olds. And this is from the National Assessment for Educational Progress tests, 9, 14, and 17 year olds. So you wonder, well, what about 9 and 14 year olds? Well, I get my students to look up AP scores. And sure enough, those kids do pretty well. There’s no evidence of decline. Then we look at this wonderful graph, and it shows the exact data that the President’s Commission on excellence in education was looking at. You look at the 9 year olds, 14 year olds, and you see no decline in reading, math or science. Same with the 14 year olds. Then you get up to the 17 year olds, and in math and English, they’re doing just fine. But in science, they have a relatively flat line and then a little bit of a downward slope between 1980 and 1979. Before that, there isn’t any data comparable, so they project that data. They assume that well, in the sense scientists assume things I suppose –maybe not scientists, but others — that this brief downward slope they see between a couple of years, that slope continues on into the past. So they retroject or retrodict. Instead of predicting, they retrodict; they predict about the past. And they claim that the scores would have been. That’s how they claim there’s a decline in scores. My students go through and look at every one of those claims in the report, and they find not a single one of them is clearly true. They’re either misleading, they’re false, or you can’t quite be sure what they mean. One of my favorites is that the test scores of students graduating college are also lower. Well, we never had, fortunately, an FCAT testing program to test people as they graduate from college. If you go into graduate school, you take the GRE and stuff, but there’s nothing that we do, like in many states that have tests for kids graduating high school, or maybe their sophomore year in high school. But there’s nothing like that in college across the country, so there really was no way to make that comparison. But if you think about it, test scores are also lower. Well, there’s no clear meaning to it. It’s like the language of advertising. Tied, get your clothes cleaner. Cleaner than rolling around in the dirt? Sure. Yeah. It makes no sense. I have my students look at those kinds of claims. I have them look at a speech that Barack Obama gave his first year in office to the Hispanic Chamber of Commerce. His major Education addresses his first year in office. In this address, I haven’t listened to a clip lately, but he make some claims about Blacks test scores and test scores in general, it’s always objectionable, but he says in the course of this: if we’re looking at our international comparisons of scores in science and math, we have fallen to ninth place. Well I looked at those scores with my students, and it turns out the previous test, the United States, was in 16th Place. So if you go from 16th to ninth, are you falling or rising?

Scott Ferguson: We fell up! 

Larry Johnson:  We fell up. That’s right.

Scott Ferguson:  A tragic ascension.

Larry Johnson:  A tragic ascension. Yes, yes. So it’s pretty clear that Obama wanted to say something negative about education. It’s been common in politics, for presidents at least, for the last 60 or so years. Going back to the 50s and Eisenhower’s time with Sputnik being launched then people say: oh their education systems are better than ours. Which is another matter. It’s one of those things where just you see political leaders want to say something bad about the school system. And it’s very odd, like Obama, if you may recall, between the time he was elected, and when he took office, he was asked constantly about, should we clawback that money from the banks, the fees that they got. He says: no, the sanctity of the contract has to be respected. Then his first year in office, Providence, Rhode Island fires all the teachers in high school, which violated their contract, right? They hire back all but the leaders of the union there, and Obama says we should have more of this. The teachers’ contracts are like straight jackets, they’re keeping us from reforming the schools. I was asked whenever I ran into a strong supporter of Obama’s. I always ask them, I think it’s a question that he should address too, why are contracts with bankers sacred, and those with teachers profane? It’s just amazing how they maneuver to position schools and teachers as the enemy. And that means that they can deflect criticism of their policies and say, Oh, it’s a failure in education. You think about The Nation at Risk, saying, Oh, our education system explains why Japan’s able to build better cars and sell them better than Ford. Well, Japan’s economy went in the tank a couple of years after that. They didn’t say, Oh, that was their education system. And our car started selling better. They went back and said: our teachers are doing this. Of course not. Now I mean, whether we sell cars, that depends on federal policy. It depends on decisions of people that own car companies, all kinds of things, and has nothing to do with education. Education is just an excuse. Let me come back to what was going on in 1983 because it’s very useful. That year is when you see this testing regime really being put in place in southern states. Mark White, Democratic governor of Texas promises teachers he’ll give them a raise. He goes to a businessman and says we want to give teachers a raise. Well, I know you want to make sure the teachers are competent. So we’ll test the teachers, make sure they’re competent, and we’ll test the students to make sure they’re learning. So they invented this whole big testing rigmarole. Ross Perot heads up his committee that creates his reform plan. Bill Clinton in Arkansas the same year, creates a committee on educational standards headed up by his wife. And they come up with exactly the same plan they did in Texas: massive testing of teachers and students. Richard Riley in South Carolina, he became Bill Clinton’s Secretary of Education and does the same thing there. All Democrats in the south. Then Lamar Alexander, the only Republican that I’m aware of, in Tennessee implements exactly the same plan. These ideas are very prominent in the south. It’s odd because these southern states have among the worst education systems in the country. In Tennessee, they ranked 49th in per pupil spending, and their graduation rates are right at the bottom. Same with all these states. But they end up dominating national education policy. There’s no other word for it than just deplorable. These people, they are the ones who put the straitjacket on education, making it much more limited. Their focus on test scores is: we have to test students to make sure they have the knowledge that their future employers want. That’s a question that we should never ask. We need to ask, what do students need to develop fully? What do they need to interact with the world in useful and interesting ways? I mean, if their employer wants them to know something, they should foot the bill to train them. Of course, they don’t want to do that because if they train them, then they can go to work for someone else. They want to socialize the cost of training by putting more and more of the stuff in the schools. But there’s no evidence that employers even care about these test scores. Bill Gates has put hundreds of millions of dollars into improving test scores, and in the old days his job application used to be available online. It doesn’t ask you to give your high school test score. One of my mother’s great nephews, my grand nephew I guess, went to Microsoft to work. He was from California, I asked him, did they ask you for your California test scores? He said, of course not! The only ones that had to get tested were in the keyboarding pool. The typing pool, we used to call it. So they do their typing tests, but nobody else. His whole thing was to program handheld devices. He didn’t have to report his test scores.

Billy Saas:  So what are those test scores doing then? On your read?

Larry Johnson:  Oh, what do they do? That’s a really good question. One is you can always find a way to use them to undercut education. Think of No Child Left Behind. It divides students up into different groups based on race, whatever. And the more time the more groups you divide any larger group into, the more likely you’re going to have a group that falls below some arbitrary standard. So diverse schools. We’re gonna finally disaggregate the scores so we know how Blacks are doing, how Hispanics are doing, this and that other groups are doing. But the more groups you create, the more likely you’re going to have one group that fails. Now, I’m not just saying that off the top of my head. There were a couple of people who worked in the Bush administration who explained very clearly, when they were interviewed, that the goal of No Child Left Behind was to make schools look like they were failing and make it easier to privatize them. It’s a very simple argument. Testing goes way back. When Horace Mann created the common school system in the 1830s. He and his allies figured they were trying to promote centralizing control of the schools more in the state school board. Mann created the state school board in Massachusetts, and he was its first Secretary of Education. He and his allies created a test to test common school kids. You have to remember, common school takes you up to like the third grade, or what we would call a third grade. They had these test questions, they asked all the kids in Massachusetts, and one of the questions was: you’re in Cincinnati, Ohio, and you’re traveling to Vienna, Austria. Name of the rivers, locks and oceans you would travel through on the way. Now you have to ask yourself, do you think Horace Mann or his friends could have answered that question without looking at a globe? I couldn’t! Could I have even understood what it meant when I was a third grader? I’m not entirely sure. So yeah, and another question they had was, if you’re traveling on the Mississippi, is Cincinnati on your right or your left? That’s the question. Well, it depends whether you’re going upstream or down, right? So you literally can’t answer. So the kids didn’t do well on his test, not surprisingly. Mann could step in and say, Okay, we need greater centralization of the schools, greater standardization. People have always understood how they can use testing to achieve a political goal.

Billy Saas:  Just a little anecdote, I live in New Orleans. We have a four and a half year old who’s looking to get into kindergarten, which means they’re entering into a fully charter system.

Larry Johnson:  Yeah.

Billy Saas:  Very overwhelming org charts. They have CEOs at each of these respective charter schools. And there was this really great pitch that they were giving, these are people representing the school system and trying to help us navigate this just circuitous and helplessly bureaucratic, but also, free market. Yay!

Larry Johnson:  Which, by the way, was supposed to do away with bureaucracy, right?

Billy Saas:  Exactly. Oh, my goodness, just looking at my partner the whole time I’m like, this is not efficient. One of the things is that it used to be the case that in order to get into the schools, you’d have to apply to each one, right? And there’s something like 65. Not all of them service kindergartens. So they made it more efficient by creating the one app, or the common app, where you can apply and then you just list your top 5, 6, 7 or whatever. Then you enter the lottery to find out if you get into that one. Two of the kindergartens have testing. They say that the common app is supposed to be, you fill it out, and then everything’s sorted out. It’s something that makes it easier for parents and schools and everything, and it’s universal. But then they make this qualification. This is what happened throughout the entire presentation, it was like: this is the universal policy, and here’s how it is changed at every individual school. And here’s why you as parents need to start researching last year in order to figure out where you’re going to send your kid to kindergarten. But the testing thing is something that everybody knows in that room. It felt like because charters are so dominant in New Orleans, that they don’t have to give an argument for the system. So I asked about the testing, and is that equitable. I happen to know because we’ve talked to people who’ve had students go there before to take the test that they use iPads, and they complete the tests on iPads. And there are many just sort of transparently prima fascia inequitable practices entailed. So we asked the question, how do you ensure that this is equitable? The question can’t be answered because it’s transparently not equitable. That’s why it exists, right, for separation purposes. That goes back to the testing, in general, as a premise for privatization or creating new markets, right?

Larry Johnson:  Yeah. So we wouldn’t test kids unless we wanted to say they were different and deserve something different, unless we had some other goal.

Billy Saas:  Exactly. Right. So when you are outlining this history, you’re drawing a line between Alan Greenspan’s theory of engagement with NAIRU to funding for education.

Larry Johnson:  Yeah.

Billy Saas:  The fact that the chair of the Federal Reserve is in a roundabout, but maybe not so roundabout way, determining the boundaries of education policy. It seems like you do this very deductively over the semester with students. How do you end up at the end of the class without there being a kind of revolt and tearing down the walls of the classroom itself?

Larry Johnson:  Well, yeah, that’s so funny, worded that way, because one of the things I do is when we’re looking at the criticism of education, I quote from Alan Bloom’s book. He wrote a book criticizing schools and stuff, and he says in there: the American education system has totally collapsed. We’re sitting there and I say, look around, collapsed right? Here you are in college.

Scott Ferguson:  Is this The Closing of the American Mind?

Larry Johnson:  Yes, yes. Thank you.

Billy Saas:  The roof might be collapsing in on you. But the firmament is there.

Scott Ferguson:  Yeah because it’s underfunded.

Larry Johnson:  Yeah, we get a chance to look at another strand of those kinds of arguments.

Billy Saas:  But it seems like it is quite literally, you are inducing a revolution or a full scale change in thought and how we understand or are educated to understand what education is and what it’s for. Maybe you could share anecdotally what the student response is to this kind of cumulative macro picture, political, economic situation in education?

Larry Johnson:  Sure. You know, it’s surprising I taught this way at Utah for a number of years. Then, when I came to St. Pete, when I came to USF, it was really interesting. The very first semester that I taught here, I had some incredible students, one of whom ends up on the faculty with me now. But on their own initiative, they continued to meet after the end of the semester, to continue to talk about what to do with these ideas. I’ve had other students tell me that they have taken what they’ve learned and tried to figure out how to use it in an age appropriate way with their students in elementary in high school. I had one woman, this was actually at Utah, who tried to figure out what she could do with this stuff, what she would do teaching first graders, so they could get a foundation so they could resist propaganda later on. Yeah, surprisingly enough, she actually applied for — there was a national group that was providing money, they just chose one person. It was for somebody who was trying to have a transformative career in education. Here she was, and most of these people are already teaching, and they’re coming back for masters and doctors. She was an undergraduate, and she applied with her ideas, and she ended up being a finalist for this. She didn’t get it, but she went a long way. Much further than I expected. It’s interesting to me, I mean, I have students who come back three, four or five years later and say: when we were in class, I thought it was a bunch of garbage. But now I’m out there teaching, I can see why you had to think about this stuff. They’ll talk about how their curriculum is indoctrinating the students with neoclassical economic ideas beginning very early in grade school. So they’re thinking, okay, now that I have different ideas, how do I respond as a teacher? What can I do? They often come back and ask me and I’m not always much help. I’m usually a listener and ask them questions, try to figure out okay, what do they want to try to do? Okay. You want your students to understand this? Their first graders. Okay, how do you get them to think about this so it doesn’t fall back on the standard “the federal budget is like the family budget.” Okay, how do you help them to do that? And how do you help them understand that the federal government issues currency? Once you understand that it changes everything.

Billy Saas:  The fact that it prints the currency, that it makes the currency, that it circulates the currency is, in this case, maybe not as important as highlighting that, at the same time, it doesn’t do it. Like when it doesn’t want to do it, and to what ends it is not?

Larry Johnson:  Oh, yeah.

Billy Saas:  To those first graders, the reason that we don’t have music class anymore is because the chair of the Federal Reserve thinks that unemployment is too low or whatever, right?

Larry Johnson:  Yeah, so we’re gonna cut everything back. And that means you’re gonna have less in school. Now, they’re not gonna have less in school up on the east hillside where the rich kids go, but we’re gonna have to get by without trumpets and clarinets, for band class.

Billy Saas:  Because our test scores are low.

Larry Johnson:  Because our test scores are low. That’s right.

Scott Ferguson:  I can speak from experience that …

Larry Johnson:  Please do.

Scott Ferguson:  Teaching some of these fundamental principles of public endogenous money gets easier and easier the younger and less indoctrinated your audience is. I can say this about my own children. I mean, my now 15 year old, I think I probably started talking about MMT when he was four, four and a half, and I never stopped. It’s very easy to just begin with money is something that is public and comes from the government and is organized by the government. It is given out and not given out in different ways. Where teaching MMT gets very, very challenging is when you have to cut through all of the neoclassical assumptions and garbage and even cut through some of the more critical approaches to political economy that sometimes come out of the Marxist tradition, and Polanyi, and some of these other traditions. It’s when you have to unwind those worldviews when things get very difficult. The basics of MMT, I mean …

Larry Johnson:  Are pretty easy to understand.

Scott Ferguson:  Pretty easy. I mean, some of the stuff about the interest rate is supporting this and that and the financial system. We don’t have to talk about that with the four and a half year old. But nevertheless, I think it is a lot easier.  I’m actually curious to hear you talk a little bit about pushback, if you get any? When I’m teaching, I don’t get a lot of pushback, but I will get a lot of bewildered faces. Like huh? But I know you’ve told me about, I think I recall, parents have contacted you kinda wagging their fists on some of this stuff?

Larry Johnson:  They’re less resistant!

Scott Ferguson:  Yes, yes. They think I’m indoctrinating their child. But what I found exciting about all those things is that the students were going home and talking to their parents and their spouses and their kids about all this stuff. I mean, that’s great. Yeah, I’m happy to talk to any of them. We don’t have to agree. It’s about, you know, stating the debate.

Larry Johnson:  That’s exactly right. I always hide behind that.

Scott Ferguson:  No, but it is both true.

Larry Johnson:  It is. I’m not trying to change what you believe, I want to change what you understand. I want to help you to understand things that you may not have understood before. You can think about this. And I know my students will think about it for years, and come back and tell me they’ve continued to think about this stuff.

Billy Saas:  Well, I think that you’re talking about the deductive approach, as I’ve called it, where you’re putting the evidence in front of them in sequence over time so that it’s not … If it’s indoctrination, it’s very passive, right?

Larry Johnson:  Very much, yeah.

Billy Saas:  And can’t be considered indoctrination to the extent that you’re just sort of questioning things, right?

Larry Johnson:  Yeah, and it’s funny how students will come to insights. I remember, I was talking about a student we were talking about. Actually, this is kind of funny because I often these days will show undergraduates and graduates the little collection of video clips that one of Stephanie Kelton’s postdocs did where they have people talking about the budget deficit and all that stuff: Obama leads, oh, we’re out of money. We have to get our credit card with the Bank of China, blah, blah, blah. They’ll watch that, and we’ll talk about it. Along the way, we’ll talk about Obama. This is very interesting in, say, 2018 when unemployment had dropped down well below 4%. We talked about Obama, what his beliefs were about the budget, which was always interesting. I’ll mention, you know, his position was that unemployment couldn’t drop below 5.4%. without triggering inflation. 1/10 of a percent better than Clinton, right?

Scott Ferguson:  Progress!

Larry Johnson:  Yeah, progress. Yeah. This kid who had been pretty quiet most of the semester, pipes, and he says, but he was wrong, wasn’t he? I said yes! And for that student, that conversation opened it up, and he’d go back and look at stuff we’d read, that he just hadn’t comprehended. But for some reason, understanding it that day opened up the whole semester for him.

Scott Ferguson:  You never know when it’s gonna happen.

Larry Johnson:  That’s right. It’s kind of the neatest thing. Yeah. Wow, you have a kid back there. He doesn’t say much. He’s kind of you know, morose. He’s just coasting through. And then suddenly, something happens. And you figure a lot of stuff out.

Scott Ferguson:  We’d like to talk to you a little bit about the history and structure of school financing in the United States. And neither of us are experts at this.

Larry Johnson:  Me either, there are people that know a lot more about this than I do.

Scott Ferguson:  Okay, well we still want to pick your brain. As you know, we became interested in this question in higher education, which has an entirely different financing structure, and its own history. We were responding to the calls for downsizing, and austerity, and the elimination of departments, and greater adjunctification, and the exploitation of staff and students and graduate workers, et cetera, et cetera, especially during the pandemic. And the idea was that there was some natural occurrence of this virus and yeah, and state state revenues were going to drop. And so there was really no choice but to not not let the crisis go to waste, so to speak. And to cut, cut, cut are already struggling Universities, especially the big public ones. And we came up with a proposal that understood money as public and as endogenous. And as designed. We called it the uni short for university, a kind of university currency. But we named it the uni to rhyme with Muni, because the Federal Reserve, we’re mounting with all kinds of Windows, so to speak, for various sectors to take advantage of to stabilize their liquidity access. And they have opened up a Muni right. Liquidity facility. And we were first arguing that, well, if it’s good enough for municipalities, why isn’t it good enough for big public university systems? And then over time, we began to experiment and rethink this. And later on, we were thinking, well, maybe we can, we can structure the financing of the public university system across the country, via the Treasury, and maybe we can bake this into the proposed public Banking Act. And this can be public financing as needed for the public purpose through these major centers of research, and these economic anchors and all kinds of regions. And you’re familiar with this proposal. I think a lot of our listeners are familiar with this proposal. And what I would say is, you know, this, this would be interesting to me to contemplate, for K through 12, which I’ll just say what little I know about K through 12 financing, which is that it’s his Historically tied to property taxes, I think at the county level, which is already deeply classed and perpetuates the myth, that taxpayer money finances, things instead of, instead of anchoring the currency, and, you know, we we draw on the work I’m not sure if you’re familiar with her work. Her name is Camille Walsh. She’s a historian who wrote a book called racial taxation that’s all about tracing the kind of rhetorics of taxpayer citizenry, taxpayer citizenship, in the history of American education, policy and politics, and and essentially making the argument that this becomes a highly racialized in addition to a class category, that that of course, justifies, justifies the perpetuation of itself. So I’m wondering, what do you know about the financial structure of K 12 education in our country? And how would you maybe recommend going about transforming it with public, endogenous money in mind?

Larry Johnson:  Yes, very much. Yeah, actually, let me shift gears a little bit, and talk a bit about the effort to restrain the universities. As you may know, in the middle of the 20th century, Republican and Democratic governors had created a higher ed system in California, that was tuition free. You did not pay tuition from community college up through your doctorate if you’re a resident of California. When Ronald Reagan decided to become a right winger, he was the perfect candidate for them to run for governor and he succeeded. He set about attacking universities right away, because universities, of course, he and his allies saw as the origin of the civil rights movement at colleges and universities. The origin of the anti war movement, blah, blah, blah and set the state police out to pull protesters down the marble steps at the administration building there at the University of California, bouncing off the marble steps. Then, even though tuition free colleges and universities were very popular in California, he was determined to impose tuition. A guy who was working in the Nixon administration named Roger Freeman went out to consult with Reagan to help him do this. Freeman was quoted in the San Francisco Chronicle as saying, we have to be careful about who we let into and through our universities, because we are in danger of creating an educated proletariat, and that’s dynamite. Spiro Agnew said, straightforwardly, we’re letting too many Blacks into the universities, we need to stop that. Nixon himself made several comments about making universities more expensive. Now, universities were free in California, but across the country, they were much, much cheaper than they are today. When I was a sophomore in college, it’s actually in the economics class I told you about. I wrote a paper that compared tuition in the state at universities that were designated the liberal arts university in the state, sometimes people call them flagship universities like University of Florida here. Then the state universities like Florida State and Utah State, and then state colleges, like Weaver State College in Utah and well New College here. I looked at all 50 states and I looked at their liberal arts university, the State University often had been called agricultural colleges in the past, agricultural mechanical colleges, and then they were all universities, the University of Utah, Utah State University, Colorado, Florida, Florida State. Then, the college system. In the university system, our tuition, across the country, paid between 11 and 14% of the cost of the college education going through a bachelor’s degree. The rest was paid by the state, some federal money, grants, other things, some foundation money. But, state appropriation was a big chunk. Tuition paid a very small percentage. If you looked at the state colleges, that tuition covered about 7% of the cost of the students’ education. People that allied themselves with the right wing of the Republican Party, not the Lincoln wing, which is rapidly disappearing. Their goal was to make universities more expensive, and restrict and make administration more controlling, so they could make the universities do what they wanted, rather than have them be an independent source of criticism, and so forth. They were really pushing that idea and trying to make it so that universities were not as open or inviting or accessible to nearly as many students. Some people say they didn’t anticipate the students would be willing to go into debt with student loans like they have been to get a college education, which really shows how important they are to students. Maybe they were, and that was okay, because that would then strengthen the banks, you had all this debt to the banks. In any case, their goal was to change the universities so they were not criticizing the church and the state. Going back, I used to joke with people all the time. Universities need to understand why Roger Bacon was willing to go to prison in the 13th century. Universities have a long history and have a long history of challenging sources of power. That’s an essential part of what universities are. That’s not the only thing universities do, but it’s one thing they have done, certainly from time to time. So, if you’re representing an authoritarian wing of politics, you want to restrain that at the very least. You want to focus universities on doing things that will benefit corporations or the capitalist class, generally. You don’t want them to be a source of criticism. One way to do that is by restricting access to universities by the working class.

Scott Ferguson:  So can you speak to the problem of K through 12 financing? And if we were going to harness the powers of public endogenous money, that’s just step one. What happens when we need to implement it and implement it in a democratic and inclusive way?

Larry Johnson:  Right, right. I think the problem there would look very much like the problems with universities. How would you make sure it would be used for things that benefited the students or society, rather than some other interests in the community?

Billy Saas:  Say a CEO.

Larry Johnson:  Yeah, paying a CEO. We know with charter schools, they pay their CEOs far more than school principals get paid. In New York, an organization had two charter schools, and the CEO over this, they called it a network of charter schools, was paid more than the Chancellor of Education in New York.

Scott Ferguson:  I like that you laugh at these atrocities. I think it’s healthy.

Larry Johnson:  The only way you can keep fighting. But Juan Gonzalez has written some really neat stuff back in the days when he worked for the New York Daily. He had some really neat articles about what’s going on with charter schools and how they were paying their CEOs exorbitant sums. And of course, that’s what they cared about. You take the Pay for Success stuff that Barack Obama promoted, and George Bush actually started, but they would pay people to …Like the banks, social impact bonds. You get some money from Goldman Sachs. Actually, in Utah, Goldman Sachs was part of this. They came in and they offered programs for disabled kids. Then, each year that those disabled kids stayed out of special education classes, stayed in regular classes which reduced the costs, Goldman Sachs got paid for it. Which, to my mind, is insane. For Goldman Sachs, it was a way for them to get money out of the public schools. This is a big deal. If you read Barack Obama’s Every Student Succeeds Act, it’s filled with that. Obama takes away states’ right to limit or prevent charter schools. He says, Every state, if they’re going to receive Title One money, has to allow charter schools. And all the states have to engage in what he calls Pay for Success, this whole system where somebody comes into the program, and it works, you pay them. Like with Goldman Sachs in Special Ed, if you continue to see benefits in your schools, then they’re entitled to get some kind of compensation, because they’re continuing to benefit the school system. That’s a very destructive way to treat the education budget. People have to realize, public education has a budget of right around $800 billion. Students don’t often realize that. That’s a lot of money. If you can privatize this and still keep that money stream going, you can make a lot of money. If you can get even a small share of that, the biggest share of that is state funding. Federal funding is a chunk of it, and then you’ve got local millage and so forth, it provides some of that. That’s a lot of money to spend. You divide it up per student, and you see it’s not a whole lot per student. But the problem is, it’s not distributed equitably. Schools that serve wealthy families may, as Jonathan Kozol points out, get 10 times what schools serve poor families get per kid. Certainly, two or three times as much. I mean, I’ve seen those examples myself. If you think about what happened in South St. Pete, when they re-segregated the schools, they actually reduced the funding going to the segregated schools that would serve just Black kids on the south side. It’s just remarkable. That happens partly because we don’t have a strong enough democracy to control it. We’ve limited the vote, we’ve restricted voting in ways where, if you’re in one of those communities, you simply it’s harder to vote, you don’t have the standing to go to the school board and speak. So I often tell students, if we want to improve the schools, we have to make sure we have universal suffrage. Everybody votes, everybody gets counted. You have to have universal employment, job guarantee, everyone has a job. I used to spend a lot of time organizing poor people to go to the school board. They would ask these people, I mean, they would show up certainly in a different quality of clothing than the school board members wore, for the most part. They would ask these people what they did for a living, and they’d say I’m unemployed. Once they said they were unemployed, you could see people stopped listening. They just don’t have the standing to be heard. So you have to organize in other ways to get their voices heard. You have to put pressure on the board in other ways. But if we had a job guarantee, those people would have standing to speak for their own kids to push for the schools to serve their own kids. Then, I think you could have a chance. One, you could prevent the kind of destructive use of funding or use of funding to destroy schools that serve poor kids. You could actually have people getting something better out of that. Say for example, we had a government through whatever mechanism was willing and able to willing, obviously they’re able to issue the currency so that we could have more money for schools. Really, for poor schools, schools serve kids who are disadvantaged in a variety of ways. That would be great. But unless we control the political situation, that money wouldn’t be spent where I would argue it needs to go. We’ve got to address that political issue so that no matter how much money we can create, it goes to the right places. Don’t use it to fund wars. We use it to actually provide a decent education for kids. I’m always amazed at how committed parents are to education. They need to get that support, the money coming into their schools. We people talk about the schools here in St. Pete, how terrible they’ve gotten after resegregation. But still, most of the parents even though they know there’s a lot of violence in the schools, they know the teacher turnover is high, they have the least experienced teachers, and a curriculum that they don’t necessarily find engaging. But nonetheless, they send their kids there because they believe that the kids will get something valuable. That’s true across the country. I remember attending a conference 30 years ago where a woman was talking about the schools in Chicago, and she described them grimaced, the way Jonathan Kozol describes the schools in his book and in poor communities, especially poor Black communities. The window encasements are falling in, there’s sewage coming up through the drains, or even out on the playground. She describes the schools, and then she shifts and she talks about only 57% of the students graduating. I’m sitting there thinking: if I had a school look like that, I wouldn’t go. I would just tell my parents, I’m not going. But 57% of these kids persisted and graduated from high school. That’s remarkable. That’s an extraordinary commitment to schooling. We ought to support that by actually spending the money. It’s hard to imagine how you would organize a movement to get that funding now from state legislatures. But if you could use the issuing of currency to take away their argument that they can’t afford it, then at least we would talk about it in real terms. It’s okay, well, this is what the kids need. We don’t want to give it to them. It forces them to say, we don’t want to give it to them rather than what we can’t afford.

Scott Ferguson:  It forces the class and racial and, and sexual politics to the forefront rather than having those be hidden behind seeming not laws of nature and economics.

Larry Johnson:  Yes. We can never explain why we can’t afford it here, but up there, suddenly, we can afford it. We can afford it last year there, but not this year here. Yeah. That funding is always used to dodge what needs to be done, dodge having to say straight out what they’re actually doing. If we took care of the funding issue, then we can have a much more vigorous debate about what we ought to do, and why we ought to do it. That’s not it’s not a very technical discussion of school finance. It’s what matters. Yeah. That’s an important part of how I see this. It takes one of the most destructive arguments that never leads anywhere off the table. Because now they can’t use it. We understand we can spend the money if we choose to. That’s what we have to address if we choose to. What do we choose to do? Clearly a political problem. Yeah.

Billy Saas:  What a wonderful way to start winding down. Probably a good place to end it but I can’t help myself. I like in my classes where we talk about the job guarantee. I have a similar sort of let’s take steps there and kind of stumble into the revelation and see how encompassing this is. I like to pose the question, visa vie education and money, what would happen to education if there were a robust, strong, universal job guarantee where the jobs paid well, had benefits, did not require in most cases, or if any, credentials in the same way, because you’re learning on the job, right? You’re learning the job while doing it. What do you think would be maybe the most radical changes if we had a robust job guarantee?

Larry Johnson:  I actually asked my students exactly the same question. If we had a job guarantee. What would that mean for education? How would education look differently? How could it look differently? My students, probably because they’re my students, then say: then we could do the things we ought to do in education. We can help students understand the world. We can help them study examples of how people built coalitions to get something they want in the world, that kind of thing. And it would take the straitjacket of job preparation off of us.

Billy Saas:  What’s exciting and makes me a little bit anxious is, it reduces the priority of education in its kind of strongest rhetorical sense, as we’ve been critical of it. Right, it becomes less important.

Larry Johnson:  Yeah, you know, it’s funny, I actually have had a student say, only one, fortunately, in 30 years, that: if we do that, how are we going to motivate students to do well in school, if we can’t tell them they have to do well in school in order to get a job and they need a job in order to survive? Well, then you have to find other ways to make what you’re teaching valuable to the student. I remembered going through school having teachers constantly talk about, when you’re in third grade, or well, my third grade teacher didn’t do this. When you’re in second grade, my second grade teacher actually did this: when you’re in sixth grade, you’ll need to. Everything’s about preparation for the future, and then in junior high it’s: you’ll need this for high school, and you’ll need this when you apply for a job. I had my student read a piece which actually addresses this question. The people who pushed vocational education, really, were able to establish this idea that the purpose of schooling is job preparation. So they get a chance to read some of the people who make these arguments and they read a really nice piece from a different perspective, comes back and says, …Herb Kliebard characterizes this process: All education is just shilly-shallying, waiting for the future. There’s nothing of value in itself at the time. And arguing as Dewey did, that we need to make education valuable to kids at that time. We have a sense that there are many things they need to understand about the world in order to make the world the place that serves them, a good place for them to live. They need to understand those things. They need to have those conversations. They need to be educated and learn things so that they can have those conversations. Like Blacks in the 19th century wanted education, to give them the intellectual tools that they needed to discuss what freedom would mean for them.

Billy Saas:  The return to education as liberation. Yes. Not shilly-shallying your way to a job. Well, increasingly, the carceral apparatus of the state is working to ensure that you are there shilly-shallying, and you have no other option.

Larry Johnson:  That’s right. Yes, for sure. And nothing else can be of any interest to you. I was like my parents’ attitude. When I was growing up, we didn’t have much homework in public schools, not in grade school. The only time you had homework was if you were sick, and you missed a few days, and sent some stuff home to catch up. In high school, not a lot of homework. I tried to do most of my work in and around my classes. So when I got home, my time was my own, I could do other things. My parents really supported that. Don’t just stay locked into school. You don’t want to be someone who comes home and then just goes into your little cubicle and continues doing schoolwork. This is the time for you to do other things you need to develop other things. If you do that, you’ll get more out of school. So that was a really interesting approach. They were very clear about that. My mother was a schoolteacher. They just said, you can’t have everything revolve around school. I was so surprised when I came to Florida. I happened to go to an eye doctor’s office, right when I got here, and a secretary was bemoaning how she had spent four hours the night before helping her second grader with homework. What can you do to a second grader, that would take four hours, it would be in any way useful. Of course, what you find out with all this crazy homework is the parents do it. Because it’s not of any value to the kids. They can understand it. I noticed that my great grandkids get assignments. I remember this a few years ago, they gave my great grandson something to do on the computer. The computer program was so clunky, it was virtually impossible to figure out what he was supposed to do. They gave instructions very briefly at the beginning, then you entered in part you’re supposed to do. There was no way to go back and listen to the instructions without exiting, and going back and starting. I was sitting there watching him and I said: boy, you are patient, you must have gone out and started that five times to get clear on the instructions. He said yeah, it’s what I have to do. I said I would have given up.

Billy Saas:  Near guarantee that that software cost the school quite a bit of money and was sold by a private vendor who contracted someone else out to slap it together and there was no oversight.

Larry Johnson:  Oh, gosh, I’m absolutely sure that’s true.

Scott Ferguson:  And that’s why there’s homework.

Larry Johnson:  Yeah, that’s why there’s homework and homework that can’t be done. What better way to do it, than you ensure?

Billy Saas:  The lesson that you’re supposed to learn is very clearly secondary to the lesson that you’re actually learning about how impossible this whole thing is.

Larry Johnson:  Yes, yes. I could never understand how students, I mean, clearly, well, off family students managed to get through this stuff. Maybe it’s just because school makes a decision that they will get through. It doesn’t matter what they actually do. How do they learn to pass these tests? One of my students said, Well, one thing if you’re lucky enough to go to school in a rich community, you learn you don’t think about anything too much. You learn what you’re supposed to say, and that’s what you do. I had a student who I thought had misread a passage and something we’d read the other day. I criticized her and gave her that feedback. She got back and said, No, no, this is what the piece said, and this is what I said. She copied and pasted from each. And I looked at it and I thought, I think you left a note out of what you said, and she got back to me. She says, Yeah, I did. I left a note out of it. And I said, Well, you were willing to read the feedback, and follow up on it. That’s the whole purpose of this. If you had gone through this in a discussion group, I would have given you full credit. You went through with me, I probably would still give you full credit. She was willing to come back and challenge my feedback, which I thought was excellent. That’s what you hope your students will do. So look at it, think about it, try to understand it, and come back. So I said, You’re doing everything I could ask of the student.

Scott Ferguson:  I think that is a beautiful place to end our conversation. Larry Johnson, thank you so much for joining us on Money on the Left.Larry Johnson:  Thank you. It was great talking to both of you. Take care.

* Thanks to the Money on the Left production teamWilliam Saas (audio editor), Mike Lewis (transcription), & Robert Rusch (graphic art)

Reparations for Black Americans w/ William A. Darity

We’re joined this month by William A. (“Sandy”) Darity to discuss reparations for Black Americans. Sandy Darity is Samuel DuBois Cook Professor of Public Policy, African and African American Studies, and Economics and the director of the Samuel DuBois Cook Center on Social Equity at Duke University. A founding theorist of stratification economics and foremost scholar of the racial wealth gap in the United Stats, Darity is perhaps best known for his committed public advocacy for acknowledging, redressing, and resolving histories of racist violence against enslaved black people and their descendents through a federal program of reparations for black Americans. In April 2020–just weeks into the COVID-19 pandemic and two months before the global uprisings that followed the murder of George Floyd–Darity and co-author Kirsten Mullen published the book From Here to Equality: Reparations for Black Americans in the 21st Century. We speak with Professor Darity about this book–including its conception, reception, and circulation over the last few years. We also ask Darity about related projects like his proposals for “Baby Bonds” and a Federal Job Guarantee. We conclude, finally, by suggesting that the U.S. Treasury mint a $12 trillion-dollar platinum coin featuring prominent figures from the black freedom struggle for the purpose of financing reparations and educating the public about how money works.

Visit our Patreon page here: https://www.patreon.com/MoLsuperstructure

Music by Nahneen Kula: www.nahneenkula.com

Transcript

The following was transcribed by Mike Lewis and has been lightly edited for clarity.

Billy Saas:  Sandy Darity, welcome to Money on the Left.

Sandy Darity:  Thank you. Thanks for having me.

Billy Saas:  It is such a pleasure to have you. To get us started, you spoke just a few days ago at the reparations symposium at Spelman. It was put on by the Spelman Social Justice Program, and it was meant to be a dinner and a discussion. I’d be interested to know the shape of that conversation in late September 2023; what were some of the key takeaways and points of excitement that might have come from that dinner and discussion?

Sandy Darity:  Well, I did the presentation as a conversation, and the other person who was participating in the conversation with me was my partner, Kirsten Mullen, who is the co-author of our book From Here To Equality: Reparations for Black Americans in the 21st Century. There were two faculty members from Spelman College who posed questions for us to answer. One of them is Cynthia Spence, and the other is Romie Tribble. I think it was a pretty lively exchange because the best part of these discussions always is the question and answer period, and there were some very, very provocative questions that were raised. Most of them concern our perspective about who should be eligible to receive reparations from the United States government under the orbit of what might be referred to as African American reparations. A lot of the discussion hinged on our perspective about states and localities conducting projects that they call reparations, something that we’re extremely skeptical about. Then, there were a number of questions that concern the issue of how you would go about financing a reparations plan. So I think those were maybe the three hot button issues that came up during the course of our conversation.

Scott Ferguson:  To me, one of the thornier questions is: who counts? How did you answer that question?

Sandy Darity:  Well, I think for about 20 years, we have had an answer to that question. I’m not sure it’s an answer that’s acceptable to everyone. But we have proposed for a long time that the eligible community for reparations from the United States government, for African Americans, should be those Black Americans whose ancestors were enslaved in the United States. And so we’ve advanced a two pronged criteria for eligibility for reparations. And the first prong is: an individual would have to meet what we refer to as a lineage standard. That is to say, they would have to demonstrate they have at least one ancestor who was enslaved in the United States. But in addition to that, and this is the second prong of the criteria, they would have to meet an identity standard, which for us, involves self-classifying oneself as Black, Negro, African American, or Afro American for at least 12 years before the adoption of a reparations plan, or the adoption of a study commission for reparations. So our view is that the individuals who may be living as white in the United States, who might happen to have an ancestor who was enslaved in the United States should not be eligible for reparations. And similarly, individuals who are Black, who are immigrants from other parts of the Black diaspora, should not have an expectation of receiving reparations from the United States government. Now, from my perspective, they are fully deserving of reparations, but not necessarily from the United States government. Their countries of origin should be seeking reparations from the nations that colonized and enslaved them. Some people complain about this, but we do accept the existence of the nation state structure as being relevant to the way in which reparations should be executed and administered.

Billy Saas:  Well that nation state structure is certainly very relevant to the question of financing. At risk of asking you to repeat everything that you talked about at Spelman just a few nights ago: how did those conversations go on that end? I know the financing one is something that we are particularly interested in.

Sandy Darity:  I think it’s important to explain that we have been pursuing a very specific set of standards for determining what the amount is that is due. That, in turn, influences the way in which we think about financing reparations. So in the work that we’ve done, we’ve highlighted the racial wealth gap as the central factor that needs to be addressed by a reparations plan. And based upon data from the survey of consumer finances for 2019. For some reason, they have not yet issued the results for the 2022 survey. I expected that to be out by now, but apparently it’s not. So if I just stick with the 2019 survey, I come up with an estimate that the average Black family or Black household has about $841,000 less in net worth than the average white household. And if you were to try to construct a rough estimate of how much that amounted to per person, it would be about $350,000. If, in turn, about 40 million Americans who are Black whose ancestors were enslaved in the United States, if those 40 million persons were multiplied by $350,000 per person, you come up with a number of approximately $14 trillion. That’s the baseline from our perspective for the amount that is due under a reparations plan. And we focus on the racial wealth gap, because we think it’s the best single economic indicator of the cumulative intergenerational effects of white supremacy. So that said, it poses a major difficulty for states and localities to even approximate getting to that number when their total combined budgets are less than $5 trillion. And in addition, if we were to think about generous individuals who felt some sense of obligation to address the nation’s history of racism, putting together a fund where they cast in $1 billion on a monthly basis, so $12 billion a year, it would take a millennium to get to $14 trillion. So it’s really only the federal government that has the capacity to meet a bill of that magnitude, particularly since the federal government, and this is where the MMT dimension comes into the conversation. The federal government is not constrained by tax revenue, in terms of its spending activity. From our perspective, the only constraint is the danger of producing significant inflation from any expenditure that the government makes. We spent a bit of time in the final chapter of our book, trying to talk about ways in which expenditures for a reparations plan could be designed in such a way that they mitigate the inflation effect. And we suggested two very simple steps. The first step is that you could space the payments out over a period of time so that the amount of expenditure in any given moment, or a given year, would not be as large as it might possibly be if the total amount was distributed at once. And then we say, we’d like to constrain that to a 10 year period. We wouldn’t want the reparations payments to be spread out longer than a decade. But then the other way in which you could limit payments is by providing people with direct payments in the form of less liquid assets. So, part of the reparations payments might be direct cash transfers, but they could also be an endowment. It could be a trust account. Could be some form of an annuity. I don’t have the expectation that people would have no savings whatsoever in the absence of these kinds of constraints, but you could, in some way, kind of force a higher rate of savings, and thereby reduce the potential inflationary effects, as well. So that’s our concern. It’s not whether or not you’ve got the tax money to do it. It’s whether or not the distribution of the funds under a reparations plan would trigger a significant depreciation in the value of the currency. That’s something we would not want to have happen.

Billy Saas:  You’re talking about the final chapter of From Here To Equality: Reparations for Black Americans in the 21st Century, which, correct me if I’m wrong, came out in April of 2020?

Sandy Darity: That’s right. Then we have a second edition that came out last fall in paperback. And the only real difference is that the paperback edition has a new preface that we prepare, trying to bring the conversation up to date,

Billy Saas:  Right, which would include everything that happened around that time, and after!

Sandy Darity:  And especially January 6, 2021.

Billy Saas:  So what was it like having that book come out in the thick of the early days of COVID, and just before, some of the most significant social and political action in the United States in some time.

Sandy Darity:  We had hoped that the book would prompt a renewed conversation about reparations. But by the time the book came out, it wasn’t necessary for it to prompt a renewed conversation. In fact, from my perspective, the way in which the trajectory of reparations talk had gone in the United States after the 1960s, in particular, is that there really wasn’t much of it. There was discussion of reparations within certain circles in the Black community, but in terms of it being something that was on the national stage, that wasn’t the case. So in the year 2001, or so, in the beginning of that year, David Horowitz put an advertisement in a series of college newspapers attacking the idea of Black reparations kind of out of the blue because nobody was really talking about it. It actually triggered a greater degree of interest in reparations, at least among college students than had existed in the past. But at that point, in September, we had the assault on the Twin Towers. In the aftermath of the 9/11 attacks, conversation about reparations just evaporated. It was not renewed until Ta-Nehesi Coates put out an article in The Atlantic in 2014. I think the significance of that article was in making or trying to build the Case for Reparations, he talked about atrocities that had taken place after slavery had ended. And I think that that was very, very significant and distinctive, because Kirsten and I are typically repelled by the phrase slavery reparations. We certainly think reparations are due for the long term effects of slavery. But slavery is not the only atrocity that’s relevant, and it’s certainly not the central policy that created the current racial wealth disparity in the United States. Especially if reparations had been provided, like the 40 acre land grants that were promised at the end of the Civil War. We might not have any kind of significant racial wealth differential in the United States today. So that’s one phase of the process that took place. But even after Ta-Nehisi Coates article, I think that there was a real diminution in conversation about reparations, which didn’t alter until 2019, the year before the pandemic, when there were a handful of candidates for the presidency running for the Democratic Party nomination, who actually said they endorsed reparations for Black Americans. This would include Julian Castro, Tom Steyer, and then perhaps most significantly, Marianne Williamson who actually came forward saying that there was an amount of money that she had in mind. Now, at the time, I think she talked about $500 billion dollars as a maximum. And in comparison with $14 trillion, that’s actually somewhat of a paltry amount. But nevertheless, that kind of projected a reparations conversation onto the national stage. Then in 2020, with the combination of the pandemic, the murder of George Floyd that had worldwide repercussions, I think that kind of cemented the presence of the reparations conversation. So this is a long winded way of saying that when our book came out, it came out in a climate in which there was a greater degree of interest in reparations than then had existed at any point in my own lifetime previously. I think we were concerned that the effects of the pandemic would mean that it would grossly limit our opportunities to do book readings and the like. Turns out quite the contrary, because of the virtual process. And we ended up probably doing many more presentations about the book than we would have been able to do in a situation where we would have had person to person contacts. In fact, it got a little bit ridiculous and exhausting. I think there’s a day in which we did five presentations on the book, and we said we’ll never do that again. I think, you know, there was some serendipity, actually a product of some very horrible circumstances that actually led the book to get more attention than it might otherwise have received.

Scott Ferguson:  I have so many follow up questions. I’ve long been a supporter of reparations for Black Americans. I was very compelled by the Ta-Nehisi Coates piece back in 2014. But as a Modern Monetary Theory and heterodox economics fellow traveler, I was always concerned in multiple senses about the rhetorical and emotional appeals and fault lines and dangers of the question of who will pay, which Ta-Nehisi Coates raises in that article, without really giving an answer. Right, but who will pay? Suggesting that someone must pay. And from a certain point of view, from a MMT point of view, as we’ve been saying, the federal government should pay. Absolutely, the federal government should pay. But I think there’s a larger question being asked here, which is, should a group of people be taxed or punished or subtracted from in order to repair, in order to make things whole? And I guess what I would say is, there might be a moral case for maybe not literal taxation, because we know we don’t need that literal taxation. But there might be a moral case for making certain groups “pay” or have there be a lessening of their wealth or something like this. But I think I’ve also been very concerned to not frame reparations as a national reckoning in zero sum terms, and that that’s crucial for the emotional politics of and the emotional political viability of reparations. If a group of people rightly or wrongly feel like they’re losing out so that others can gain, I think that can be politically really toxic. And I’m curious if you’ve thought about these kinds of questions?

Sandy Darity:  Yeah, this is a pretty challenging set of issues. I think the way in which we’ve focused on this notion that the federal government should finance this without raising taxes is from the point of view that we know that an objective of closing the racial wealth gap would alter the relative position of Black and white households in terms of wealth. And it would improve the relative position of Black households significantly. In fact, if the plan that we have in mind was enacted in which $350,000 was distributed to each Black American who was an eligible recipient, we would raise the median level of Black household wealth above the median level of white household wealth, although the mean levels would be equal. So that said, and I think if one’s going to attack the racial wealth gap, or do anything that’s of substance under the aegis of a reparations plan, you’re going to have to improve the relative position of Black Americans. So the best that we can do in terms of trying to insulate white Americans from damage from this process, is to avoid altering their absolute position. And so that’s why we focused on this notion that you could fund this thing without imposing taxes on anyone. And also without, in essence, taking money from white Americans to put into Black Americans pockets. That’s not what we have in mind. And that’s why federal funding becomes a critical engine. If you’re to do this at the state or local level, they are entities that are constrained by their tax base. And so money has to come from somebody and go to somebody else in terms of the state and local initiatives. Even if they borrow the money, well borrowing is deferred taxation. I think that’s why we focus on the federal case. But yes, the bullet will have to be bitten in terms of relative position.

Billy Saas:  You and Kirsten talk about some of the misconceptions about why things are the way they are today, attributing life choices and lack of financial acumen or awareness for the wealth gap. It seems to me like, in addition to all of the wonderful outcomes that would follow from administering the reparations program, as y’all have outlined it, there’ll be a tremendous opportunity to have a conversation and to get some acknowledgement and engagement of a kind of more radical financial literacy: that this is how the money system works and has worked historically to reproduce these conditions of disparity. And what we’re talking about doing now is mobilizing and redirecting the potential and power of money toward redress, toward closure. The very thing that sort of ends up as kind of an avatar for an obstacle to reparations: how are you going to pay for it? Who’s going to pay for it? becomes an opportunity to think about money through the histories of this country and its place relative to regimes of repression and violence, but then also potentially, for liberation and redemption. Is there a place for a conversation about money in this context of advocating for reparations?

Sandy Darity:  Yes, there is also a place for a conversation of the attentiveness that we give to the nation state. There’s also a possible conversation about the question of whether or not an objective that Black Americans might pursue with these additional resources would be an objective that really maintains a general structure of inequality and inequity. I think that those are all questions that are open ended, but I don’t necessarily see us moving off of that path in the absence of reparations. So I would not want to claim that the political decisions that Black Americans might make with additional resources would necessarily be revolutionary. I have no idea. They might not be. Regardless, there is a whole set of issues concerning the question of the denial of full citizenship of Black Americans. For the entire period of time we have existed in the republic that was formed in 1776.

Scott Ferguson:  One of the other criticisms that you have, I think, a really meaningful response specifically when it comes to reparations and cash payments. So the criticism is that: ah well, it’s just money, and money is not a substantial enough moral recompense. And, of course, you have all kinds of other proposals and ideas that are in excess of building wealth, and closing the wealth gulf for Black Americans. You have a really strong response to that. Maybe I’ll let you respond to that criticism.

Sandy Darity:  That kind of question came up the other day. Kirsten and I both said, well, just imagine a world in which the typical Black household in the United States had the equivalent of about $1 million in additional resources, say in 2019 dollars, if you will. Actually, it would probably be 1.2 million in a household before. Think about the range of opportunities, options, and also capacity to exercise political influence that those resources might provide them with. And then we begin to talk about having a very, very different world.

Scott Ferguson:  Yeah, that’s exactly the answer that I was thinking of. I appreciate it on multiple levels. One, as an advocate for public money, I’m very skeptical, I’m very critical of certain, let’s say, mainstream, liberal ambivalences and moralizing around money and imagining that money is something that’s … It’s mere instrumentality, or it’s merely about private wealth acquisition and greed, or it’s somehow empty. And I think your response suggests that money is not empty private greed; money is a substantive, multifaceted, medium and social and political relationship that dearly matters for all of us, including those of us who have been structurally deprived for centuries.

Sandy Darity:  Yeah, I mean, less hierarchical societies. I’m not aware of any society that’s non hierarchical, but less hierarchical societies or societies that have a better social floor for wellbeing. People still use something that we might call money. The more of it they have in those contexts, the more options they have to exercise. I mean, one of the tragedies of actually existing socialism has probably been the disproportionate amount of power that’s been registered with the individuals who run state bureaucracies. And it’s not accidental that they typically have more wealth than the other members of their society. So the question is not money, per se. The question is, what is the system in which money operates?

Billy Saas:  Along those lines, we brought up the nation state as a category or concept that’s up for scrutiny. I think one of the ways that Scott and others in our orbit have tended to rethink or engage that question, as it relates to the financial system to money and to the form of government that exists, is around the question of sovereignty, which tends to be at the center of the story for conventional stories of Modern Monetary Theory and the history of money.

Sandy Darity: Right.

Billy Saas:  And reconceiving of the problematic or the concept of sovereignty in terms of agency. It seems to me like that’s also a word or a concept that works better in the terms that you’re talking about and Scott was excited about with your response. It’s about who has the agency in a society and the distribution of that relative to others, and it happens to be in the money form most often.

Sandy Darity:  Yeah, and the companion issue is always how fair or even do we want to make agency?

Scott Ferguson:  So we’d like to talk to you about some of your other long term projects and proposals, but maybe to set the stage for that we can pause and step back and ask you, to the degree that you feel comfortable speaking about your personal and professional background, a little bit about how you came to these questions and how you came to them with such boldness. These proposals are not run of the mill. They’re really outside or they have been very much outside of a certain mainstream orthodoxy. And yet, you’ve been very committed to thinking outside that orthodoxy. How did Sandy Darity get here?

Sandy Darity:  I think a lot of it has to do with my parents point of view. I was raised in a family where both of my parents earned doctorates at later points in their lives than when I earned mine. But I grew up with two parents who were very engaged in the academic world. But they never took the position that the reason they got to the points that they did was because there was something extraordinarily special about them. They always emphasize the kind of support that they had received from others that had given them the capacity to get to where they were. I remember my father, who came from a small, small town in the mountains of North Carolina called East Flat Rock, and there is no West Flat Rock. East Flat Rock was the Black side of Flat Rock. He tells a story about the point at which he was about to go to college and he really didn’t have any significant amount of clothing. And surprise for him is that the folks in his community left him a suit and a pair of shoes at the house for him to take with him to go to college. They didn’t have a lot of resources, but they contributed. His own parents had never gone beyond sixth grade. In schools, three of their four children, including my father, all completed college. And he said it was because his parents said you were going to go to college from an early age. He’s always said he didn’t know where they got that idea from. But the notion that my parents left me with is that your life outcomes are largely a consequence of the luck of the draw of the situation that you’re born into. So I never started with this view that people who were doing badly were doing badly primarily because of their own behavior and actions. I think that that’s been central, or that’s been at the core of my thinking. Now, of course, there are people out there who make serious mistakes. An individual, in the course of their own lifetime, can do good things and bad things in terms of building their own life success. But the phenomenon of poverty is something that I always thought of as something that was structural, rather than a consequence primarily of individual actions and individual decisions. When I went to college, I decided I was going to study economics, because I assumed that economics was the field in which I could have the best understanding of inequality. I’m trying not to laugh. I take these classes, and I say this doesn’t make any sense to me. This is not how the world works. So that’s how I kind of got launched on this by being an outlier economist. I guess I’m less of an outlier now, but I don’t know. Still feels like I’m not on the inside, and that’s probably a good thing.

Billy Saas:  Your focus from early on, thanks to your parents sharing their perspective with you, is on the consequences of structures, less individuals. And I wonder, going back to reparations now, but it’s there in your other proposals as well. It’s about reparations, but it’s about reckoning with the consequences of structures that have been in place for so long. Not, you know, in addition to and alongside and adjacent to the institution of slavery, of racial inequality, as it was propounded and elaborated by the state over time, on the dispossessed, suppressed, and oppressed. But also, that part of this reparations and the reckoning or the conversation and the redress process has to be reckoning with the effects of those structures. I’m talking about white supremacy, right, the ramifications of white supremacy for everyone.

Sandy Darity:  So we live in a hierarchical society. So conditions are uneven for all people in the society. All white Americans are not in the billionaire category. In fact, a very small number. On the other hand, when you have a racialized hierarchical system, then it’s a system that protects the dominant racial group from having to be in the bottom most positions, or having to bear the burden of the harshest circumstances that are associated with that system of stratification. So I am very, very concerned about the disparities that exist on the basis of race. But I also recognize that the overall system of hierarchy is damaging. So in addition to thinking about policies that should be pursued for the purposes of bridging the disparities that exist on the basis of race, I’ve also tried to think about policies that could at least moderate the worst effects of the overall system of hierarchy. And so in particular, I’ve thought about this idea that it’s not, it’s not new with me, by any means. We could have extraordinarily rich people in a society, but we could ensure that no one was in a position of deprivation. And we might then be less concerned about the fact that we have very rich people in the society. You know, if we could ensure the folks at the bottom actually had a decent existence and had a satisfactory array of opportunities. This is the question of the social floor that I think I referred to a moment ago. I’ve been thinking for many years about how we could create a social floor that would ensure that no one would be in a position where they had to suffer, or where they had to deny their children any significant range of opportunities to participate fully in the society and to fulfill their own creative ambitions. So, while reparations is a policy, specifically African American reparations is a policy that I’ve focused on from the standpoint of eliminating racial disparities, there are other policies that I’ve tried to think about and help develop, that are focused on raising the social floor in the United States, and potentially elsewhere, those policies could be applied in other places as well.

Scott Ferguson:  So for our listeners who are less familiar with your work, or would like a reminder, maybe you can tell us about your proposal for a federal job guarantee. How that might look? How might that work? And what problems would it be addressing?

Sandy Darity:  Yeah, and I definitely do not want to claim that the idea of a job guarantee is uniquely mine, it definitely has not. It has a long tradition and heterodox economics in particular. People like Hyman Minsky were advocates of a job guarantee. There may be some uniqueness to the particular way in which I think about how it should be done, but the idea itself is a fairly old one. I think that when it was introduced, most people were concerned about the question of trying to ensure that people had employment in bad times. I think that I’m at least as interested in the question of creating a floor on compensation. The access to a guaranteed job is something that should be permanent. And it should be a mechanism for compelling the private sector to improve the compensation standards that they provide. So individuals would always be able to opt out of bad private jobs by turning to the public sector for a guaranteed opportunity for employment. So I would couple the business cycle benefits of having a job guarantee with the potential benefits that are associated with ensuring a decent standard of compensation in all employment, both in the public and the private sector. So you know, some people could say, well, what you’ve really done is introduced a minimum wage mechanism. Yeah, you have, but it’s different from the traditional minimum wage, because it is something that would be available to people who are unemployed, we are guaranteeing an employment option for everyone. And it also could be structured in such a way that there is a benefits package that typically is denied to individuals who don’t work a sufficient number of hours under minimum wage law conditions. So in a sense, what we’re doing is sort of resetting the table with respect to what the kinds of conditions are that must be provided to individuals who are at work, including the opportunity to be at work. So that’s what I have in mind, the federal government would ensure that every American adult would have access to a decent job as a public sector employee, and that would be an option that would be permanently available to them.

Scott Ferguson:  What kind of criticisms do you hear in response to that proposal?

Sandy Darity:  One set of criticisms is you destroy smaller businesses that rely upon low wage labor. And my response to that is regardless of the scale of your business, if your business plan is projected on hiring people at very low wages, that’s not a socially acceptable business plan. The other argument that frequently is made is that we don’t have enough types of work for people to do productively. And my answer to that is, we may not have enough work that appears to be profitable to the private sector to hire people to do. But we have an immense amount of socially useful work that is going undone in the present moment. And then, you know, there’s the argument that AI is going to just destroy jobs anyway. And I would argue that, yes, AI is probably going to destroy a wide range of jobs. That’s all the more reason to have a public sector structure where you could identify the types of work that AI cannot replace. The last point that’s related to that is, would we be satisfied with care work that was conducted by robots? And I don’t know, we might be, but my personal reaction is that I still think that there’s an important place for the human touch.

Billy Saas:  I don’t think we’re there yet.

Scott Ferguson:  I don’t want to be there. I don’t want to.

Sandy Darity:  Well, you know, you have human-like androids I guess maybe we wouldn’t be able to tell.

Scott Ferguson:  I suppose. But why wouldn’t we want to care for each other? It just presumes so much, right? Oh, well, if I can quit caring for you, then that’s just an automatic good. So in addition to the federal job guarantee, another proposal you’ve been working on for many years, is something that you will often refer to as the baby bonds proposal. What is that? How does it work? What does it aim to do?

Sandy Darity:  Well, I’m trying to think when Darrick Hamilton and I first started working on this. We may go back to 2008-2009 or so. The late Manning Marable at Columbia, heard me talking about this, and he piped in, and he said: Oh, baby bonds! So it’s been called that ever since. But it’s not really a bond. The idea is to provide every newborn infant with a trust account. And the trust account will be calibrated on the basis of their parents wealth position. So a child is born into the wealthiest of families, maybe we give them a $50 trust account, but for children born into families at the lowest end of the wealth distribution. Let me say, the idea of calibration was based upon your family’s wealth position relative to the median for all households in the United States. And so kids at the lower end would get, say, $50,000 or $60,000 as a trust account for families that might have a negative or zero net worth. The idea was to bring everybody’s wealth position, every child’s wealth position, closer to the national median. This is what distinguishes it to a large degree from the reparations plan, which focuses on the mean difference between household wealth rather than the median. Now, if you designed your baby bonds proposal to focus on targeting the mean level of wealth, then you could replicate the kind of objective that’s built into the Darity-Mullen version of a reparations plan, which is to get rid of the racial wealth gap. But the original formulation of the baby bonds proposal could not do that, because it’s median centered rather than centered on the conventional average.

Scott Ferguson:  And what are the responses, criticisms, affirmations of that proposal?

Sandy Darity:  I’m not aware of any real significant criticisms of that proposal. In fact, it always struck me as ironic that it hasn’t had even wider traction than it has had. There are three state governments or so that have pursued it. And I think Congressman Cory Booker has had some legislation on the books for something like that. It’s not in his proposal, the calibration is based upon the income position of the household rather than the wealth, because of some arguments that it’s harder to measure household wealth accurately. We have an income tax system. So presumably, we do have relatively good data on people’s incomes. But I’m not aware of any real substantive criticisms of it.

Scott Ferguson:  I haven’t heard any.

Sandy Darity:  Yeah, and it’s not that expensive. I mean, it would be, you know, given the typical number of newborn infants in the United States, it wouldn’t cost much more than $100 billion per annum. So yeah, that’s not big, big money in terms of the US budget.

Scott Ferguson:  Right. But we also know that often it’s relatively small, small money that gets politicized and blown out of proportion as it is.

Sandy Darity:  And people invoke this phrase, well, what are you doing with our taxpayer money? Right?

Scott Ferguson:  That’s right.

Sandy Darity:  And people are people on both sides of the aisle, the ideological spectrum, loves that phrase, taxpayer.

Scott Ferguson:  Oh Absolutely!

Scott Ferguson:  Yeah, that’s where they unite. They reach across the aisle to bemoan the loss of taxpayer money. So I’m wondering, what are you working on nowadays? What’s in your immediate or long term future? Anything you’d like to share?

Sandy Darity:  Yeah. We’re doing some work at my research center, the Sammy DuBois Cook Center on Social Equity that’s related to various dimensions of wealth. We’re trying to launch a project that’s focused on international comparisons of intergroup wealth inequality. And then also, we’re hoping to have a major conference, overseas, presumably, in London. We’re in the process of trying to get funding together to be able to do it. But to have a major conference on stratification economics that might accompany the launching of a new journal called the Journal of Stratification Economics. I guess, from the standpoint of my own sense of what contributions I might have made or be making to the field of economics. I think that that’s largely attached with stratification economics.

Scott Ferguson:  Can you tell our listeners a little bit about stratification economics? About where it comes from, and what are some of the basic suppositions? It seems to wear its meaning on its sleeve to a certain extent, but I’m curious if you could explain a little bit.

Sandy Darity:  I think I introduced the term stratification economics in a speech that I gave. No, I’m not going to remember the exact year but it was, it was at a conference that was held by the Academy of Economics and Finance, which is a southern based economics and business scholars professional association. I gave this talk in Savannah, I guess it was 2005 or so. I had been thinking for a long time about how one could go about building a theoretical framework that did not blame individuals for being poor. I mean, that’s basically what it was. I increasingly began to develop a set of ideas that I decided I would put under the label stratification economics, borrowing from the field of sociology which has a fully developed sub-discipline in what they refer to as stratification. I was thinking that maybe there was a way to merge some of the approaches in economics with the approaches and sociology, to come up with a new sub discipline in economics that are called stratification economics that attempted to explain disparities between social groups, and between individuals that was not primarily focused on group based deficiencies or individual deficiencies, but was focused on the nature of the social system in which these people live. And so that’s how it began.

Scott Ferguson:  That’s clarifying. Thank you so much. So are you familiar with the various proposals and legislation to mint a trillion dollar coin?

Sandy Darity:  I am aware of it. I’ve never fully understood it.

Scott Ferguson:  Well, there’s a proviso in the law that allows the Treasury to mint a platinum coin of any denomination. It’s been proposed several times over the last decade, in response to the so called sequestration and the so called debt crises, and the debt ceiling and these kinds of issues. It also ended up in Rashida Tlaib’s ABC Boost for Communities Act, which of course, didn’t pass, but was proposed legislation for emergency financing to individuals in the height of the pandemic era. But I was thinking, it would be great to expand this project, and maybe start dreaming up a $12 trillion coin for reparations, that perhaps on one side of the coin, on the beautiful platinum coin, we might see a picture of George Floyd. And maybe on the other side, there’s a medley of figures like A. Philip Randolph and Martin Luther King, Jr. and Coretta Scott King. I’m wondering how that strikes you?

Sandy Darity:  Well, I guess I’m not sure how that’s different from just putting the money in people’s accounts.

Scott Ferguson:  It’s not. It’s different symbolically. But that’s what it is. Right. It’s about instructing the public on where the financing comes from right?

Sandy Darity:  It’s coming off of this coin.

Scott Ferguson:  Yeah, it’s coming off of this coin that we can make as a matter of law, and that it’s a matter of national imagery. So if we put certain figures instead of a bunch of dead white men, but we put other kinds of figures on the coin, that might have some profound meaning, as well.

Sandy Darity:  The big reparations coin. I kinda like that.

Scott Ferguson: Ok, good. I have your endorsement. I hope to see this go viral very soon. Sandy Darity, thank you so much for joining us on Money on the Left. It’s been such a pleasure to talk to you.

Sandy Darity:  Thank you so much for having me on. It’s great. Cheers.

* Thanks to the Money on the Left production teamWilliam Saas (audio editor), Mike Lewis (transcription), & Emily Reynolds of The Buffalo Institute for Contemporary Art (graphic art)

The People’s Ledger with Saule Omarova

This month, we discuss democratic possibilities for public finance with Saule Omarova, the Beth and Marc Goldberg Professor of Law at Cornell University and President Biden’s original nominee for Comptroller of the Currency. Omarova’s work on financial regulation and banking law has long informed how we at Money on the Left understand the modern monetary system. Her and Robert Hockett’s “finance franchise” metaphor for modern banking-–according to which the federal government is the franchisor and chartered banks are all franchisees–renders an often-times opaque system intuitive and readily politicizable. Throughout our conversation, we learn from Omarova about how she arrived at this work, what other metaphors she and Hockett considered as alternatives, and exciting democratic possibilities for social policy development, including proposals for a National Investment Authority and a public banking system called “the people’s ledger.”

Visit our Patreon page here: https://www.patreon.com/MoLsuperstructure

Music by Nahneen Kula: www.nahneenkula.com

Transcript

The following was transcribed by Mike Lewis and has been lightly edited for clarity.

Scott Ferguson:  Saule Omarova welcome to Money On The Left.

Saule Omarova:  Thank you so much. Thanks for having me.

Scott Ferguson:  We’re so glad that you could join us today. Maybe to kick off our discussion, you can tell our listeners a little bit about your professional and academic background, how you got into thinking about law and finance from the point of view that you pursue?

Saule Omarova: Sure. So I am currently teaching at Cornell Law School. I write and teach on a variety of subjects that have to do with financial markets, financial institutions, and various regulatory issues in finance, understood broadly. I came into academia from private practice, I was a bank regulatory lawyer primarily, but also have done a lot of transactional work with various regulated financial institutions, broker dealers, insurance companies, and so on, so forth. And I did it in New York City, as part of the specialized financial institutions group. I really, really enjoyed the work, it was really difficult and quite demanding, particularly of a young lawyer with no prior experience. 

I came into the legal practice actually not thinking about banking law, even as a potential area in which I would pursue my career because prior to law school, I did a PhD program, and I’ve completed my doctoral studies at the University of Wisconsin at Madison, in political science. I studied comparative political economy, and was interested in economic development and all of this wonderful, interesting historical stuff. So as a lawyer, I was thinking I was going to be just a business corporate lawyer. And then I ended up being in the financial institutions group. 

What I’ve learned in that practice was quite invaluable, and it spurred my interest in returning to academia, to share the knowledge, but also to contribute to the discussion of public policy matters that as a practicing lawyer, I simply didn’t have the luxury of thinking about or addressing in any significant way. I did spend one year in the Treasury Department between my leaving the law firm and becoming a law professor, which was also focused on potential regulatory reform and financial stability, oversight, and so on. That was actually right before the bottom fell out of the subprime mortgage market. I left the Treasury in early July of 2007, and quite literally a couple of weeks later, things began unfolding.

So my academic career began in the midst of an unfolding global financial crisis. And of course, given the fact that financial regulation and financial markets was something I was interested in to begin with, this was a very, I suppose, fortunate set of circumstances in terms of directing my research interest into law and finance. And as I continued to learn about finance and financial regulation from an academic perspective, rather than from a purely practical perspective, gradually, I came to appreciate and realize that my long forgotten, perhaps, academic training in comparative political economy and institutional, developmental, political science, whatever you call it, actually had a lot to contribute in terms of shaping the perspective with which I approached various legal and policy issues in financial regulation, and kind of presumptively focusing my attention on structural issues, because that was really what I’ve been interested in all along.

I gradually started expanding my research, beyond writing about specific dysfunctions and specific regulatory and policy problems in the regulation of banking institutions, including banking conglomerates, so called bank holding companies or financial holding companies. Expanding that focus to encompass broader, perhaps deeper issues in what it means to have this type of a dysfunctional banking system or malfunctioning banking system at the center of the financial market that is itself supposed to serve the interests of the real economy, and real people. That’s how I started researching and writing about issues of power and structure in finance, and I suppose that’s why I’m here right now talking about it.

Billy Saas:  So I first became aware of your work in a paper that you co-wrote with Robert Hockett on the “Finance Franchise”. And of course, you’ve done subsequent work on The People’s Ledger. I’m curious, in the context of this bio that you’ve just given us. I think a lot of academics when they come into contact initially with heterodox economic, financial or monetary theory, it seems like a surprise. Or things need to be relearned. But I wonder about your history as a regulator, and that sort of journey that you took… Could you kind of narrate that experience for us when it came time to kind of think about finance as a franchise? Was it novel or did it just sort of make sense in the structural thinking that you were prone to do at the time?

Saule Omarova:  I suppose it was both a surprising development and something that did not surprise me at all, more of a natural trajectory, I guess, of my thinking and learning and experience, both as a practitioner and academic. But the surprising part was, perhaps the excitement of a discovery, and the excitement in that moment when, suddenly, a lot of the pieces that you’ve been thinking about or writing about, or talking about, fall into place, more or less, to cohere into a whole of which you were not aware of previously. That was something that I don’t think anybody can kind of predict, or that’s definitely going to happen. Certainly not for my work. 

Every time I start writing a paper, It’s always a process of a lot of doubt, and worry, and thinking about, is it really new enough? Is it interesting enough? Is it valuable to share with people? So the “Finance Franchise” was kinda like that, but it was also a different experience, because it was a co-authored work. When you are collaborating with somebody else, the dynamics change. Bob Hockett and I, we started talking and discussing various issues in finance a few years before the “Finance Franchise” was actually published. And it was not our first quarter piece, we’ve written a couple of shorter ones, and a really longer one about the developmental finance state previously, so this was a process. 

What I am really grateful for in that process was that chance to find a comrade-in-arms in a way academically, someone who shared certain fundamental premises and understandings, but brought to the partnership a complementary set of ideas and knowledge. For example, I am not, and I do not consider myself an expert on monetary economics per se. I have never been formally trained, I don’t have a degree in economics, and whatnot. So it was really fascinating for me, to start from my usual, typical, let’s start from the ground, from the understanding of the mechanics in the market, certain financial instruments or certain market dynamics and relationships, that financial institutions and regulators and various other actors in the economy enter in starting from that understanding, building up toward the whole. Whereas Bob came into this experience, perhaps from a slightly different perspective, which was absolutely complementary. He has tremendous knowledge of economic literature and philosophy and history, so we worked really well together and it was truly a great partnership. 

That was the “Finance Franchise” and I remember we’ve gone through many, many iterations of the draft. We developed and discarded multiple metaphors for the arrangement that we were trying to describe. I remember talking about the solar system and how the federal reserve, the central bank, the sovereign public is the sun, and emits that full faith and credit as the energy into the universe, and the first layer of planets would be commercial banks, and then the outer layer capital markets, and so on, so forth. We were writing and rewriting this draft. And at some point, we have decided to discard that particular metaphor for the sake of coherence and certain writing editorial choices. 

That was the process. And I, perhaps I don’t know if Bob has a different recollection of that process. Perhaps what he valued is not exactly the same as what I value, but I really did value that chance to really build something from scratch. Because for both of us, I don’t think I will be speaking out of turn here on behalf of my colleague. But I think for both of us, that concept of the “Finance Franchise” — that particular public private partnership type arrangement in the creation and distribution of sovereign money and credit throughout the modern economy — that concept continues to be the foundation of whatever work we’re doing separately now.

Billy Saas:  I know that when I came to that work, I had been fairly deeply immersed in Modern Monetary Theory and heterodox economic discourse, generally. There was something special about that, that seemed to sort of click things into place in a new way. And the metaphor, just want to say, is very effective, very useful. And I think, as a metaphor, it’s not too far out of bounds from what it’s attempting to describe or carry over. It fits, it’s fitting. And I’ve found it very useful to share with students in courses.

Saule Omarova:  Thank you so much. Thank you so much. I do notice that with students as well, that I always start talking in my classes about what the financial system really is, what is it for, who are the main players and so on, so forth. And I start with the Orthodox description of financial intermediation, because to be perfectly fair, it’s not that that description is entirely and completely wrong. It does have its place. It is just not the correct description for what happens with money, as we know. 

So you start with this kind of traditional description, and then suddenly, you problematize it. And you ask them the question, well, then what do you think JPMorgan does when you come and ask for a loan, let’s say for a million dollar loan? Do you think JPMorgan needs to go into its books right away and make sure that it actually has the extra million dollars in deposits sitting there ready for it to extend to you as a loan? Because if that were the case, do you think JPMorgan would ever find that moment at which is: “yeah, yeah! Right now we have it! Oops right now we don’t have it,” right? Because people withdraw money and put money in and things happen. 

That kind of simple, and silly as it may be example, makes students wonder, wait a second, if that’s not the case, then what is happening here? Then I introduce them to this concept of “Finance Franchise” and how complex but yet incredibly simple it appears, and how it sheds light on so many problems that we seem to be walking around in practice, with respect to policy and regulation. And suddenly, understanding of that fundamental dynamics just changes the way you approach solutions. 

Scott Ferguson:  We’re starting to wade into it, but I’m wondering if we can do a little teaching for those listeners who are not familiar with this very important paper that’s so foundational to your work. How would you describe your criticism of what we might call the conventional, micro economically-oriented approach to money, to law? You use the word intermediation, maybe we could spell out how is it that the dominant ways of understanding comprehend money and banking and finance? And what are the problems with that? And maybe a little bit about how that dominant model has shaped financial regulation and reform, especially after the Great Financial Crisis and Dodd Frank. The kind of sensibility that’s built into Dodd Frank that you criticize.

Saule Omarova:  Yeah, well, that’s quite a lot, so let’s see if I can actually do that. So if you pick up any textbook on economics, or finance, or corporate law, or financial regulation, for example, usually it starts with some introduction into what a financial system is, what it does, and its functions. Very respectable scholars, and practitioners have written those books and contributed to those books. Their view of what the financial system is, it sounds familiar, it sounds plausible. 

They basically talk about how the financial system helps to transfer wealth across time and across space, and it helps to generate capital and do XYZ. But when they talk about banks and securities firms and insurance companies, and mutual funds and fund managers and other financial institutions, usually, the description is quite simple. They’re just introduced as this sort of middleman entities, intermediaries, whose job is to bring together two groups of actors in the financial system. 

Those people or entities, those persons who have surplus funds, extra money, that they do not need for consumption immediately, but they’re willing to put into the game of investment one way or the other. And on the other side, there are those persons and those entities that have the need of money, of capital, of investment, so that they can actually build factories, hire people and produce goods and services that basically keep our economy going and, in fact, constitute our economy. 

The banks come in, for example, in a particular way, banks are typically considered in the traditional standard explanation the quintessential archetype of financial intermediaries because what they do is that they step right between those two sets of players, the suppliers of funds, investors, lenders, and so forth, and the users of funds, the various companies that raise capital or individual borrowers and so forth. And the banks solve various problems in that relationship by absorbing the risks that the suppliers of finance fundamentally face because they are supposed to give their money up today, in exchange for some promise to be repaid at some point in the future, because nobody knows what the future holds. 

Because these lenders or investors, they really often have no way of accessing or evaluating the information about their borrowers, or the issuers of securities, those companies’ future prospects and the ability to repay. Because of all these risks, frequently, that relationship simply fails to take place, which is not good for anybody. We need money to get inside the economic activity somehow so that the production happens. So banks come in, and they essentially become the borrowers to all those people who have extra money. They don’t have the use for it right now, but they also don’t really have the information or the expertise or the time to research any potential lending opportunities to see: Oh, to whom can I give this money temporarily for a fee? So those people can come to a bank, open a deposit account, and put the extra money into that account. The bank collects all these deposits, because those are what we understand by deposits from a myriad of individuals, each one of whom may put in a very small amount, but then the bank ends up sitting on this huge bag of money. 

The bank then turns around and looks to the other side of the river, where all those other entities and people are standing there with hungry eyes and stretching out their hand, asking for capital because they want to build factories and they want to construct houses or buy those houses, whatever. And then the bank being the professional, now sitting on that huge amount of money, can actually conduct the necessary investigation into these people’s ability to repay or make good on their claims. And once they determine that a particular borrower is a worthy borrower, then the bank can essentially dip into its bag of money. Well, perhaps it’s not a bag of money, but their vault, because that’s where they were supposed to keep the value, right? Dip in the vault, take out a bunch of money and then extend that loan. 

And that’s what this intermediation process in the banking sector is supposed to do: alleviate all these fears, all these risks of everybody who actually has that spare money that they don’t need to use, and then bundle it together and then extend loans to various borrowers. Of course, even within that traditional view of the banking relationship, there is already an element of surprise that students usually encounter. Because once you tell them, well, guess what if you go to the Tompkins Trust or to Citibank and open an account, putting your money in, open a checking account, right? Guess what, you become the lender to Citibank or the lender to whatever bank you open an account with. So you are basically an investor, and they are your borrower, and they owe you money. Is that how you think of this relationship? 

And of course, the students just go: no, that’s not how I think of that relationship. I think of them selling me a service. The bank gives me some kind of a benefit by allowing me to keep my money safe. That is the fundamental, first step in the learning process in which you start pushing students toward rethinking what actually happens. This is when you tell them well, guess what? It’s not your money. If I asked you how much money you have? You would probably not give me the amount of cash in your pocket, but you would give me the balance in your bank account. And guess what, that’s not your money. You don’t have that many dollars. 

What you have is a claim on a bank, a private corporation, that is your borrower to return that money to you should you have the need for it. And so that’s where it starts, but then you start explaining the fact that, well, if you think about the bank in this kind of terms, it’s just a middleman or middle person or middle entity. The player in the middle who essentially collects existing money that people have out there, combines it all and then out of that pile makes loans to other people, then what is the difference between the bank and the mutual fund? Well, then functionally, there shouldn’t be any difference, right? We could just all put our money together in one big bag, and some person in charge of that bag might actually then, extend loans out of that bag. Would that be the same as a bank? 

Clearly, it’s not the same. It’s not the same because there is another very standard textbook explanation of what banks do. And that is typically known as fractional reserve banking, where people came to understand that banks don’t necessarily simply just disperse the money that all these little ladies like me brought to the bank and open deposit accounts. But what the bank does is whatever money it’s collecting in deposits from various depositors, it puts in the vault only a fraction of that amount. But then it can write pieces of paper, essentially, granting loans making promises to various borrowers out there in the real economy, to make payments on their behalf to their suppliers, or to their clients, or to their employees and whatnot. 

What they do is they open these accounts and put that money in there. They create these loans, but the number or rather the amount of the lending activity is not directly limited to the amount of deposits that were brought into the bank because there is this magical understanding that all depositors are not going to knock on your door at once and withdraw all the money. As long as that’s the case, you don’t need to keep 100% of deposits in your vault. You could put in, typically, 10%. So you put in 10%, that’s your reserves. Your reserves, that’s your most liquid cash in the vault or whatever it is. But then 90% of that money that somebody brought in, you can actually extend in loans, and then those loans get deposited elsewhere, or maybe even at your own bank. And somehow, the balance sheet, the books of the banks–individual banks but also the banking system in general–grows. 

This is what usually is meant by this phrase, that banks create money out of thin air because they’re able to use that fraction of the deposits brought in as some kind of reserve base, and then multiply that base by 9 or 10, or 25. That’s a very popular description of what banks do. But it’s so fascinating if you think about it. So which is it? What is it that banks actually do? Do they simply collect deposits and then use that amount of money to extend loans? Or do they have some kind of magical formula and where does that formula come from? Where if you have 10% in the vault, somehow, you can multiply that 10% so many times and everything will be hunky dory. 

Those two descriptions do not really, necessarily cohere. They’re not consistent, but nobody really cares, because in the standard sort of economic textbooks, to the extent that I’m familiar with them, I don’t mean any disrespect for the economists, or corporate law textbooks or whatever textbooks, right? These questions do not get asked because money is frequently taken for granted as something that naturally in any kind of capitalist, or exchange based, private property based, market based economy is something that is almost a natural phenomenon. You need that universal measure of value, so money just happens. So yeah, we know that banks make money, but also, it’s not that somehow they have some magical power to make money. They make it out of thin air, but there is that reserve base. And where does it all come from? It comes from depositors. 

The problem with that is that well, if that were the case, then how would we account for the fact that some countries, for example, don’t even have the mandatory reserve ratios for their banks. In other words, there is no 10% of all of your assets, or whatever deposits that you have, you have to keep in the vault. In some countries, it’s not even necessary. And yet their banks operate pretty much the same way as all banks operate. And banks create money. And there is this concept of the elastic money supply. 

Sometimes banks create more money. Sometimes they create less money. And there’s monetary policy with a central bank in the middle, the whole point of which is to manage the supply. If it was all some kind of preset formula of what the little old lady brought in, and then how much it can grow because Citibank decided that’s okay, then why do we even need the whole complex edifice of monetary policy and whatnot? If we start thinking about it, then you start thinking, but what happens on the ground? How do banks create money? What happens when somebody comes to the bank and wants to borrow from that bank? Does the bank really have to look into his vaults? Does it even have any vault? Where does it look? And how does that decision get made? 

In reality, of course, what happens here is that imagine Billy or Scott, when you went to the bank to borrow money to buy a house, the bank didn’t tell you: “You just wait here. Let me go check how much money I have in the vault or whatever my deposit base is.” No, they don’t do that. What they do, however, is they make you jump through millions of hoops to prove that you have income, you have a steady job, you have assets, to get an appraisal of your home so that you can give them security interest in your house. 

In other words, they assess that loan, that prospective loan as an investment opportunity. And once the bank decides that this actually is a good investment opportunity, we can price the risk of this loan not being repaid and establish that interest rate, but we think this is a good loan to make, because over the next 10, 15, 30 years, we will actually make profit on that loan. And this person is actually going to use that money for some socially beneficial purpose: we want houses to be sold, we want the construction companies to actually build those houses. 

Once the bank makes that decision, then the bank simply credits a deposit account that is in the borrower’s name with the amount of the loan. And that process is the moment of creating that purchasing capacity, that money that didn’t exist in the system before it was created. And at that moment was that bank actually credited that account, from that moment immediately, almost immediately, you can start spending that money. You can start writing a check out of that deposit account to cover your debts to cover your purchases, write a check to the seller of the house or to the construction company or whatever. 

In the current modern system that we have in this country, nobody will start asking: well, which bank opened that deposit account for you? And essentially how liquid is this check? What is that? Maybe we should just discount it? Nobody does that. Why is that the case? There is no reserve requirement that presumptively limits the bank’s ability to create this new purchasing power. Right? And yet, nobody questions the fact that this is good money, because it’s drawn on a particular bank. 

That’s because certain things, certain relationships involving money creation, in particular, and the banking system cannot be understood within this sort of narrowly, micro-level transactional framing that this financial intermediation concept conveys. And that framing being, you can only understand the relationships by looking at the private market interactions between specified private market participants. Like, here’s a lender, and here’s a borrower. Here’s a depositor, and here’s a bank. Here’s a bank, and here’s a borrower. 

You can only understand that when you expand your view, and you look at what happens in these types of transactions as part and parcel of the broader system in which the government and government supported entities, the public, the sovereign, in effect, the sovereign public, various actors, that are typically just treated as being outsiders to private market exchange, in fact, are fundamentally important in terms of enabling those private market exchanges to take place in the form that we know. 

The reason why the bank can actually credit the borrower’s account with the amount of the loan without being constrained in that moment of money creation, by the amount of deposits sitting “in its vault” is because each bank in the United States or in most modern economies, modern banks, is a participant in the system which we call the “Finance Franchise” arrangement, which is basically the principle of how the banking system works. It is tied into and directly plugged into the balance sheet of the Central Bank, which is a public actor, which is basically the embodiment of the sovereign public in the sphere of banking and money creation.

The central bank, on the surface of it, is essentially just a bank for those private commercial banks that extend loans and take deposits. Those banks open their own deposit accounts, effectively, with the central bank. When they have to make good on their promises, on the checks that are written by the depositors on them, these banks essentially have to make those payments out of the accounts that they hold at the central bank. In the US, those are called reserve accounts. 

What happens is that once the bank created new money by extending a loan, at the end of the day, those checks that the borrower wrote to suppliers and employees and various other people that were accepted as good money, no questions asked, those checks at the end of the day have to come back to the original lender, the bank. And the bank would have to make a payment on those checks, make good on those promises. So that system is operated on the books of the central bank, a public agency, a public entity, a sovereign entity, which basically means that all of those new monies that were being created, because they were good investment opportunities for those banks– in other words, good creditworthy projects in the real economy that needed money, and they got the money from the banks–all those projects are able to take off and happen. 

Now the banks have to actually make good on those promises because if they don’t, then those relationships will break down tomorrow. And the reason they are able to make good on those promises is because they do have those accounts on the books of the central bank. So for example, if on any particular day, suddenly, there are too many withdrawals from ATMs from the deposit accounts of a particular bank, and too many checks came in for payment on that same day. And suddenly, you don’t have enough in your account at the central bank in your reserve account. You can actually borrow either from other banks who also have reserve accounts in the same system, or worse comes towards, you can borrow from the central bank itself. And this is the most underappreciated, and the most fundamentally important institutional underpinning of our entire banking system and the system of money creation: an elastic currency that is meant to meet the needs of the growing, modern economy. 

Because in the traditional, the standard, mainstream picture of things, when we just focus on private market participants, banks and companies and broker-dealers and borrowers, whatever, in this micro-transactional sense, and we think of the government as some kind of an outsider, usually, this function, the payments and clearing function, and the provision of this reserve accounts by the central bank to private banks, is considered something mundane, and kind of back office support function that is really, at most convenience, but generally speaking is just like, I don’t know, it’s just the way things are. Sometimes I joke with my students, it’s kind of teenage kids, just think that it’s, of course, how things are that there is a house and the parents provide the house.

Scott Ferguson:  Somebody will do the dishes.

Saule Omarova:  Yeah, somebody does the dishes. Do teenagers ever talk on their social media about how mom does the dishes and dad drives them everywhere? No, because that’s sort of considered part of the duty. So in that same sense, the central bank’s ability to provide that incredibly important support that maintains the ability of private institutions with limited financial resources to engage in money creation in this elastic manner, that we really need as a society. That function has consistently been underrated and misunderstood. And in the “Finance Franchise” framework, we are supplementing these two mainstream concepts, financial intermediation and fractional reserve banking, with this more comprehensive and coherent system-based approach, in which we say that the banking system is not just a collection of individualized direct micro level transactional exchanges between banks and depositors, of banks and borrowers, for example. 

It is actually an institutional arrangement in which the sovereign public represented by the central bank injects its own credibility, its own credit, the full faith and credit of the nation, into that system by enabling certain licensed and regulated private corporations, banks, to have direct access to that public, sovereign credibility. And use that as a backup so that the private liabilities, those deposits liabilities that private banks issue, that we can use in everyday life as a form of money and think of it as sovereign money. 

If I have $100 in the bank, I’m actually quite confident that I have $100, even though it’s actually a private liability. That ability is a result of this particular arrangement. And in that arrangement, effectively, private banks are not some independent creators of monetary value. They are essentially the agents of the sovereign public, to whom the sovereign public outsources this function of finding the good investment opportunities out there in the real economy, finding those potential borrowers, those companies, those individuals, households, that have good productive use for the money, and they need that money. 

That’s why when private banks are doing their due diligence on any kind of prospective loan, that’s what they do on behalf of the public. And once they extend that loan and create new money, those banks can be confident that, as long as they of course comply with all the requirements of that relationship that are imposed on them by virtue of them being the agents of the sovereign public, as long as everything else goes right, that their private liabilities actually are treated in the entire economy as de facto sovereign money, even though it’s not.

It’s kind of like, again, going to my favorite, very basic example of teenage kids and the parents: it’s kinda like the parents giving those teenage kids their credit card, on which the parents pay the bill at the end of the day. And the kids now can use that credit card, to buy things, to do things to pay for services, whatever, because everybody in that exchange knows that ultimately, the parents stand behind the kids. And this is the relationship and that relationship is fundamentally hierarchical. 

I think that hierarchy, that the public sovereign is the ultimate source of all the money credit, the safest money, that is, at the bottom of that entire pyramid of financial claims in our modern economy. The ultimate source of it is the sovereign public, we all of us. That fact gets completely brushed aside in mainstream economic thought. I think by bringing it out through showing the institutional dynamics in the very simple transactional context of the banking sector, that is what allows us to see how all these other relationships and the financial system are fundamentally about the balance of public and private power.

Billy Saas:  That was an amazing tour de force. So a couple of thoughts. One is it seems like a job one is in the classroom, in your classroom, but then also, more broadly, generating and disseminating and educating people about what actual financial literacy is, right? There’s a kind of baseline financial literacy, but also baked into the kind of popular understanding of how the banking system works is a fundamental disinterest, or even say ignorance. The full picture that you’re providing here includes the “Finance Franchise” and highlights and focuses on the support role, but it’s actually foundational and enabling from the very start. So you can’t have those two other models without having the foundation of this unaccounted for thing. And so what follows from that for you? There’s a full picture here. Now what? 

Saule Omarova:  Right, so that’s an excellent question, because being a lawyer by training, and also a legal scholar, for me, the “so what?” is the ultimate question? It’s not just about getting the description right. But the reason why we need to get the description right is that the wrong description gives life to so many misguided policies and decisions that affect everybody’s daily lives. So if we understand the fundamentally central role of the sovereign public as the source of sovereign money and credit in this incredibly complicated financial system that we have, the smart person or critical thinker can actually address whatever burning policy or regulatory issue that they are looking at from the perspective of the public-private balance of roles, functions, responsibilities, and bring out normative implications. 

One example is, in all this current, perhaps not so current, but the recurring and unfortunate political debates about the debt ceiling and federal budget, and those really unseemly political maneuvers in Congress that jeopardize, effectively, the United States credit standing as the global power and whatnot. A lot of these debates become, quite obviously, silly when you start thinking about the public debt that we issue as a form of that solar energy that needs to be emitted, and that is being emitted into the universe, that it’s not the same as a household borrowing money to pay credit card bills, right? It’s not that kind of a dynamic.

For me, I’m not really an active participant in those types of political debates. It’s just something that, quite obviously, everybody’s aware of right. But in terms of financial regulation of financial markets, the recent emergence of new digital technologies and digital currencies, and whatever we mean by this beautiful term, crypto, these are the issues that are very much front and center on many people’s professional and policy and academic agendas. 

This is where the understanding of the fundamental dynamics of the financial system as we have it now can seriously inform our view of potential pitfalls, potential huge policy mistakes that we may make, as we’re trying to adjust ourselves or somehow respond to all of these developments and the crypto markets growing and so on, so forth. But also, and perhaps more importantly, it can inform our understanding of how we can harness the power of digital technology to make our financial system, this hybrid “Finance Franchise” system in which there is inherently that tension between the public and private, between private banks, franchisees trying to increase their private profits by abusing the public subsidy and by abusing this full faith and credit that they can disperse for money. And the interests of the public in keeping the system stable and safe and actually geared towards the needs of the real economy. 

This inherent tension can become much much worse, if we switch to cryptocurrencies and various digital monies that are generated outside of this banking system that continues to be the core of our financial system. But of course, once they’re created outside of that system, they definitely need to be connected to the traditional financial system, particularly the banking system, because those cryptocurrencies need a way of being exchanged into US dollars, or euros or whatever, the real sovereign money that we have in circulation. Whatever happens in that realm really is something that can fundamentally disrupt the system we have today. So rather than sitting there and waiting passively for the disruption to occur, and then encounter the traditional arguments that: Oh, the genies out of the bottle, you cannot change anything. Now all you have to do is extend more public support to this newly created private type of digital money, or maybe financial transactions and financial markets that are built on top of that new private digital money. 

Instead of saying, Well, you know, all parents just dish out more money. We can proactively say: how about we seize on the fact that there are these new technologies, and that we actually as a public together collectively, we are the source of all credit and finance in the system, ultimately. So to the extent that we know the tension in our hybrid finance franchise system, to the extent that we see that this system operates, yeah, more or less, it’s alright. But it does tend to miss allocate credit to over-generate risks to over-generate leverage that is unproductive. In other words, that energy that the sun emits into the system somehow gets trapped in the layers of the solar system, and never reaches the intended recipients, the real economy, the real people. 

Why can’t we use this new technology? Why can’t we re conceive the relationship at the core of this financial system, the relationship between the public, the sovereign public, and the private financial institutions, the franchisees of the sovereign public, in a way that rebalances the currently sort of skewed control over how much money is out there and where it goes — that currently is residing mostly with the private institutions– rebalances it so that the public, the sovereign, the source of the credit, has a greater say, in how much credit money is generated, and where it goes for what purpose. If we can actually solve that puzzle, and I believe we can, it’s not easy, but it is conceivable, to think about various ways of approaching that problem. 

If we can solve that problem, then we will actually be able to resolve for the first time a really, incredibly complex knot of not only financial, but also broader economic, political, and social problems that we have been dealing with for decades, if not centuries in our society. A lot of the problems that currently seem to be far removed from the idea of digital money, or digital currency, or the banking system, per se, and so on so forth, a lot of those problems actually will be able to be tackled, or we will be able to tackle those problems with these new tools. Because guess what, money, credit, finance is the universal input into every economic activity. And it is the most potent tool that we can use as a collectivity to resolve some of the tensions that we will not be able to resolve by looking at each individual tension individual problem in isolation, and trying to fix it with existing, very technical tools. 

I know it’s a little bit abstract, but this is basically the “so what.” The “so what” is, here we have potentially, I don’t know, the Samurai sword that we can take and go to battle, to actually defend, protect our future, from a lot of the challenges. So let’s appreciate the sword, and let’s appreciate the hand that can wield that sword. And that is our hand. It is not the hand of an individual bank or an individual hedge fund or anybody else, not even Elon Musk. So there we are.

Scott Ferguson:  So you have laid out in your work a number of what you sometimes describe as radical proposals for remaking the financial system, the banking system, how deposits for everyday people work, all the way to really rethinking a macro structure and strategy of investment. Could you, and I know there are other proposals out there, and I think you put yourself more on the side of let’s go big or go home, whereas others want to kind of take baby steps with some of this knowledge. Can you maybe spell out one or two of these major proposals for pretty radical overhauls and how they might have effects on democracy, or social life and taking care of people and our environments? 

Saule Omarova:  You’re absolutely right, Scott. There are, luckily, many proposals and many attempts, at least, to deal with these big social challenges we’re facing. That of course includes climate change and the great economic socio economic inequality we have in this country, in many societies. The fact that our economy has been gradually starved of productive capital and investment, and yet there is a lot of speculative investment that’s going on. So the reason I think that it is important to supplement a lot of the existing efforts, maybe to solve particular aspects of these particular types of problems with a more systemic or systematic structural approach to redefining the fundamental functions and dynamics of the financial system, is that sometimes the most practical way of achieving the desired result is not go to the smallest possible denominator and tackle each individual issue separately. 

Sometimes it is the best, most pragmatic way of solving the problems. But sometimes all it does is disperse and diffuse the energy the efforts, and also pushes the pressure elsewhere in the same system. So you push on one lever, and suddenly, the problem comes out in another pocket, right? So I, for the longest time, have been thinking about the, again, the financial technologies, FinTech and digital money and digital financial products and crypto, because that’s basically in my wheelhouse as a former, currently recovering, financial regulation lawyer. 

The more I thought about those specific issues, how do we deal with the emergence of all these private tokens that circulate supposedly, as a form of payment as money? How do we accommodate this kind of new financial markets into the existing framework, the more I realize that this is precisely one of those moments in history where we really need to go all the way to the very bottom, to the very root of how the system operates as a whole. 

So when I use the word radical, I know that in common parlance, it is often considered a bad word, because radical means extreme. And it means almost violent. It means something that is unrealistic, or not something that we want if we’re pragmatic adults. We don’t want to destroy, but we want to construct, right? But radical, actually, it’s the root of that. The root of the word is root, right? So actually it means fundamental. And so when I call my proposals radical, I am hoping that more people will recognize the fundamental nature of the overhaul I’m proposing. So one of these proposals again, very little under the sun is brand new. But particularly during the pandemic, it became very clear that we need to make sure that everybody in the economy, everybody in our society, has equal, direct and easy access to sovereign money because that determines the ability of an individual person to buy goods and services, to pay for the housing, to pay for education, to feed themselves and to provide very essential basic needs. 

For example, not being able to have a bank account in our current society means not being able to make those types of economic decisions and to take that action on a daily basis without having to pay an exorbitant, in many cases, unacceptable price. Those of us who are lucky enough to be part of the existing banking system, to us that may be a natural thing to use. But too many people were sort of in a position during the pandemic, in particular, where even the checks from the federal government that were supposed to help them continue paying their bills and feeding their families during the lockdown those checks had to be cashed by the recipients in some non bank institutions to which they simply didn’t have access during lockdown. They couldn’t even often get to the mailbox in which that check maybe was sitting. So that was an extreme situation. But it brought to the fore of public attention the fact about which many scholars and policy activists have been talking for many years before the pandemic hit; the fact that we actually do not have the kind of banking service, the basic provision of basic payments and banking services that we need to have in order to basically provide effectively economic citizenship rights to everybody. 

During the pandemic, there was this sort of fermenting sentiment that perhaps we should think about a public option for deposit services, and that public option would alleviate the need to basically wait for banks to judge whether or not you’re a prospectively profitable client, before they open a deposit account for you. Of course, again, the idea, for example of using either a post office, or postal banking, or maybe even the central bank itself, the Federal Reserve, as an actual provider of services directly to individuals and households and businesses, in terms of opening deposit accounts directly with a central bank, or maybe a US Post Office in the postal bank. That idea has been around forever. 

But one of the knock down arguments against that was the administrative difficulty of basically having a central bank, let’s say the Federal Reserve, actually manage these deposit accounts. Is the Fed going to open bank branches in every village out there? That’s ridiculous, right? So now we have digital money. We have the possibility of a central bank, for example, issuing digital currency, or I don’t know, any kind of let’s say public authority. It doesn’t have to be necessarily a central bank. It could be monetary, it could be the treasurer. It depends on the choices and the design and whatever. 

Now, there is technology that allows the public money being issued digitally, and therefore managed those deposits accounts or wallets in which that money sits, and out of which it goes and into which it comes, with greater ease than was ever possible when all the ledgers had to be the manual or individually maintained on some proprietary computer systems, for example. So, I hesitate to say, “Oh, I am the smartest person in the universe, I was the first one to …”, of course not. But there were several of us thinking and writing about these things and discussing these things with one another. And, for example, Morgan Ricks, Lev Menand, and other people, in various ways, have been thinking and talking about the idea of the central bank actually offering deposit services directly to economic actors, individuals, households, and companies. 

Of course, there was this great economic debate among central bank economists and particularly central bankers about issuing central bank digital currencies, CBDCs. But during the pandemic, I felt that look, right now is exactly the time when we need to bring those two debates together. First of all, those two ideas, the Central Bank Digital Currency and Fed Accounts, let’s call them, the central bank opening directly deposit accounts. But not only bring them together and think about how it could be done in greater institutional detail than was done before. But also address one big elephant in the room that, in my view, hampered all of these discussions and proposals with respect to CBDC are Fed Wallets and Fed Accounts before them, and that big elephant in the room was: Okay, let’s imagine that you can now have the central bank, the Fed, open deposit accounts for everybody potentially, in the economy. Issue these liabilities directly to everybody, so now, there are sovereign liabilities functioning in the economy as truly sovereign money. Which is how we think of it anyway, right? 

Currently, it’s not happening outside of the cash. In the electronic world, there is no sovereign money. So why not create that sovereign money in the electronic form? But what that means is that the liability side of the Fed’s balance sheet will increase tremendously, immediately. Something has to be done on the asset side, on the other side of the balance sheet, to balance it out. Even if, as we understand, maybe not everybody, but let’s just postulate. Of course, it doesn’t mean that the Fed actually has to look in its own vaults and take out the money that some little ladies deposited in there and then bundle it up and lend it to somebody else. 

That’s not what that balancing act is about. But the balancing act is, nevertheless, an important factor that if there is an increase in liabilities, you actually get greater capacity to invest. As the Federal Reserve, you have the greater capacity to use your own balance sheet to channel capital into the economy. And the question becomes, how will you channel it? Where will you invest? 

So right now, the Fed doesn’t invest in many things. What does the Fed typically invest in? It extends loans, for example, to banks that need loans in emergency liquidity, whatever. So there are some of those discount loans to banks that the Fed has. It invests mainly in government debt, right? There are some treasury bonds, there are a lot of Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, housing related bonds, because a policy decision was made many, many decades ago that we’re going to use the Fed’s balance sheet to support housing finance because we want homeownership in America. That’s basically it, maybe there are some precious metals, there are these claims on other central banks, but there are no commercial loans, no household loans on that balance sheet right now, and not much is happening. 

So the question that both central bank economists, the CBDC guys, encountered, and that proposes to basically provide the public option for deposits, public option in banking for the people encountered was that well, what should the Fed do on the asset side? So most people pretty much either were just quiet about it, like, we don’t need to talk about that. Let’s just focus on the deposit side. But you cannot do that because there is always that question. But most people just sort of very … and it’s really funny, because very much in passing would admit to, well, the Fed or whatever, the central bank will just do more of what it does currently. So maybe invest more in whatever treasury bonds or agency bonds. And if you run out of those bonds, because you might run out of those bonds. 

What does that mean? Does that mean that the Treasury now is going to be forced to issue more debt? So then, the Fed could invest in high quality corporate bonds. And what happens if the liabilities are growing and growing? Well, then maybe the Fed could even invest in corporate equity: stocks of some companies. And that is an incredible thing to even contemplate, because what that would mean is that private corporations would effectively have the captive buyer, the captive supplier of capital for them, which is the Federal Reserve. Do we really need that? Do we want that? What will the private corporations do with all that money flowing their way? Will they actually go into poor neighborhoods and build fancy facilities for the kids there or something like that. Or maybe… 

Billy Saas:  Stock buybacks

Saule Omarova:  Yeah, exactly. Stock buybacks and dividends, all this wonderful stuff. Bonuses, whatnot. So clearly, that question created a problem, a conundrum, but also opened a possibility for rethinking the direction and the nature of the credit flows in the economy overall. Because now we can have one platform, the central bank’s balance sheet, that has a tremendous capacity to channel that investment, that capital, into the economy, into the economic activities that are going to generate greater employment, stronger supply chains, better life, greater infrastructure, better infrastructure for more communities because that balance sheet belongs to the public, effectively. 

So I wrote up a paper that basically, it’s called The People’s Ledger, because it was kind of playing on the whole “distributed ledger” concept. Distributed ledger, well, you don’t just distribute it in that sort of technical sense. You give it to the people that write to basically use this central bank balance sheet as the platform for providing safe, sovereign money that is digital that is convenient, and universally accessible, and not predatory. But at the same time, with the other hand, channel the resources that are generated on the asset side of that platform, of that balance sheet. Channel those resources into productive activities. 

And so once you start thinking about it, then you can imagine what kind of new assets the central bank, the Fed, can invest in. If it’s not corporate bonds, if it’s not treasuries, what else can it do? So I was thinking, first of all, the Fed could actually start supporting lending for productive enterprise rather than lending that goes into margin loans; the loans that support speculation in financial markets. How can you do that? You can basically build on the existing practice of those discount loans that the Fed already extends to banks, who need some liquidity support on a short term basis, and secure those loans with good loans of their own. 

So to the extent that banks, for example, private banks will lose their access to deposits because deposits will be provided directly by the Central Bank. The central bank can actually open this kind of a discount window to a wider range of public and private lenders. They don’t have to be called banks; it can be called banks, call them whatever you want, right? And establish certain eligibility criteria for the kinds of loans that those lenders can extend and then bring a “discount” effectively sell to the central bank. Those criteria don’t have to be anything weird or radical in any way. But loans cannot support financial speculation, for example. It’s not the kind of loans that private equity firms will take in order to buy out some company and run it to the ground. But loans to productive companies, industrial corporations, loans to cooperatives, loans to universities, public entities of various kinds, like a State Transportation Authority wants to build something and needs to borrow money, they could get a loan now from a bank, a private lender, because the private lender knows that if they extend that loan, they can actually finance that loan at the Fed’s discount window, and essentially, not take too much risk and get a little bit of a profit on it and why not for instance. So that would be one asset. 

The other asset to me is even more important, and that is the fact that rather than basically directing increased investment capacity toward blue chip corporate debt or something like that. The Fed could buy bonds and other securities instruments issued by various public and public-private entities, institutions that are financing large scale public infrastructure, for example, at the state level, but also at the federal level. For example, at the state level, we have various green banks, and there is a movement to create more green banks or some other public institutions like that. 

To a great extent, access to financing becomes a real serious constraint on the potential of state level green banks or similar institutions to really spearhead sustainable economic development and maybe target other problems are on the local and state level like inequality or certain geographic imbalances and decay in certain communities, because those green banks have to finance itself either out of the budget, which at the state level is limited, or by issuing bonds in capital markets, which basically subjects them to the desires and profit seeking motives of private bondholders. 

So now, what if the Fed can become the potential buyer for those bonds issued by state level public banks and state level green banks, for example. That would enable those institutions to really fulfill their missions. Rather than just promise some improvement, they will actually have access to patient capital that is not out for profit there. But in addition to those kinds of existing forms of public infrastructure investment institutions, one can now imagine the creation of a new, more capacious and more ambitious kind of federal level, national level investment institution that is public. For me, that is the National Investment Authority, NIA. Again, it was a big part of the “Finance Franchise”, “so what” answer to the “so what?”

 The question is that, look, we’ve been talking for decades about the need to create some US infrastructure bank at the federal level, or investment bank. But of course, the devil is always in the details, right. All of the existing proposals to date have specifically envisioned those entities along the lines of what can be done in the financial markets and economic markets that are presumptively dominated by private financiers and private profit making motives and are subject pure to existing private market logic, and can only come into plug certain holes that are identified by a reference to market failures. So even where the private market “fails”, and does not provide credit for something that would be beneficial to the public in the long run for the economy, for example. Only then can a public investor come in, and take the risk and whatnot. And there are all kinds of problems with that limited approach to public investment. 

What we can think of, instead, is a standalone federal institution that would actually be just as important in the overall federal structure of public institutions, financial institutions, as currently the Fed and the Treasury are, but it would perform this role that neither the Fed nor the Treasury department currently can perform. And that is the role of directing and managing the flow of public and public-private mixed capital into certain types of critically important public infrastructures. And it’s effectively an industrial policy entity. 

The NIA, the National Investment Authority is not envisioned as a traditional public investment bank or the traditional sovereign wealth fund or whatever, but as a system that would have the political body, the federal agency, the governing board, that would be explicitly charged with a very political task of identifying the gaps in the public infrastructure, and in the structure of the US economy and developing some kind of a strategy for the types of investments and the places in which those investments need to be made and define the goals of that investment. 

Those goals are not going to be commercial viability, per se, but the goals are bigger. Sustainability, resiliency, equality, creating jobs, increasing the well being of various communities and so on. And then in the second level, there will be the operating arms. And here we can actually have a variety of subsidiaries that will tackle various problems in various ways. The National Infrastructure Bank would actually be a much more traditional credit institution that would create a secondary market for various bonds issued by various institutions and enterprises that are building those critical public infrastructure projects. 

As a public lender, the NIB, of course, would not have to squeeze the life out of those entities on those loans, but actually would be very patient and would be ready to absorb some of the losses because some projects will, let’s face it, never be commercially viable. And that’s okay. But in addition to that kind of traditional credit provision, we can actually now think about something alongside the public venture capital fund type of an entity or public asset manager, a slightly different function for a public institution that would essentially perform the same role, as currently private asset managers perform for really wealthy investors and institutions. But this particular institution can perform that function for a certain kind of publicly important type of institutional investor, like pension funds, for example, particularly public pension funds. 

Right now, public pension funds are part of this financial market that lives according to the private financial logic. And when pension fund managers are looking at the menu of financial options that they have, should we put it in the treasuries? Should we put it in corporate bonds? Or maybe should we go into private equity because private equity funds offer higher returns? Well, how about this new asset manager that is a public asset manager can offer new type of a collective investment fund, a new type of investment opportunity for pension funds, where pension funds can put their money into those new vehicles that are managed by the National Investment Authority in the long term interests of the US economy, in US public, and channel that money into long term public infrastructure of the kind that cannot be built by private actors or via private funds. There has to be some financial engineering involved, of course. 

This is where things get controversial, to some extent, but not to me, because all we’re doing here is essentially taking existing financial instruments that currently are being used for pure private profit maximization. But the instruments themselves, you know, a shovel is a shovel, right? A good person can use a shovel for good purposes. And a bad person can use a shovel for bad purposes. In the same spirit, we can use some of these financial techniques to replicate some of the returns, for example, as a reasonable reward to pension funds and other institutional investors for participating in the financing of certain long term public infrastructure projects. In effect, subsidizing the building of those critical public infrastructures. But doing it in a way that helps to avoid a lot of the political problems around budget and debt ceiling, and what have you that currently are plaguing our system. 

So if we have that kind of National Investment Authority, it would be much easier to build it up and to enable its function as intended. If the Fed, as the issuer of the digital dollar, the CBDC and the provider of deposit accounts to the entire economy, is able to provide liquidity support to the NIA using its capacity on the asset side. These are the kinds of systemic, structural reforms that we can and should debate. Not everybody will agree on my particular proposal for example, and they don’t have to. 

There are other proposals, other ways to skin that cat or you know, whatever animal one skins. I hope nobody skins anybody. In any event, there are many ways to approach this problem. The key here is to overcome certain premises, certain presumptions and assumptions, that limit the scope of the debate. We can never talk about, basically, the central bank channeling credit directly into the economy, because that is a political problem. Well, it may or may not be. It’s not like a central bank is apolitical. It’s not meant to be apolitical. But what we can talk about is, which specific instruments are better suited to the public purposes? What public purposes really should we pursue? These kinds of deliberations, they need to happen today, and they need to happen because if they don’t happen, then we will never be able to solve the problems we have in front of us.

Billy Saas:  When you’re talking about investment, and asked the question about what the Fed and the Central Bank currently invests in, one of the things that came to mind in response to that a little bit later, as you’re unfolding The People’s Ledger and the National Investment Authority proposals, is that to the extent that the central bank is not taking these actions, is not actively having these conversations, or in fact, that there’s not a huge constituency to have these conversations at the policy level, could we say that the central bank is actively investing in the status quo where the status quo means mass inequality across all sectors, health, climate, wealth, and all that sort of thing? So the thinking of investment in a kind of negative way, right? Investing in the bad today, and pushing away any discussion of a better future. 

I’d be interested, by way of kind of closing out our conversation, Saule, which has been wonderful, in anticipating that I’ll play this or share this conversation with students in the future, I’ve had, through discussions, and I’m sure you’ve had a similar experience, and Scott probably has as well, you’re talking to students, and you’re doing the thick description of the financial picture: here’s how money works. And you see a light go on, or something snaps or clicks or ticks or whatever. And then you talk about what that permits, that fuller picture, as you have done so eloquently and thoroughly. And then the savvy student, or the savvy person you’re talking to says: “Yeah, but that’ll never work.” 

So there’s a cynicism or a pragmatism, maybe both, that kicks in at that point where it’s like, well, if this is the case, why haven’t we been doing this the entire time. And it reintroduces that question of power and investment in the status quo. So what would you or could you sort of share with us? And maybe provide me with a good way to answer that question? I don’t think I’ve come up with one. How do you reckon with the apparent, cultivated ignorance or resistance to acknowledging how things really are and then there by refusing to have conversations about what a better world we could have, if only we recognized it that way?

Saule Omarova:  Right. Well, that is, to me, a much harder question than a question about designing a potential mechanism, for example, for achieving this or that goal. And it’s a hard question for a number of reasons. And some of it is maybe personal to me, because I’m not that good with blame assignments. It’s my temperament. At the moment when I’m asked, Can we affirmatively say it is your fault for affirmatively basically reproducing the bad thing? It’s not that I don’t think there are situations when such a statement is warranted. 

There are situations like that. It’s just I don’t know how far it gets us in a way because by highlighting the specific political choices of certain entities or certain individuals, where on the other hand, doing a very important job of pinpointing the fact that this is a choice. So by not making a particular choice, the good choice, you are effectively de facto making a bad choice. 

But then I think about sort of it from my personal experience, about the fact that I grew up in the former Soviet Union, at the very end of the Soviet Empire’s lifespan. Sometimes it is difficult to imagine the possibility of change or resistance that is not futile. Because the existing system is so entrenched and so powerful, and so oppressive in many ways, that when you look at it, and even if you are in a position, for example, to take a stance on a particular issue, or at a particular level, sometimes it just seems that there is no way things could possibly change. 

Right now, when I think about the political obstacles to even having a serious conversation about these issues, let alone actually enacting the reform of any kind along those lines, I do feel that kind of despair. And it makes me feel powerless, let’s just admit to it. And in that moment, it’s very easy just on a personal level, for every individual who is part of an institution of whatever kind, even if you want that change to happen, it’s very easy to sort of feel like all it will do is kill me. It will not save it. So that’s sort of like a personal kind of thing.

 When people are in certain positions of power, and their voice actually matters, definitely the responsibility on them to act in the interest of the public is immeasurably higher than the responsibility of any other individual in any other position. Right? Maybe there is that stronger case for basically saying to the central bankers that because you’re pretending this conversation isn’t happening, you are effectively enabling really bad things to continue. So 20-50 years from now, don’t you dare hide behind some kind of excuses, like, Who would have thunk that this would happen, right? And write your memoirs about how you were thinking about all of these things, but nobody could ever really imagine? Because here we are, we are imagining. So it is your job to give us the time that we deserve in terms of listening to our arguments and engaging with us, rather than pretending we don’t exist. 

So yes. But ultimately, you know, what, Billy? Look, the Soviet Union fell apart. And nobody, nobody could have predicted it would happen this particular way, in this particular timeframe. And people were taken aback, even though everybody, everybody in that country knew that this was not a system that was going to last. But at the same time, nobody could imagine the specific mechanism and moment in which the Colossus will fall. So I’m thinking that politics is fickle. Right now, it seems to us the way central bankers are, the way the politics is, the way people think about these things, is so entrenched that there is no way that we can shift anybody’s view in the immediate term. People are just sort of so selfishly stuck in that mode of thinking, and because of the political economy and the lobbying and the corruption and whatnot, because of these various reasons. Those who could make change will never make that change. That may seem to us as the only possible reality. And 10 years from now, we could find ourselves in an entirely different situation. 

This is why I try to focus not on pushing this narrative of, “if you’re not with us, you’re against us,” but rather conserving my limited mental capacity for trying to really engage with a ton of actual substantive design issues, because there are so many open questions. Even in that People’s Ledger scheme that I briefly described, there is a ton of problems that need to be addressed: privacy of CBDC, and how to actually insulate this particular institution from the corrupting influence of new kinds of political economy forces that will inhibit new types of vested interests that might emerge, and so on, so forth. These are the issues I want to engage with. So I’m sorry if it’s really a convoluted and unsatisfactory answer. But there it is.

Billy Saas:  There it is. You’re not alone and keep fighting and stay positive. Sounds like a one way to distill that.

Scott Ferguson:  One of the ways that doing critical work and doing and contributing is not necessarily always in the most direct way, but it is contributing to the conditions of legibility, right, and helping to make the debate and what is legible shift around the powerful actors, rather than necessarily…Sometimes it’s important to go after the powerful actors and to put their feet to the fire. And, of course, this podcast is called Money On The Left, and we’re all for that. But I also think that we’re committed, like you, to a long game, that is about a politics of pedagogy, a politics of shifting how we even approach problems in the first place, and what the conditions of possibility for doing so really are.

Saule Omarova:  That’s absolutely right. And I completely agree. You put it so much better than I could. It is very, very true. And I don’t mean to dismiss the progress that we all collectively have already made. Just a few years ago, some of these notions and ideas were absolutely nowhere to be found in the discourse outside of a very, very small circle of nerdy people. And now, the mainstream press, even, here and there talks about certain things and mentions certain things. For me personally, I consider a huge achievement already for me, the fact that the NIA, the National Investment Authority, even that term now is in circulation! In 2020, when the pandemic hit, nobody but a few academics in the FinReg world even heard of that term. So you know, we’ll take it one step at a time. At some point we might actually get to the change we all need.

Billy Saas:  Saule Omarova, thank you so much for joining us on Money On The Left, it’s been a pleasure.

Saule Omarova:  Thank you so much.

Scott Ferguson:  All right. Yeah. Thanks. You did great. I didn’t hear your allergies but yeah, now you need to get a coffee and decompress.

* Thanks to the Money on the Left production teamWilliam Saas (audio editor), Mike Lewis (transcription), & Emily Reynolds of The Buffalo Institute for Contemporary Art (graphic art)

Job Guarantee as Historical Struggle with David Stein (NEW TRANSCRIPT!)

We are excited to rerelease our inaugural episode of Money on the Left alongside a brand new transcript.

Conversation originally published on May 27, 2018

Money on the Left is the official podcast of Modern Money Network: Humanities Division (@moneyontheleft).

In our inaugural episode, we consider the recent resurgence of full employment politics in the United States from both a political and historical perspective with historian David Stein (@davidpstein). Stein is currently a fellow at UCLA’s Luskin Center for History and Policy and a lecturer in the departments of History and African American Studies. Check out his recent article in Jacobin: David Stein, “Full Employment and Freedom.”

Intro music by Hillbilly Motobike.

Transcript

The following was transcribed by Mike Lewis and has been lightly edited for clarity.

Billy Saas:  Hello, you’re listening to Money on the Left, the official podcast of the Modern Money Network Humanities Division. I’m Billy Saas. 

Scott Ferguson:  I’m Scott Ferguson.

Billy Saas:  And we are co-directors of the Modern Money Network Humanities Division or MMNHD.

Scott Ferguson:  MMNHD is a big tent organization for scholars, social critics, and political activists dedicated to recovering and redeeming the cultural and political aspects of modern money, past and present. We do this primarily from a humanities perspective. But we welcome participation from anyone interested in engaging with the School of political economy, known variously as Neochartalism, or Modern Money Theory. MMT for short.

Billy Saas:  So from our perspective, what’s so transformative about MMT is that it turns conventional political economy on its head. Rather than figure money as a politically neutral commodity invented a long time ago by some particularly clever traders in some remote marketplace, MMT shows that money is always in everywhere a boundless public utility, as well as a deliberate political, cultural, and ecological project.

Scott Ferguson:  In doing so, MMT makes so much more thinkable and possible than liberal modernity’s austerity-driven imagination has historically permitted. It not only expands how money can contribute to collective flourishing, it also reorients how we conceive of cause and effect, as well as how we research and write history. In this podcast, we want to develop and complicate the Neochartalist imagination, on and for the left.

Billy Saas:  A key way that Neochartalism reframes money’s history concerns the question and politics of employment. While the hegemonic liberal paradigm treats employment as a function of private hiring and firing. Neochartalism understands employment as a thoroughly political decision. The liberal variation permits modest government assistance and makes unemployment inevitable. But MMT insists that employment is first and foremost a policy choice. And that full, inclusive, and ecologically responsible employment is always affordable.

Scott Ferguson:  In terms of format, the Money on the Left Podcast plans to feature conversations scholarly and political, close readings of texts, interviews, and occasionally some fresh hot takes on current events. In this, our first episode, we invited historian David Stein to help us make sense of the recent resurgence of full employment legislation and debate in the United States. David is currently a fellow at UCLA Luskin Center for History and Policy, and a lecturer in the Department of History and African American Studies. His first book will be published in 2019 by University of North Carolina Press. Its title, Fearing Inflation, Inflating Fears: The Civil Rights Struggle for Full Employment and the Rise of the Carceral State 1929 to 1986. With Betsy Beasley, he co-hosts Who Makes Cents, a history of capitalism podcast, which we chat with him about at the end of the interview.

Billy Saas:  We asked David for some historical perspective on the proposals for a jobs guarantee put forward recently by Senators Bernie Sanders, Kirsten Gillibrand, and Cory Booker, who each seem ready to make the JG a critical plank of their 2020 presidential campaigns. Lots of us in the MMT world are thrilled to see the JG taken up by the front runners for the Democratic nomination. But some others on the left, many of whom have never challenged the liberal money story, worry that the jobs guarantee is alternately pie in the sky progressivism, or just another route to Workfare. As you’ll hear, David puts both the historical fight for full employment and these left critiques in a broader historical context. We were joined in our conversation with David by Max Seijo, a graduate student in Film and Media Studies at University of South Florida. Without further ado, here’s our conversation with David:  You’ve done fantastic work documenting the history of full employment movements in the United States. How exciting have these last couple of weeks been for you? What has excited you most? 

David Stein:  Thank you for having me. It’s been thrilling to see the reemergence of full employment and guaranteed jobs to its place of prominence within the dominant agenda of the Democratic Party. It is a demand that has a long history within the Democratic Party from the 1940s through through the 1980s but really fell out of the Democratic Party’s platform in the 1980s and grew weaker in the platform in 1984 and 1988. I know a number of activists who really fought to get it back into the party’s platform in 2016, so that in and of itself was really exciting. I think to see Senators Gillibrand, and Senator Sanders and Senator Booker all come out in support of various versions of guaranteed jobs has really pushed it to the front of our political agenda. And I think it really can reopen our imaginations about what’s possible. I think that’s really exciting and the idea that this is going to be a durable kind of conversation over the next few years, to me is completely a reorientation of where we were just a few years ago. I started writing this project, this book that I’m in the process of finishing, back in the years after the 2008 recession. I was puzzled as to why guaranteed jobs weren’t emerging as a key solution to the unemployment crisis that so many people were facing. So to see it now, a decade later, after years of inadequate recovery, in terms of how the recovery has been experienced in everyday people’s lives, to me is a real exciting moment and testament to a lot of activism that a lot of people have been doing over this past decade.

Billy Saas:  Yeah, it’s interesting that this conversation is starting back up 10 years after the worst of the financial crisis. What do you think it is? What had to go away or what had to happen in order for this conversation to be happening now, do you think?

David Stein:  I think there’s a combination of a number of factors. One, I think the completely inadequate recovery of government jobs at the state and municipal level, which we’ve now seen over recent weeks, also with all the teacher strikes happening, I think that’s part of that inadequate recovery over the past decade. I haven’t seen the recent stats, but I know a little while ago, it was something like a million jobs were lost in state and municipalities that have just never returned. Those of us who are in academia, we really have seen this very clearly. That’s one element. I think another element is the 2016 election. Just like after the 1972 election, the Democratic Party believed that they had moved too far left in that election and began reorienting towards the right, and especially after the 1980 election. I think the 2016 election, alongside the immense energy that was posed that met the Sanders campaign. I think that’s propelled some of these conversations. I also think just the tremendous amount of grassroots activism has really propelled this conversation. And then I think, at the Federal Reserve level, or at the level, policy wonk conversations around inflation, the inadequate wage gains that have been made by workers, even amidst relatively low unemployment rates over the past few years, has really posed questions about the extent to which the Phillips Curve and ideas like that continue to hold purchase. I believe it was Daniel Tarullo, a key powerful actor within the Federal Reserve System now retired, who gave a talk at Brookings a few months ago saying “the Federal Reserve has no coherent theory of inflation.” Whereas inflationary fears really stifled the efforts to legislatively win guaranteed jobs over decades. So I think all of those factors have contributed.

Scott Ferguson:  So on this podcast, we’re really interested in the humanities and what the humanities can bring to the study of Political Economy and specifically through a new charter list lens. Much of this story in the way it’s playing out now and the big actors are politicians, economists, as you said, policy wonks, certainly organizers and activists of various stripes. But clearly there’s a place and a role for us humanists, right? You in particular, you’re not just studying what’s going on, you’re participating in your own way. Whether it’s with Fed Up, or, or just on Twitter. And I’m curious if you can speak to your own role in how this is playing out, and how the study of history and maybe the humanities approach, more generally, is important for this fight?

David Stein:  I think there’s a few different answers to that question. One of them is, I’m glad you asked this early on, because I think if anyone tunes out or later, I think I have two key lessons that I would say are really important going forward. The first one is that: if we think about how this was a key goal of the civil rights movement–one of the most powerful social movements I know of ever to exist, that broke the US apartheid system–that that movement was not strong enough to fully achieve a governmental jobs guarantee. I think if history provides a guide for us, it’s that our movements may, or will, need to be stronger than that, which I think is a really, really daunting task and a humbling task. But I also think from having studied social movements, that an appropriate power analysis is a key starting point for any struggle. So I think that’s one lesson and think the other key lesson is that in the post 1948 era or so, I can think of about a four year span, when winning these sorts of proposals could have been possible had the movements been strong enough. That’s the years 1964 to 1966, and 1976, to 1978. You can make an argument that had the movements appeared in 2008 to 2010, that they might have been legislatively possible. The movements were not anywhere there during 2008 to 2010. What that lesson shows us is that these openings can appear quickly, and they can disappear just as quickly, and we don’t know when they’re going to return again. So I think it’s really vital, back to the first question about one of the things I’ve been most excited about right now, is that I think and I hope we’re preparing for that opening that might occur between 2020 and 2022. I think that we need to be ready when that opening appears because we don’t know when it’s going to appear again. Those to me are the two key lessons that history teaches us. The third and sort of subsidiary to those two, and this more goes against some of the articles and essays that I’ve been reading that are a bit ignorant of the history of this demand that portray it as a demand so far out of left field or so incompatible with US history and US policy history is to assert that in the key reason that we don’t have this already, or at least it wasn’t achieved in 1945. We don’t know what would have happened after that. We can’t jump too far back into the counterfactuals. But the key reason this wasn’t achieved in 1945 was because of Jim Crow. And because of the role of Jim Crow power in Congress and to a certain extent it’s a similar story in the 1960s. One key reason why demands for full employment and job guarantees weren’t included in the war on poverty was because Johnson knew they could never get through Wilbur Mills’s House Ways and Means Committee. Wilbur Mills was considered at the time to be one of the most powerful members of Congress if not the most powerful member of Congress. Well, where did Wilbur Mills come from? He was the longtime congressman from Arkansas, from a Jim Crow district. So his power was very much linked with the kind of daily life of a Jim Crow society, and of course, when we look at all these key Dixiecrat congressmen, most of them don’t leave Congress by way of democracy. They leave Congress, in Mills’s case, via scandal and disgrace. In many other people’s cases, via death. They didn’t leave Congress until the 2000s, some in the 90s, some of the 80s. It’s not like the Voting Rights Act passes, and these congressmen and I say men specifically. And these congressmen didn’t just pack up their briefcases to go home in 1965. They continue to win election after election. Knowing that history can also show that although job guarantee movements were never ever to achieve those goals legislatively. It wasn’t because they weren’t a dominant moral value, I think guaranteed jobs, full employment was a dominant moral value from the 1940s through the 1970s. But they were never able to push those Dixiecrat congressmen out of their positions of power in order to win legislatively.  

Scott Ferguson:  So a follow up to that. Let’s say skeptics will often point to Michal Kalecki’s now famous article, “The Political Aspects of Full Employment”. They presume that his argument is that sure this is monetarily, economically possible, but it may not be and probably isn’t politically possible. My response to this is always, well, let’s be historical about this, right? I mean, Kalecki was engaging and wrestling with this question at a very particular juncture, when we were in a post war context, the question of full employment was haunting everybody. Very different groups were weighing in, had different visions for what this might look like, how possible it was going to be or not be. I guess my question to you, David, is, if the political aspects and or obstacles to full employment are historical, what do you see today? What are the historical conditions which may facilitate this movement and may block it?

David Stein:  It’s a really good question. Well, I think to me, one of the biggest lessons of history is that one is forced to confront with immense humility what is possible in a given moment, and how few people have any sense of what is both optimistically and pessimistically. One of the lessons that I really try to teach my students is a lesson that the scholar George Lipsitz writes about, and that his writing has taught to me. He says: very few people in 1859, very few abolitionists could have known that their decades of effort, the self activity of enslaved people, the resistance of running away, of breaking one’s hoes, all sorts of things like that. That those would see their expression in the self activity of enslaved people amidst the Civil War, and that enslavement would be abolished, never to return in the United States. Very few people could have envisioned that in 1859. To me, one of the things I’ve been inspired by in my writing about full employment movements is that I tried to write as if these movements could and would reemerge. And the second they achieved their goals, suddenly, the entire history of struggling for these goals would look different. That right this second, you can look at the history of struggles for full employment and say: it’s been 80 years of failure. The second that that changes, that history appears differently. The second guaranteed jobs appear, it’s like, wow, it took eighty years of robust activism to achieve this goal. And I’ve tried to write with that day in mind. I’ve thought about it alongside other activists. In the weeks after the March on Washington, Bayard Rustin, the lead organizer of the March on Washington is giving a speech, and he says things like, “we’re losing the fight my friends,” he says, “we’re losing quickly, where are we winning?” He’s very frustrated at that moment. After three decades of activism, he doesn’t know what historians know, which is that the Civil Rights Act of 1964 is right on the horizon, then the Voting Rights Act is right on the horizon. And so in the weeks after the March on Washington, he doesn’t feel this tremendous swelling of success, because he doesn’t know what’s on the horizon. We don’t know what’s possible, so for those who are writing, “full employment is so difficult because of x, y, z problem or x, y, z thing.” I tell one person writing, “what about the Fed?” It’s like, okay, yeah, that’s a key issue that Coretta Scott King really, really cared about. To me, it’s really important to ask that question, but not in a way that’s about saying it’s impossible and throwing up hands, but to say, yeah, the Fed, which is an institution that is created by Congress, it’s relative autonomy, its independence is institutionalized in congressional legislation. So that would need to be addressed in any legislation, how the Fed would need to adhere itself to an employment mandate, to a federal employment mandate for all, at least so far as the US continues to have a capitalist democracy. I think those are elements to struggle over and to work out and to be aware of in the writing of the policy, but they’re not reasons to not struggle for it.

Maxx Seijo:  You brought up Coretta Scott King already. I was wondering if you could talk about the relationship between her lifelong activism and this current movement and maybe dig in a little bit into the details as to the things you were linking to your last comment about the Fed and things like that.

David Stein:  Yeah. So you mentioned in an earlier question about the Fed Up campaign. A few months ago or maybe almost a year ago, I co-wrote a report with the economist Dean Baker on behalf of an in collaboration with the Center for Popular Democracy is Fed Up campaign which has worked really hard to get the Federal Reserve to be more accountable to everyday people whose lives are impacted every day by the interest rates they pay on their credit card bills or student loans, or car payments, as well as the general level of the economy. Coretta Scott King was the founder, she co-founded and led this group called the Full Employment Action Council and the National Committee for Full Employment and they were kind of parallel organizations that were slightly separated for tax purposes. She co lead that organization, that coalition, starting in 1974, and the goal was to achieve guaranteed jobs legislation. She was well aware, as anyone was in the 1970s, that the high interest rate policies of the Fed and how the Fed needed to adhere to its employment mandate. There’s debate from scholars about where the employment mandate comes from. I found recent evidence that it does indeed go back to the 1946 Employment Act. But the Fed didn’t abide by that employment mandate as strongly as they might have to say the least. It was for that reason that many scholars traced the employment mandate to the 1977 Federal Reserve Reform Act and the 1978 Humphrey Hawkins Act, of which Coretta Scott King was the key activist and her organization were the key activists promoting the 1978 Humphrey Hawkins Act, which had been around and been drafted throughout the mid 1970s. They knew that in order to achieve guaranteed jobs and full employment, they needed the Fed to accede to those goals. Dean Baker and I wrote this report in a sense trying to remember this history of the Fed’s employment mandate, and promote the goal of the Fed keeping interest rates low, continuing to facilitate economic recovery, and continuing to adhere to the law. If people know of the 1978 full employment Humphrey Hawkins Act at all, it’s because when the Fed comes to Congress twice a year, it’s called the Humphrey Hawkins testimony. This was one of the acts that Coretta Scott King and legislators Augustus Hawkins and Hubert Humphrey tried to create in order to ensure that the Fed would be accountable to those who are democratically elected to Congress. The reason that’s really important is because prior to that, in the 1970s, you had a leading economist with the Joint Economic Committee saying they couldn’t even get basic data from the Fed at the time. The Fed was acting as if it was completely autonomous, that their independence was completely autonomous from Congress. This legislation was the attempt to get the Fed to be more accountable to Congress, and thus, more accountable to the people of the United States, who are impacted by their policies. In order to fight for that legislation, there’s all sorts of exciting stories that I can tell you about. I think the 1977 Full Employment Action Week is really inspiring, where 1.5 million people took all sorts of actions in order to protest and propel the legislation. There were parades in Erie, Pennsylvania, with 40,000 people attending, things of that sort that I think are really on a scale of activism that is quite significant. Augustus Hawkins said it was the most amazing activism he’d seen since the March on Washington of 1963. That can give our audience a sense of just how powerful this effort was.

Maxx Seijo:  Coretta Scott King argues that we’ve never really dealt honestly with the question of a peacetime economy. And this is something that I’ve spent a little bit of time thinking about in relation to the kind of full employment debates of today. And I was wondering what you thought about the relationship between World War Two and the mobilization and the job guarantee debates and her activism and kind of how those all go together in this history, especially as you say, if we’re to really succeed now and really actualize this history for our present moment. We need to understand the way these certain strains of contestation interact with full employment and the war itself. So I was wondering if you had any thoughts about that?

David Stein:  Yeah. So I think this is also really important for thinking about some of the contemporary critiques of full employment and guaranteed jobs. The people who say: “Oh, it’s too hard! Administratively, how would it work? It’s just way too complicated.” When we think back to the generation that Coretta Scott King was a part of: she was born in 1927, she lived through the Great Depression, she saw World War Two. They saw just a complete reorientation of the scale and scope of what the federal government could do, and that enliven their imaginations about what was possible, and gave them confidence to call for these sorts of bold demands. I was thinking, while you were asking your question, of a quote from William Lucey, who was the leader, and co founder of the Coalition of Black Trade Unionists in the early 1970s. This was a group, the Coalition of Black Trade Unionists, which, as far as I’m aware, no group has continually promote full employment guaranteed jobs as long as this group has. So to the extent that people remember full employment, I stumbled on an article, that was a fairly good article, but that was like, Why Full Employment Is Back From The Dead, something along those headlines. I was like, well, it never died, and the reason it never died was because of people like Bill Lucy and people in the Coalition of Black Trade Unionists, as well as you all are well aware of the Post Keynesian economic tradition. Bill Lucy has this quote in the early 1970s, amidst these full employment movements, this is in 1975. He says, “In the wartime, when they gear up the war machine, everybody fits into a slot. They make welders out of laborers and pipefitters out of farmers.” So for him, he’d seen that experience, and so he then said, “This is why the federal government should now employ people in transportation, construction, and health services, and environmental work.” So they were thinking dialectically, if you will, to say the military industrial complex and the World War Two efforts showed them what was politically and economically possible. But as dedicated peace activists, like Coretta Scott King was, like her husband was and like many others, they said: well, why don’t we reorient this spending and this energy towards social needs that really fulfill human human lives. I think that’s a key element. They had also just seen, we need to remember, this is amidst the Vietnam War and the years after the Vietnam War, depending. Scott King’s activism continued after the Vietnam War. For her, she saw, okay, we have this economy that’s so tied into militarism, that has helped propel this war effort. And so as an anti war activist, she was like, okay, well, we need an economy that’s geared towards peace and an economy that’s geared towards social needs. As she puts it, she says, “We’re going to have to create meaningful jobs, jobs that serve human needs. As long as there are people, you are going to have certain health care needs, education needs, things that will make for a better quality of living.” So this is what she believed in. She also believed that, she says, “jobs that go beyond the profit making motive.” Thinking a lot about what the job guarantee could do to decarbonize our environment, to clean up the environment, of course, to end the water poisoning of an entire city. We’ve just accepted that the Flint water crisis is going to continue indefinitely and I’m struggling for words to describe how we wake up every day, and we just allow that to continue. 

Scott Ferguson:  There’s such a disconnect between this pervasive feeling and discourse around crisis and around needs, right? We know the many, many things that we need to address. Then, when we get to some of the job guarantee rhetoric in the job guarantee debate, especially this last week, and suddenly those needs go away. Suddenly, everything is good enough. Suddenly, well, oh the private sector will take care of it. I wanted to bring up something that David, you and I have talked about in the past. I know you’re not principally an aesthetic theorist or a student of visual culture, principally. But I’m curious to have you speak to the aesthetics and visual culture around various moments of full employment, struggles, campaigns, fights. And it seems to me that questions of certainly race, if not also gender, and sexuality and of course class play a part in this. One of the things that I’ve been extremely frustrated by in contemporary discourse around just employment, especially around national elections, like pre job guarantee debates that have been happening very recently, where we can only imagine jobs, or employment politics through the image of a kind of Nixon hard hat. Like, a white guy who’s gonna do some tough infrastructure jobs. Sure, we want plenty of those. But there’s a whole diverse world out there. And I’m curious, if just in your research, maybe even anecdotally, could you reflect on just the aesthetics of full employment politics in the past?

David Stein:  Yeah. Well, I think there’s a few things that I’d say to that. I think one, like you’ve suggested, we need to reorient our conception of work. There’s all these conversations about the future of work, but there’s a group of people at the Bureau of Labor Statistics who, at least among a lot of the kind of big headline conversations about the future of work, the Bureau of Labor Statistics folks don’t seem to be really consulted on. I just pulled it up on my computer, which the Bureau of Labor Statistics puts out the fastest growing occupations outlook every few years. If you look at it, I think it’s quite indicative and quite important, and can reorient our ideas around what this looks like. So the number one fastest growing occupation, says BLS, is solar panel installers, then wind turbine service technicians, then home health care aides, then personal care aides, then physician’s assistants, then nurse practitioners, right. So that’s what the future of work, at least according to BLS, looks like. If we think about especially the care work of home health care aides, personal care aides, physician’s assistants, nurse practitioners, these are jobs that historically have been done by women of color, by Black women. To the extent that things like home health care aides, to the extent that those jobs are low paid right now, according to BLS, the median pay for home health care aides and personal care aides is $27,000 per year. Anyone who knows anything about those jobs knows that those are incredibly difficult jobs, incredibly skilled jobs, and jobs that require tremendous amounts of compassion, of energy, of physical hard work of lifting, making beds, doing so many different tasks. So if we asked, why aren’t these jobs paid $100,000 a year? Why aren’t they compensated commensurate to the skill that one sees in those jobs? Well, a big part of that goes back to the history of racism and the history of patriarchy in this country. When I think about what the future of work could look like, or does look like, I think about home health care aides, and how they can be compensated in ways commensurate with how difficult those jobs are, and also with how important those jobs are to dignified life for elderly people and all other people who those home health aides and personal care aides are helping with their daily lives to lead fulfilling, dignified life. And then I think there’s all sorts of other questions. If we think back to aesthetics, and the WPA, and art, I was just speaking with a friend of mine, who I think is a really brilliant, inspiring artist, Evan Bissell, who’s out of the Bay Area, who did a really extraordinary project a few years ago around around the 50th anniversary of the March on Washington, as well as a number of other real community engaged art projects. Evan also is an urban planner, so he’s done a lot of work around community art to talk about the housing crisis and things of that nature. I just think about how many other artists are out there doing work like Evans, that is not necessarily going to be compensated by the market? There’s not a strong market for creating beautiful murals that educate a community about their rent control rights, which is the kind of work that Evan does. He did a project with the Morris Justice Project out of the City University in New York, to organize against broken windows policing in New York. He painted these beautiful pictures in collaboration with members of the local community that say “we are not broken windows” that showed what the community actually looked like. I think there’s not a strong market for that type of work. I always ask what images of beauty and safety can be proliferated with a job guarantee. Of course, as I mentioned a minute ago, if we go back to the WPA, you had people writing plays, the Federal Theater Project. You also had murals, you also had art workers, you had people writing guidebooks to their cities, people like Zora Neale Hurston and Richard Wright. There’s so much that people could be doing, work that the market has not necessarily chosen to compensate.

Billy Saas:  What’s been exciting about this week, like watching how people are talking about the job guarantee, is to sort of notice the kind of arguments that have fallen off, that were active for the last 30 years, specifically around the pay for question and the idea of fiscal responsibility and the fiscal constraints, and that’s too ambitious, you’re going to take our taxpayer money, and all those sorts of things. That seems to have taken a backseat if not disappeared. But we have, at the same time, these other kinds of rhetorical currents or obstacles that are rising up as we talk about full employment in a real sense and a federal jobs guarantee. So the rhetoric of Workfare is circulating now, and as this is happening, and thinking about these new rhetorical obstacles that might take the place or take precedent over the fiscal responsibility talk. I wonder if you might say a little bit about the sort of rhetorical currents and arguments that were used between 64 and 66, and 76 and 78 when you say that these movements were most possible. What were the arguments then? What were the big rhetorical obstacles put in front of Coretta Scott King and others like Bayard Rustin and Leon Keyserling, the freedom budget. What were people saying then?

David Stein:  Firstly, I’ve been, frankly, a bit mystified, by the claim that this would be Workfare in the sense that every single person who I know who has fought for guaranteed jobs over the past 80 years, it was always about expanding the social welfare state, through social movement organizing. Like most activists, they thought dialectically. So they thought, okay, we win something, and then we continue working on it. It’s not like we win a goal, and then we go home and retire. It’s always about winning something usually. For these activists, they demanded 10 things, and they won three of them. And then they took that list of seven things, they didn’t win and continued working on it. So for them, the job guarantee was never was never the end of the road. It was always okay, well, now, how does that reorient the political landscape? And now how do we keep working towards greater degrees of justice and equality for all people. The other thing is that, for these activists, a job guarantee wasn’t the only thing they were fighting for, it was one of many. For them, a job guarantee wasn’t about reducing the social welfare state that currently existed in any way. It was about expanding it, as I said a minute ago. In the 1960s, there were various ways in which the full employment campaigns did and did not work in synchronicity with the Welfare Rights Movement. Some of which had to do with assumptions about male breadwinner ideas and male work, some of which had to do with a number of other things that are a bit more idiosyncratic. But then there’s also elements to where, and this won’t surprise anyone who’s involved in contemporary activism, or who has ever been in contemporary activism was that, at least in Seattle, and I haven’t been able to explore this more thoroughly in other locales, but at least in Seattle, the people who are meeting around guaranteed jobs and full employment on say, Wednesday night, were then meeting and organizing around welfare rights on say, Thursday night and or Friday night. They were like, these organizations are going to be formally separate. They weren’t collapsing them. And, of course, no political formation fought against the nascent system of Workfare more than the National Welfare Rights Organization in the mid to late 1960s. And Coretta Scott King was a strong supporter of the national rights organization and their support of a guaranteed annual income for all which, of course, is different from a universal basic income. They’ve kind of collapsed historically in recent years but I’ve seen some collapse but that’s very different from what Martin Luther King or Coretta Scott King or what the National Welfare Rights Organization was fighting for. They were promoting a guaranteed annual income for everyone who was unable to work for whatever reason due to care work responsibilities, and they were fighting for dignity for all people. Whether through a job or through or through guaranteed annual income, it wasn’t a universal basic income that would apply to everyone. All that’s to say that the claim that adding a federal jobs guarantee to our otherwise existing welfare state that that would somehow be Workfare has, I find it, as I said, a bit mystifying. It doesn’t. There’s not one significant supporter of guaranteed jobs that I can think of in the past 80 years who would have endorsed that type of proposal, and I can’t imagine very many people, if any, would endorse that kind of proposal today. I mentioned Wilbur Mills earlier, the congressman from Arkansas, he was one of the chief proponents of the Work Incentive Program and the types of early Workfare that was created in the 1960s that the National Welfare Rights Organization and the Poor People’s Campaign and Coretta Scott King were fighting against during that era. So not only is the charge that job guarantee advocates would create Workfare inaccurate. In point of fact, job guarantee advocates and guaranteed annual income activists fought against the nascent system of Workfare in the 1960s. Back to your question about what some of the arguments against full employment were in the 1960s and 1970s. In the 1960s, a lot of the arguments were about upsetting the balance of payments problems that were going on during that period. And by the 1970s, the key arguments against it were that it would be inflationary. 

Billy Saas:  Would it be inflationary?

David Stein:  To be honest, I’m probably not the best person to answer that. As a historian, I think there’s reasons to think it might. I think, to paraphrase Coretta Scott King, the unemployed are not pawns to be sacrificed in some economic chess game. So the cost of a bit of inflation is, the human cost is the immense unemployment that hits transgender workers, formerly imprisoned people, Black people, Latino people, the worst. If that’s the acceptable cost of stabilizing the economy, then I think we really need to pose critical questions about that, and who those policies serve and who they don’t. As Daniel Tarullo said, as I mentioned, the Fed and most economists don’t have a coherent theory of inflation. That’s where I’m like: well, I trust Daniel Tarullo. He knows more about it than I do. And so if he says that the Fed doesn’t have a coherent theory of inflation, I don’t see how and why you can continue to go along sacrificing such human capacities in human beings lives to this idea that it would be inflationary when people like him are not even sure that this idea has any purchase any longer.

Billy Saas:  That definition of full employment was one of the things that Coretta Scott King pushed back on, and you’ve written about this, defining it as 5% unemployment doesn’t quite make sense. So zero involuntary unemployment being the preferred definition of full employment for Coretta Scott King. Have you seen people bringing up that discussion of the rhetorical aspects of full employment recently around these jobs guarantee proposals?

David Stein:  I’ve seen a bit of it. I haven’t seen a ton. My colleague, the economist Mark Paul and I have been talking about maybe writing something–Now that I’ve said that out loud to you all, maybe we actually have to write it–that traces that. And that was a consistent ideological struggle during this period was the definition of full employment. As the idea of the non accelerating inflation rate of unemployment takes hold, the idea of the NAIRU takes hold, people keep saying, full employment equals, like you said, 4% 5% 6%, and so forth, which really contrasted to what full employment meant, say in the 1940s when it came a popular concept as William Beveridge, who really helped popularize the concept says in his book. He says, full employment means jobs at decent wages where people are located, that there should always be more vacant jobs than, he says, unemployed men. I think we would think that concept be excised of the “man” in that sentence today, but I think that definition is really important. To see how that was what it meant in the 1940s, and what is being struggled over in the 1970s, is the definition of it. The definition we’ve inherited is one that was antagonistic to what Beveridge and many others proposed. And we can even see that if you read the congressional debates over the 1945 Full Employment Bill, you can see that definition being struggled over and you have leaders of the National Association of Manufacturers arguing for the definition that many people currently have of it today that it’s whatever percentage economic policymakers deem appropriate in order to stabilize the inflation, right? That’s obviously not the Civil Rights tradition of what full employment means.

Billy Saas:  It strikes me as one of those phrases or terms that has gotten the historical privilege of not having to be defined. And when I talk to students about, or I ask them about, what is full employment? The first thing that comes to mind is not 5% unemployment, it is everybody has a job. What might be salutary about this current resurgence of jobs guarantee talk is a real politicization of that idea of what counts as full employment. Sorry, please write that essay.

Maxx Seijo:  I wanted to shift gears a little bit to the more contemporary and think about the relationship to the history that you’ve discussed, and the fight for full employment, and also kind of a step beyond that to the contemporary Black struggle, specifically in the rise of Black Lives Matter over the last decade, and how your history and what the questions that you’re thinking about in your book can inform the movement today, and the fight for racial justice today, and how that coincides with the job guarantee?

David Stein: I mentioned the Coalition of Black Trade Unionists, they’ve continued to promote a job guarantee for decades. In other new formations alongside the rise of the Black Lives Matter movement groups, like the Black Youth Project 100, have also called for a job guarantee. The way I see it is that the broad Black freedom movements have had the longest tradition fighting for guaranteed jobs for all, and a lot of it comes through the moral values of people over profit, that human beings lives are more important than the profit motive, and more important than profit, which is a durable, moral value across Black freedom movements. The other way I think about it is I think there’s multiple streams of welfare state traditions. I’ve been thinking about this as I develop my dissertation, in collaboration with one of my advisors and mentors, and now friends, the historian Robin DG Kelley. One thing that he and I talked about, and that I really learned from him, is that while many people trace the welfare state tradition to Germany and Otto von Bismarck, there was also as I’ve written a contemporaneous Black radical tradition of welfare state struggle during Reconstruction. W.E.B. Du Bois called this tradition “abolition democracy”, which was the focus on creating new democratic institutions in order to provide safety and social provision for all people, while also seeking to eradicate institutions of racial violence and any vestige of enslavement. There needed to be both a negative abolition of enslavement and a positive abolition, the creation of these new institutions. I see the kind of moral values of abolition democracy that in the 1870s might have expressed themselves as calls for things like land access for the formerly enslaved. In the 1940s and after, I think we really see those expressing themselves or articulating themselves as calls for a job guarantee, within Black freedom movements. I think we see that tradition continue through today. It’s also part of the radical humanism of Black freedom movements, that’s a consistent force throughout their history. I’ve been teaching a course on women in the Black Freedom Movement for the past few weeks and this quarter, we just finished reading Ella Baker’s biography, by Professor Barbara Ransby. One thing Professor Ransby notes is that, for Baker, she secularized her childhood social values in the black Baptist tradition, and expressed them throughout her life in the form of radical humanism, calls for job guarantees and economic justice for all. We can see the expression of those types of social and moral values throughout the Black Freedom Movement in different forms from reconstruction, through today.

Scott Ferguson:  Well, I was thinking, perhaps to conclude what has been a really rich dialogue, we could get you to talk a little bit about plugging your podcast.

David Stein:  So I host a monthly podcast called Who Makes Cents, a history of capitalism podcast. Cents is spelled C-E-N-T-S. And you can find us on whomakescentspodcast.com I produce and co-hosted with my colleague, Betsy Beasley. We talk about some of these issues. I do a lot less talking on that show. Folks who are listening to this show might be interested in a number of our episodes. We have an episode with Sandy Brian Hager on public debt and inequality that harmonizes with Modern Monetary Theory post Keynesian tradition. We also have great episodes with LaShawn Harris on the history of Black women in the informal economy. We have, you know, an episode with Geoff Mann on what he describes as a Keynesian sensibility. Also an important episode with Kim Phillips-Fein on the fiscal crisis in New York in the 1970s and the rise of austerity politics. One more episode folks might be interested in is an episode with the scholar Mehrsa Baradaran on banking for lower income Americans and she talks a bit about some of her ideas about postal banking, and things like that. And then lastly, I’d just say one more thing. I know I’ve given you a lot, but folks might be interested in our episode with Sarah Jaffe on social movements since the 2008 recession. Sarah Jaffe is a really important journalist who did a really important interview with activist Ady Barkan about the jobs guarantee and how it’s coming in this moment of resurgence. So Sarah’s episode on her own show with Ady, might be inspiring for folks listening as well as Sarah’s work generally, and our interview with her about social movements since the 2008 Recession.

Billy Saas:  Do you want to say anything about your book project? And yeah, I mean, we’ve spoken about it generally, and I think maybe very specifically at points.  

David Stein:  Yeah, I think I’d just say that I’m finishing a book on civil rights struggles for guaranteed jobs, and how and why those were stifled and how the kind of stifling of those struggles helped facilitate the rise of mass incarceration. The temporal scope is from 1929, the Great Depression to 1986 with the passage of the Omnibus Crime Control and with the Anti Drug Abuse Act of 1986 and the Tax Reform Act of 1986. And I’m finishing that up as we speak, and it should be out in the next 18 months or so from the University of North Carolina Press.

Billy Saas:  To keep up with David and his many projects, follow him on Twitter at @davidpstein. For more Money on the Left related content, follow us on Twitter at @moneyontheleft, and subscribe to our YouTube and Vimeo channels, which are each called Modern Money Network Humanities Division. Special thanks to Alex Williams for producing this podcast and for being one half of Hillbilly Motobike, the excellent Montreal based drums and electronics duo that hooked us up with our theme song.  

* Thanks to the Money on the Left production teamWilliam Saas (audio editor), Mike Lewis (transcription), & Meghan Saas (graphic art)